+ All Categories
Home > Documents > Alstom Training Manual

Alstom Training Manual

Date post: 21-Jan-2016
Category:
Upload: madanasekhar-tadimarri
View: 882 times
Download: 31 times
Share this document with a friend
Description:
Basics of EHV Substation Equipment
62
.! :J: o !) ;3 {) o {) :) j} ) \ ') l' & 0 PROJEC1'S ') AlS1'OM l\M\1£.O eclS t_\SSIon & t)IsIriboJrion Proi >lSI"'" UMITED. \lftd floO'. B\od<. 19/1 G. S. ,. """". ",,-' o.onoo',.OO 0>' )
Transcript
Page 1: Alstom Training Manual

~)

J ~

o )

3

)

o )

)

j

)

) l amp 0 PROJEC1S

) AlS1OM lM1poundO

eclS t_SSIon amp t)IsIriboJrion ProigtlSI UMITED lftd floO ~ Bodlt 191 G S - oonooOO 0gt

)

Introduction o amptie cwetYiew 01 substation engineering

1

Substations form on important port of the transmission and distribution networks - of electric pwer system They control the supply of power on different circuits by

means of various equipment such 0$ transformers compensating equipment ) circuit breakers etc Various circuits are joined together through these components to

bus bar systems at the substations While the bus-bar systems follow certain definite ~ patterns limiting the scaP for variation there is practically no standardization

regarding the physical arrangement called the layout of the various components ) relating to one another For the some type of bus-bar system different layouts have

been used in different countries and in fact in Indio there are variations in this regard j not only among the various State Electricity Boards but also within a State Electricity

Board This manual gives the basic requirements ond for the sake of illustration a contains typical layouts for various types of bus-bar systems

One of the primary requirements of a good substation layout is that it should be asbull i

economical as possible but it should ensure the desired degree of flexibility and ) reliability ease of operation and maintenance expansion and meets all safety

requirements of the operation and maintenance personnel Besides the layout 9 should not lead to breakdowns in power supply due to faults within the substation os

such faults are more serious A brief discussion on the various components and 1) auxiliary facilities required in substation and how they affect the layout is included

bull Many standards viz IS as lEe IEEE and the like guide the design of substations It is essential that the equipment used and the practices followed conform to the latest standards as required by the customer D This manual is aimed at understanding the basis of sub-station design If deals with

bull 0

voltage levels between 33 kV and 400 kV and standard switching schemes It also discusses briefly about sele~on of major equipment

bull 3

f)

3

)

j

J

~

J lt

)

gt

introduces lhe di(fllrent types 01 submiddotslaions

Generation station

Generation is done at 11 kV - 15 kV level As power of very high capacities cannot be nsmitted for long distances at these voltages it is stepped up using generator transformers to 110 kV - 400 kV levels Generation stations are in simple terms ~ step-up stations

)

Grid station o () Grid Stations are used to interconnect different gridsregionssectors They are

generally 400 kV substations They are stotions switching power from one generationgrid station to other They can olso be called Switching Stations

Distribution station

Distribution Stations are located at the load points where the power is stepped down to bull ~

bull o 11 kV - 110 kV levels

Bulk Industrial supply stations o

bull Bulk Industrial Supply Stations are distribution stations catering to one or 0 few consumers The supply voltage can range from 33 kV to 110 kV Industriol users do

I have their own generotion focilities besides the SEB supply and these s1a1ions oct asie step-up stations as well

bull o Sur 1S can also be classified as Step-up stotions Primary grid Stations Secondary

stc Sub-secondary stations and Distributions stations depending upon their POSHIn in the power system hierarchy

bull Generally the Substations are of outdoor type for 33 kV and above EHV Stations can be indoor depending upon the environmental conditions like pollution salinity etc and space constraints Indoor stations are Air - Insulated or SF6 gas - insulated depending upon the availability of space and financial constraints Gas Insulated D Substations (GIS) are extremely costly and requires extra maintenance and hence are preferred only when it is absolutely necessary

3

gt

Substation types

r

~1

~~

I

~

~

()

fJ j

G

D

0

bull 0

bull 0

~

0

a J )

J

--middot

c~

~ bull

D

-

Salient features of major equipment Major eqc Omenl In a $vbslalion

Tr substation layout is influenced to a great middot~xtent by the dimension of the

eCjUlpment and their accessories within the substwlon

Circuit Breakers

Circuit Breaker is a mechanical device capable of making carrying and breaking

currents undN normal circuit conditions and making carrying for a specified time and

breaking IS under short circuit conditions Circuit Breakers of the types indicated

below are used in India

36 kV Minimum oil Vacuum Sulfur hexa fluoride (SF6)

725 kV Minimum oil Sulphur hexa fluoride (SF6)

145 kV and above Sulphur hexa fluoride (SF)

245 kV and higher voltage outdoor circuit breakers generally necessitate the

provision of approach roods for breaker maintenance

400 kV CBs may hove pre-insertion resistors depending up on the system

requirement When a CB interrupts a transformer or a reactor circuit switching over

voltages can be more than 15 pu or 25 pu respectively (maximum limit

recommended by IEC) resistors are required to prevent restrikes due to current

chopping When lightly loaded tines are disconnected interruption of capacitive

currents take place causing restrikes which can set in oscillations of a few hundred Hz

CBs with self generating pressure and comparatively slow contad movement such as

bulkmiddotoil minimum- oil SF puffer type might restrike However modern SF6 puffer

type breakers are designed restrike-free

CBs can be live tank type or dead tonk type depending up on ihe substation design

and economy Dead tank type CBs come by design with sets of current tronsformers

on the bushings They are normally used in the lh breaker or Ring bus scheme

where there are CT s on either side of the CB This type of ca is less expensive when

compared with a live tonk type ca and two free standing (generally oil filled) CTs

combination These are not popular in Indio

Live tank CBs are used in other schemes where CTs are not required on either sides

of the ca like double main scheme double main transfer scheme etc as they ore less

PlCnensive than dead tank CBs

-

middot

~

)

0

)

0 ~)

0

middot0

bull 1)

11

bull V

~

0

0

~

0

J

D

J

f)

gt ~

Disconnect Switches and Earth Switches

Disconnect switches are mechanical devices which provide in their ope positions

isolating distances to meet the specified dearances A disconnect switch can open

and dose a circuit when either a negligible current has to be broken or mode or when

middotere is no significant change in voltage across the terminals of each pole of the

Qlsconnect It can also carry currents under normal circuit itions and the short

circuit currents for a specified time Disconnect switches are used for transfer of load

from one bus to another cnd to i$laquo 13 equipment for maintenonce Although a

variety of disconnect switches are available the fadar which hos the maximum

influence on the station layout is whether the disconnect switch is of the verticol breok

type or horizontal break type Horizontal break type normally occupies more space

than the vertical break type Between the horizontal center break and horizontal

double break types the former requires large phase to phose clearance

The location of disconnect switches in substations affects not only the substaianshy

loyouts but maintenance of the disconnect contacts also In some substations the

disconnects are mounted of high positions either vertically or horizontally Although

such substations occupy lesser area the maintenance of those disconnect switches is

more difficult and time consuming

The disconnect switch serves as adamonaf protection for personnel with breoker

orln during maintenance or repair work on the feeder and also enobles the breaker

e isolated from the bus for inspection and maintenance

Earth ~itch is a mechanical switching device for earthing different ports of a circuit

which is capable of withstanding short-circuit currents for a specified time but not

required to carry normal rated currents of the circuit

Instrument Transformers

Instrument transformers are devices used to transform currents and voltages in the

primary system to values suitable for ins1ruments meters protective relays etc They

isoloe the primary system from the secondary

Current Transformers (CTs) may either be of the bushing type or wound type The

bushing type is accommodated within the transformer bushings and the wound types

are seporateJy mounted The location of the cr with resped to associated circuit

breaker depends on the protection scheme and the layout ofsubstotion as well So

for Ihe wcund type CTs with dead tonk construction has been useo Howeve current

transformers with live tonk construction also are being offered It is cklImed thot These

transform offer the following advantages

bull They ~ capable of withstanding high short circuit currents due to their short and

ngid mary conductar and hence more reliable

bull They rJve 0W reactance and therefare hove better transient performance

bull These current transfarmeuro s do nat have their majar insulation over the high

currer carrying primary Therefore the heat generated is easily dissipoted due to

which 1e insulation has superior thermal stability and longer life However these

have mitations in withstanding seismic forces and have 10 handled and

transported carefully -

~ It -

I ) Different classes of accuracy i

The two different uses of a CT are0 bull Protection

~ bull Metering

These two requires conflicting properties of saturation hence different types of cores ~ are used For protection the CT should faithfully reproduce the changes in the current

f)

bull for higher magnitudes whereas for metering the CT should saturate at higher

magnitudes in order to prevent any damage to the meters

~ Protection Classesmiddot

(110

bull

bull PS

Closs PS CTs are Ot low reactance and their performance will be spec In

terms of the following charaderiscs it

1 Turns Ratio which will be numerically the same as the roled

0 transformation ratio

3 2 Minimum Knee-Point Voltage (Vk) specified in accordance with the

j formula Vk = K I ( R + RJ - K -+ poromete~ specified by the purchaser which depends on the system foult level

and the characteristics of the refoy intended 10 be used

I -+ rated secondary current of Ihe CT

R -+ resistance of the secondary corrected 1o 7OC

~ -+ impedance of the secondary circuit as pacified by the purchaser

3 Maximum Exciting Current at the rated knee-point voltage or at any

specified fraction of the rated knee-point voltage

- J

~

1

~-- V

J -I

1)

0

~

fJ It

J

bull

)

~ 9

)

~ V

~

I

In this way a CT designated in terms of percent composIte error ond

accuracy limit factor

x ~ Composite errDI Ihe RMS value of Ihe difference oetweefl til nSlontancous

volues at Ihe prtmory current and lhe rated Iranstormohon rohO hOles the octur

secondary currenl The standord composile errors ~rcent are 5 10 and 15

P -+ Protection

Y -+ Accuracy limit factor Ihe ralio of the raled accuracy 1011 pnmary urreonllo

lhe rated primClrf current where raled occvracy Iim1 primary current IS th value of

lhe highest primory currenl up la which the transformer will comply wth the specified

limits of the compqsile error The standard accuracy hmit foclors are 5 1O 15 20

ond30

Voltage Transformer (VTs) may be either Electro-magnetic type (IVT) or capacitor

type (CVT) IVTs are commonly used where high accuracy is required like revenue

metering For other applications CIT is preferred particularly at high voltages due to

their lower cost and can be used as a coupling capacitor as well for the Power line

Carrier Communication (PlCq equipment Each CVT will be earthed through an

earth electrode

For ground fault relaying on additional core is required in the VTs which can oe

connected in open delta The VTs are connected on the feeder side of the circuit

breaker and on the bus bars for synchronization

The standard accuracy classes for ClTs will be

bull for m~csurement 02 05 10 and 30

bull for protection 3P and 6P

T ormer

Transformer is the largest piece of equipment in a substation ond it is therefore

important from the point of view of station layout For instance due to its large

dimensions and reliability it is generally not possible to accommodate two

transformers in adjacent boys One of the problems could oe the radiators being

wider than the bay width In order to reduce the risk of fire large transformers are

provided with stone metol filled sooking pits with voids of capacity adequote to contain

the total quantity of oil Besides separation walls are provided in-between the

transformers and between transformers and roads within the substation

One of the important factors governing the layout of the substation is whether the

transformer is a three-phose unit or a bank of three single-phose transformers The

space required for single-phase banks is more than that with three-phase

transformers Besides single-phose bonks are usually provided with one spare singleshy

phose transformer which is kept in the service boy and used in case of a fault or

-

~ )

)

v

~olntenOrce 01 one d the single-phose uni~ Allernatively the spore un [l~ be

o~rmoneniy installed in the switchyord ready to replace the uni wn~ I~ )u of

Vlce Tni however requires on elaborate bus arrangement and isolalor SWitching

Reactivi Compensation Equipment

Reactive compensation may be switched or non-switched type as indicated by system

studies 01 Ine network The non-switched type compensation usually comprises shunt

reactors p-rmonently connected to transmission line or to bus bars at the substation

t-lext to Ihmiddot transformer shunt reodor is the largest piece of equipment These also

can be In the form of single-phase units or threemiddotphose units Often neulral

grounding reador which is connected between the neutral bushing of the line shunt

reactor the earth is provided to facilitate singlemiddotpole auto reclosing Since these

equlprr 00 contain oil all fire-safety precautions that are token for transformers

should be followed

Switched compensotion can be through switched reodors switched capacitors ormiddot

thyristor controlled readors and thyristor switched capacitors known as Stotic VAr

Compensators (SVC) These are selected according to the system requirements and

conneded diredly to the system through their own dedicoted tronsformers The shunt

capacitor bonks ore composed of 200middot400 kVAr copocitor units mounted on rocks in

seriesparallel operated ingroups to provide the required reodive power (MVAr)

output at the system voltage Monyotime only some of trese moy be required in the

initial stage and may undergo alteration as the system develops

Dired Stroke Lightning Protection

Any substation hos to be shielded from direct lightning strokes either by provision of

overhead shield wireearth wire or spikes (masts) The methodology followed for

systems up to 145 kV is by suitable placement of earth wiresmasts to provide

coverage to the entire station equipment Generally 60deg angle of shield for zones

covered by 2 or more wiresmasts and 45deg for single wiremost is considered

adequate For installations of 245 kVand above eledromognetic methods are used

The commonly used methods for determining shielded zones are the Mousa Method

and Razevig Method

Surge ArrestorsLightning Arrestors

Besides direct strokes the substation equipment has also to be protected against

travelling waves due to surge strokes on the lines entering the substation The

equiprlent most commonly used for this purpose is the surge arrestor 01 the line entry

of the __ ostalion The most important and the costliest equipment in a sub_ 1110n is the

trans - -ner and the normal practice is to install surge arrestors as near the

transL cner as possible The fixing up of insulation level for equipment within a

middot ~bstalon requires a detailed insulation co-ordination s1udy with surge arrestor as the shy[ocal ~oint for protecting the equipment from power frequen- -er-voltoge exceeding

) the or- estor rating Besides protecting the transformers the surge arrestors also

(J protee to the equipment located Win their protection zone Additional surge

arresters con be provided depending up on the isocerounic level anticipotedC) overvohoges and the protection requirements

-J

0 ) Insulators

(i)

bull Adequate insulation should be provided in a substation for reliability of supply ond

safety of personnel However the station design should be so evolved that the_

Q quantity of insulators required is the minimum and commensurate with the expected

security of supply An importont consideration in determining the insulation in a 0

bull substotion porticularly if it is located near sea a thermol power generating station or

on industrial place is the level of pollution which can be combated using insulators of

higher creepage distance In case this does not suffice the insulators need to be hot0 line washed periodically and this aspect has to be kept in mind while deciding the

bull 0 loyout of the substation Another method which hos proved to be successful is

-~iying suitable type of greases or compounds on 1he surface of the insulators ofter

cleaning the frequency depending upon ~ degree and the type of pollution

0 FOLLUTION LEVELS AND MINIMUM NOMINAL CREEPAGE DISTANCE TO BE

ADOPTED AS PER ISIEC0

~ Pollution Min Norrinal Creepage Type of Pollution

J Level Distance (mmkV)

0

~gt

Light 16 Non-Industrial Agricultural Mountainous areas beyond 20 Km from sea

~ Medium 20 Industrial Area without polluting

smoke and chemical effl uents and

) not too dose to sea

) Heavy 25 Industrial Area with polluting smoke amp chemical efffuents close

~ to sea and exposed winds from sea

to strong

Very Heavy 31 Industrial Area subjected to conductive dust polluhon smoke very close to sea exposed to sea and very strong winds from sea desert areas etc

The highest line-to-Iine voltage of the system IS used to determine the creepage

distance

The following types of insulators are normally used

a) Bus Support Insulators

(i) Solid core type

b) Strain Insulators

(i) Disc insulators c _

(ii) long Rod Porcelain insulators

) (iii) Polymer insulators

Structures(3

~ The cost of structures also is a major consideration while deciding the layout of a

) substation For instance in the case of flexible bus-bar arrangement cost of

structures is much higher than in the case of rigid bus type Similarly the form of 0

structures also ploys on important port and the choice is usually between using a few

0 heOYy structures or more number of smaller structures

0 Hot-dip galvonized steel is the most commonly used material in Indio for substation

0 structures When galvanizing is not effective particularly in a substation located In

0 coastal or industrial areas paInting becomes essential

Q Power Line Carrier Communication (PLCC)

0

0 The carner equipment required for communication relaying and tele metering is

connected to line through high frequency coble coupling capacitor and wove trap D The wave trap is installed at the line entrance The coupling capacitors are installed

~ - ~_~I on the line side of the wave trap and are normally base mounted The wave traps for -

voltage levels up to 145 kV can be mounted on the gantry structure on which the line -

is terminated at the substation or mounted on top of the capacitor voltage -

transformer Wave traps for voltage level of 245 kV and above generally require

separate supporting insulator stock mounted on structures of appropriate height

however 245 kV wave traps can also be suspended from the line side gantry

The differ-ent types of coupling used are

bull Inter-circuit coupling

Incase of double circuit lines one phose on each circuit need be used

lor communicotion This type of coupling is called inter-circuit

coupling

bull pr~e to Phose coupling

Incose of single circuit lines coupling con between any two pi-Jses of

) tne circuit depending up on the impedance of the phases

bull Phose to Earth coupling

Any one phose only can be use~ for carrier communication where the

earth is used as the return path

o -~--__ ()

tl ~ )i

o cD

~

bull o

It)

bull o

- -

shy v u ) U U J U W ~ () r bull u bull bull 00 ( co 0 0 () 0 c ~ -) ) V 0 t4

shy

-(H-~ i A-Ie 0- L(r -V---middotmiddot~~~Jl I r __ ~~__ ~2~i~tJ

~ I r- ~~~ COUPLING 1 -out-G-I[lt7~PAClTO~ C~PACITOR

COUPLING DEVICE

CARRIER TERMINAL

I COUPliNG i ~-------- j---GI OE ~ I I METER I

READING r-- - bull ~ bull ---- ~~ bT3YSTj

I IPHrEI

-InONE ICARRIiR --- OPTICJL r i[iHtlN-IL I fiBRE PATH fiBRE

l~a CPTIC r gt~IC I Ll-~ 1i()C tI-ltiL LJ II - t - I -j ~____~~~ri~~~~1 ~= ---

bullbull j EPX I =X bull -__1L 1 -I STATIC I I N~iwORO(C L_____ I I jlANAGERIiNERGY

N 1

~[lER

iTtLE PRINTER I~ L~ N~ flINE IL_ __bull__

ivALUAliON UNIT RELAY PANELS

~H~NEj WITH PRINTERRtLAY- PANELS - bull

Substation switching schemes

ti )

~

a t)

0

0

0

~

G

~

a ~

)

-

shy

shy

dela11s the switching sCMmes

Selection of a bus bar scheme for a porticular sub station is on important step in

design The choice of the bus-switching scheme is ~overned by various factors

which aim at a simple ~elioble safe and economic sub-station Some 01 the

important fodors that dictate the choice of the bus-switching scheme are

bull System reliability and ovailat y

bull Operational flexibility

bull Limitation of short circuit level

bull Simplicity of protection arrangements

bull Ease of extension

bull Availability of land

bull Cost

The relative importance of these factors varies from case to case and depending on

the voltage level number of circuits desired level of security etc

Types of schemes

The various bus-switching schemes that are in pradice are

bull Single bus

bull Sectional Single bus

bull Main and Transfer bus

bull Double Main

bull Double Main and Transfer bus

bull One and Half breaker

bull Mesh scheme

Aport from these schemes there are a few which are less frequently used

bull Sectionolized Main and Transfer bus

bull Double Main with bypass isolator

bull Sedionalized Double Main and Transfer bus

bull Double bus and double breaker

i

bull

Criteria for seledion

lhe following criteria are usually followed when selecting a switching scheme for a

sub-station

i __

bull It should be possible to take out any circuit breaker or any other equipment for

1J0intenance without removing the corresponding circuit from service

bull The rrin bus could be isolated for maintenance without loss of any circuit

bull CB failure Bus fault should couse minimum loss of circuits

bull Economy

J

bull The acceptable level of reliability has not been defined by any standard and therefore

jt is extremely difficult to quantify it for a system In such a situation the prevailing

practices and experience gained from system operation are token into consideration J I For instance in 400 kV systems One and Half breaker scheme is preferred over other

0 schemes os a major shut down cousing loss of 2 or more feeders is just improbable

albeit being more expensive than others Furthermore for 220 kV systems the Double ~ Main T ronder scheme is preferred

middot3

0 Single bus bar scheme

This type of arrangement can be used only where interruption to service is relatively ) unimportant But this is a simplest arrangement where each circuit is provided with its

own circuit breaker

The circuit breaker enables the feeder to be removed from service while it is carryingD

bull the loads when there is fault on the feeder The disadvantage with this r-Ongement is

that if the incoming circuit breaker is to be shut down for mainteno ~1e load on

gt that feeder has also to be shut down If the bus is supplied by more t~1i one feeder

the reliability of supply to the feeders using this type of layout is considerablyJ

increased J

_r Sectionalised single bus bar scheme

If adequate number of bus sections are made the single sectionalised bus provides an

economical way of limiting circuit outage is case of fault on a bus sedion as the

section circuit breakers acts as backup to the circuit breakers of the main circuits ThE

arrangement may be considered for intermediate switching stations or smoi

generating stations where mil1imising of circuit outage is important for systern ~

Ii

reliability The sectional ising breaker may also be used at medium sized substations

bull

)

)

)

j

_r

)

)

)

I j I 0 J

0

3

0

-3

I

bull Q)

bull ~

bull 0

1)

J

)

J

~J

-

- gt

)

)

receiving supply from more thon ltme source to synchronise or segregate the supplies

as per the opemting requirements

The interlocking arrangement is simple for both the types of arrangements

Main and Transfer bus bar scheme

In this type of cnongement the main ond transfer bus bors are coupled by means of

a normally open circuit brealcer All the incoming and outgoing circuits are connected

with the main bus bars through thei controlling circuit br~kers keeping the transfer

bus idle Each circuit is also connected to the transfer bus bar through on isolator In

case the circuit breaker of any circuit is shut down for maintenance this circuit is

cannected to the transfer bus bar through its tronsfer bus isolator Under such

circumstances Jhis particular circuit will be controlled by the bus transfer circuit

breaker Since the arrangement to the transfer bus is through the isolators coreful

interlocking is necessary with bus transfer breolcer so that only one circuit transferred

at a time

Double bus bar scheme

In this arrangement each incoming and outgoing circuit has its own controllingdrcuit

breaker and btmiddot means of bus selection isolators can be conneded to either of the

buses Each bus bar is designed to take the station total load and either bus bar

y be token out for moin1enonce Each circuit may in addition be provided with a

bye-pass isol enabling it to be connected directly to one of the bus bars byeshy

passing the controlling circuit breakers of the circuit The circuit can in that case be

energised through the bus bar coupler circuit breaker as in the main and tansfer bus

scheme and the controlling circuit breaker of the circuit token out for mainterance

Use of a bye-pass isolator with double bus necessarily requires adoption of a relatively

costly switchyard arrangement It should therefore be resorted to only in case where

outage of the particular circuit will have undesirable repercussions on the system

operation In case maintenance of the circuit Ix-eakers can be arranged by taking the

relevant circuit out (eg where two or more circuits or alternative routes are available)

the normal double bus arrangement without bye-pass should be favoured as simpler

and cheaper physical layouts can then be used The two buses of a double bus bar

arrangement enn be sectionalised through circuit breokers or isolators as required

from reliability considerations

)

) Double Main and Transfer scheme

In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one

spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )

transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from

) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to

couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3

~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple

() ------~-------

One and a half breakers scheme0

a I

bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two

0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme

described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid

feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)

feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in

0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two

breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit

bull emiddot

Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it

is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often

0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be

bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it

bull Mesh scheme

~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This

) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or

) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station

ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes

) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited

gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS

preferred to mesh scheme )

)

gt

layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS

Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on

the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of

the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0

generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power

network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only

interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond

instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available

generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission

line

a Feeder Oearance

Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty

feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two

breakers to isolate a fault

Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive

loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that

particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to

F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible

In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault

becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths

b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components

The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of

equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any

equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of

failure af these is discussed below

Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable

substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the

continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon

in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a

~--

-

t2

- ~

Q I

0

0

0

0

bull 0

~ ~

J

~

l

--

bull

stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on

which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck

Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service

c Redundancy in Design

The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active

or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are

switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite

advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even

during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of

breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active

redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder

Operational Flexibility

Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different

switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one

arrangement to another

Simplicity of protedion Arrangements

More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions

more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when

automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one

breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to

be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip

circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in

Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus

bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may

complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus

differential protedion is simple

Maintenance - effects on System Security

)

From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J

out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit

breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular

concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit

breaker maintenance

Ease of Extensions

Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af

feeders

InterlocksJ

~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches

) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic

1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes

ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be

~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are

0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated

bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its

associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT

designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull

aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES

The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the

r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance

) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety

I

reasons during the maintenance of equipment -

The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system

400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage

-

LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge

kV 1425 10501 950

6501 550

5501 450

325

SWitching surge withstond voltage

kVp 1050

1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge

kV 630 460 140

Phase to ground Clearance

- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned

overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted

bull gt

0

() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to

J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0

3 Phase to Phase Clearance

()

It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD

bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the

phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system

a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection

variation in equipment geometry

bull ~ I

Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and

9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator

3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a

inm

400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063

) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063

Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)

Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10

i

J

Equipment Spacing

)

I

J

~ shy

a 0

i ~

bull 3

a

bull eshy

bull 0

bull middot3

)

3 )

) bull

)

)

)

)

-

The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering

bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment

bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment

bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches

bull Land availability

bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering

protection reach of LA

Bus Bars

The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors

Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers

The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations

Structure

All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal

conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit

amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in

design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry

structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation

hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15

a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure

sholl be hot dipped golvonised

Equipment Supports

Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type

Road Layout

Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance

Bus Post Insulator

~

~)0

~

0

i)

bull D

bull ~

-

i ~

7

I )

V

J

J

~

-

~ ~

sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor

Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical

requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design

Electrical design

The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for

use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse

withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet

power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio

interference voltage

For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in

the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the

insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance

Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)

Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be

designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to

short-circuit seismic load ond wind load

Short Circuit Force

Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force

N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108

Fs = p

Where

Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current

p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters

l = Span between two supporting points in meters

N = Correction fodor for actual field condition

K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular

buses K= 1

M = Multiplying factor

Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as

(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8

RMS Symmetrical 800

IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs

-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-

~ three phose symmetrical fault

~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the

() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value

for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )

f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally

)

The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)

I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range

of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component

i

FE =S x W

raquo bull ~

F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very

t strong

1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg

D Wind Force

~)

Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the

C J mechanical design of support insulators

--

The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS

802) isI --

p = 06 X Vl

)

f~

~ Where

) v = Vt x k x k

basic wind speed msJ

k = 0 wind force in kg is

1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII

Where 10

L _ length of the insulator

J B = breadth of the insulator

0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force

D

J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for

support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I

projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly

disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8

The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either

due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and

earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of

earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8

under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice

bull ~

i 0

)

0

Bus Hars

-

~~) J )

~

)

lJ

) Busmiddot8ft ~tr

bull

)

)

Sclce n of blls bars

BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used

for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The

bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf

bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and

conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to

large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed

that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus

The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between

supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited

to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting

tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design

of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably

locating the spacers in the conductor bundles

The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum

Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid

bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly

U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not

encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans

expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to

thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus

bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will

alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during

operation

The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the

specific application for which these are chosen

Rigid Bus Bor

Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are

available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on

the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to

consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar

Electrical

The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are

Continuous current rating and

Shof me current rating

Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due

convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be

13 times that of 1 s rating

The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the

specified time is

I x t x (2SAf A =)

0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258

Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =

t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC

T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0

Mechanical 9

The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are

Bending Stress

Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration

Bending stress

Three loads which causes the bending stress are

Wind load

Short circuit Force

Dead load

Wind load

Wind load on bus bar per meter length

WI = pxD

Where

p = wind pressure in kgm1

D = diameter of the rigid bus bar

S~)rt circuit force

10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =

Nnere

Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current

P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-

L Span between two supporting points in m -r~

J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady

~ - force N=OS

K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)

buses K= 1

( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8

(

Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0

due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically

0

The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl

8 where

g M = Belding moment in kgm

= WL8

bull ~

= resultant force in kgm

L = length of the bus bar in m

Z = section modulus m3

- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2

and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )

Vertical deflection

The vertical deflection is~

00054 X LA X W) =

Ex MI Where

L = unsupportedlengthinm

W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm

E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m

)

Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or

l200

Aeolian vibration

The natural frequency of vibration is

561 ~deflection

which should be more than 275 cycles per second

-

~ Flexible Bus Bar

shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed

)-j

1)

0

0

middotV 0

fl)

0

~ ~

D

D

~l

-

Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment

t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under

IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen

limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near

grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock

-

Grounding can be of one the following two types

Intentional( -0

This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface

0 Accidental

~

g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor

1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility

J CLumstances that lead to a shock

0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system

and its resistance to remote earth

2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential

gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface

3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is

bridging iwo points of high potential difference

4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance

current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances

5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current

through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current

intensity

The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other

kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable

conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141

(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding

calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -

recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above

Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing

j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is

advantageous for two reasons ~

I0I0- gt --

1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time

J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes

) or possible hours

2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief

0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of

primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9

a Effed of Reclosing

Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such

circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~

permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single

~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively

bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus

accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is

reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater

Potential Difference during Shock Situations

Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid

may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of

remote earth

Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0

distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect

)

TCAP

-~

I

shy

- I

f t3

a middot3

D

bull 0

bull ~

)

~ ~

rl

shy

0

)

Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and

lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time

navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure

IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence

oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot

neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed

ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both

lands

Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground

grid

Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS

transferred into or out of the substation

Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE

Std 80 - 1986

Sizing the Conductor

The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression

te a p 10

=

Where

A = T

To = T

=0 0

=a

p =

RMS current in kA

conductor cross section in mm2

maximum allowable temperature in degC

ambient allowable temperature in degC

reference temperature in degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T

resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in

~

1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf

duration of current flow in s

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 2: Alstom Training Manual

Introduction o amptie cwetYiew 01 substation engineering

1

Substations form on important port of the transmission and distribution networks - of electric pwer system They control the supply of power on different circuits by

means of various equipment such 0$ transformers compensating equipment ) circuit breakers etc Various circuits are joined together through these components to

bus bar systems at the substations While the bus-bar systems follow certain definite ~ patterns limiting the scaP for variation there is practically no standardization

regarding the physical arrangement called the layout of the various components ) relating to one another For the some type of bus-bar system different layouts have

been used in different countries and in fact in Indio there are variations in this regard j not only among the various State Electricity Boards but also within a State Electricity

Board This manual gives the basic requirements ond for the sake of illustration a contains typical layouts for various types of bus-bar systems

One of the primary requirements of a good substation layout is that it should be asbull i

economical as possible but it should ensure the desired degree of flexibility and ) reliability ease of operation and maintenance expansion and meets all safety

requirements of the operation and maintenance personnel Besides the layout 9 should not lead to breakdowns in power supply due to faults within the substation os

such faults are more serious A brief discussion on the various components and 1) auxiliary facilities required in substation and how they affect the layout is included

bull Many standards viz IS as lEe IEEE and the like guide the design of substations It is essential that the equipment used and the practices followed conform to the latest standards as required by the customer D This manual is aimed at understanding the basis of sub-station design If deals with

bull 0

voltage levels between 33 kV and 400 kV and standard switching schemes It also discusses briefly about sele~on of major equipment

bull 3

f)

3

)

j

J

~

J lt

)

gt

introduces lhe di(fllrent types 01 submiddotslaions

Generation station

Generation is done at 11 kV - 15 kV level As power of very high capacities cannot be nsmitted for long distances at these voltages it is stepped up using generator transformers to 110 kV - 400 kV levels Generation stations are in simple terms ~ step-up stations

)

Grid station o () Grid Stations are used to interconnect different gridsregionssectors They are

generally 400 kV substations They are stotions switching power from one generationgrid station to other They can olso be called Switching Stations

Distribution station

Distribution Stations are located at the load points where the power is stepped down to bull ~

bull o 11 kV - 110 kV levels

Bulk Industrial supply stations o

bull Bulk Industrial Supply Stations are distribution stations catering to one or 0 few consumers The supply voltage can range from 33 kV to 110 kV Industriol users do

I have their own generotion focilities besides the SEB supply and these s1a1ions oct asie step-up stations as well

bull o Sur 1S can also be classified as Step-up stotions Primary grid Stations Secondary

stc Sub-secondary stations and Distributions stations depending upon their POSHIn in the power system hierarchy

bull Generally the Substations are of outdoor type for 33 kV and above EHV Stations can be indoor depending upon the environmental conditions like pollution salinity etc and space constraints Indoor stations are Air - Insulated or SF6 gas - insulated depending upon the availability of space and financial constraints Gas Insulated D Substations (GIS) are extremely costly and requires extra maintenance and hence are preferred only when it is absolutely necessary

3

gt

Substation types

r

~1

~~

I

~

~

()

fJ j

G

D

0

bull 0

bull 0

~

0

a J )

J

--middot

c~

~ bull

D

-

Salient features of major equipment Major eqc Omenl In a $vbslalion

Tr substation layout is influenced to a great middot~xtent by the dimension of the

eCjUlpment and their accessories within the substwlon

Circuit Breakers

Circuit Breaker is a mechanical device capable of making carrying and breaking

currents undN normal circuit conditions and making carrying for a specified time and

breaking IS under short circuit conditions Circuit Breakers of the types indicated

below are used in India

36 kV Minimum oil Vacuum Sulfur hexa fluoride (SF6)

725 kV Minimum oil Sulphur hexa fluoride (SF6)

145 kV and above Sulphur hexa fluoride (SF)

245 kV and higher voltage outdoor circuit breakers generally necessitate the

provision of approach roods for breaker maintenance

400 kV CBs may hove pre-insertion resistors depending up on the system

requirement When a CB interrupts a transformer or a reactor circuit switching over

voltages can be more than 15 pu or 25 pu respectively (maximum limit

recommended by IEC) resistors are required to prevent restrikes due to current

chopping When lightly loaded tines are disconnected interruption of capacitive

currents take place causing restrikes which can set in oscillations of a few hundred Hz

CBs with self generating pressure and comparatively slow contad movement such as

bulkmiddotoil minimum- oil SF puffer type might restrike However modern SF6 puffer

type breakers are designed restrike-free

CBs can be live tank type or dead tonk type depending up on ihe substation design

and economy Dead tank type CBs come by design with sets of current tronsformers

on the bushings They are normally used in the lh breaker or Ring bus scheme

where there are CT s on either side of the CB This type of ca is less expensive when

compared with a live tonk type ca and two free standing (generally oil filled) CTs

combination These are not popular in Indio

Live tank CBs are used in other schemes where CTs are not required on either sides

of the ca like double main scheme double main transfer scheme etc as they ore less

PlCnensive than dead tank CBs

-

middot

~

)

0

)

0 ~)

0

middot0

bull 1)

11

bull V

~

0

0

~

0

J

D

J

f)

gt ~

Disconnect Switches and Earth Switches

Disconnect switches are mechanical devices which provide in their ope positions

isolating distances to meet the specified dearances A disconnect switch can open

and dose a circuit when either a negligible current has to be broken or mode or when

middotere is no significant change in voltage across the terminals of each pole of the

Qlsconnect It can also carry currents under normal circuit itions and the short

circuit currents for a specified time Disconnect switches are used for transfer of load

from one bus to another cnd to i$laquo 13 equipment for maintenonce Although a

variety of disconnect switches are available the fadar which hos the maximum

influence on the station layout is whether the disconnect switch is of the verticol breok

type or horizontal break type Horizontal break type normally occupies more space

than the vertical break type Between the horizontal center break and horizontal

double break types the former requires large phase to phose clearance

The location of disconnect switches in substations affects not only the substaianshy

loyouts but maintenance of the disconnect contacts also In some substations the

disconnects are mounted of high positions either vertically or horizontally Although

such substations occupy lesser area the maintenance of those disconnect switches is

more difficult and time consuming

The disconnect switch serves as adamonaf protection for personnel with breoker

orln during maintenance or repair work on the feeder and also enobles the breaker

e isolated from the bus for inspection and maintenance

Earth ~itch is a mechanical switching device for earthing different ports of a circuit

which is capable of withstanding short-circuit currents for a specified time but not

required to carry normal rated currents of the circuit

Instrument Transformers

Instrument transformers are devices used to transform currents and voltages in the

primary system to values suitable for ins1ruments meters protective relays etc They

isoloe the primary system from the secondary

Current Transformers (CTs) may either be of the bushing type or wound type The

bushing type is accommodated within the transformer bushings and the wound types

are seporateJy mounted The location of the cr with resped to associated circuit

breaker depends on the protection scheme and the layout ofsubstotion as well So

for Ihe wcund type CTs with dead tonk construction has been useo Howeve current

transformers with live tonk construction also are being offered It is cklImed thot These

transform offer the following advantages

bull They ~ capable of withstanding high short circuit currents due to their short and

ngid mary conductar and hence more reliable

bull They rJve 0W reactance and therefare hove better transient performance

bull These current transfarmeuro s do nat have their majar insulation over the high

currer carrying primary Therefore the heat generated is easily dissipoted due to

which 1e insulation has superior thermal stability and longer life However these

have mitations in withstanding seismic forces and have 10 handled and

transported carefully -

~ It -

I ) Different classes of accuracy i

The two different uses of a CT are0 bull Protection

~ bull Metering

These two requires conflicting properties of saturation hence different types of cores ~ are used For protection the CT should faithfully reproduce the changes in the current

f)

bull for higher magnitudes whereas for metering the CT should saturate at higher

magnitudes in order to prevent any damage to the meters

~ Protection Classesmiddot

(110

bull

bull PS

Closs PS CTs are Ot low reactance and their performance will be spec In

terms of the following charaderiscs it

1 Turns Ratio which will be numerically the same as the roled

0 transformation ratio

3 2 Minimum Knee-Point Voltage (Vk) specified in accordance with the

j formula Vk = K I ( R + RJ - K -+ poromete~ specified by the purchaser which depends on the system foult level

and the characteristics of the refoy intended 10 be used

I -+ rated secondary current of Ihe CT

R -+ resistance of the secondary corrected 1o 7OC

~ -+ impedance of the secondary circuit as pacified by the purchaser

3 Maximum Exciting Current at the rated knee-point voltage or at any

specified fraction of the rated knee-point voltage

- J

~

1

~-- V

J -I

1)

0

~

fJ It

J

bull

)

~ 9

)

~ V

~

I

In this way a CT designated in terms of percent composIte error ond

accuracy limit factor

x ~ Composite errDI Ihe RMS value of Ihe difference oetweefl til nSlontancous

volues at Ihe prtmory current and lhe rated Iranstormohon rohO hOles the octur

secondary currenl The standord composile errors ~rcent are 5 10 and 15

P -+ Protection

Y -+ Accuracy limit factor Ihe ralio of the raled accuracy 1011 pnmary urreonllo

lhe rated primClrf current where raled occvracy Iim1 primary current IS th value of

lhe highest primory currenl up la which the transformer will comply wth the specified

limits of the compqsile error The standard accuracy hmit foclors are 5 1O 15 20

ond30

Voltage Transformer (VTs) may be either Electro-magnetic type (IVT) or capacitor

type (CVT) IVTs are commonly used where high accuracy is required like revenue

metering For other applications CIT is preferred particularly at high voltages due to

their lower cost and can be used as a coupling capacitor as well for the Power line

Carrier Communication (PlCq equipment Each CVT will be earthed through an

earth electrode

For ground fault relaying on additional core is required in the VTs which can oe

connected in open delta The VTs are connected on the feeder side of the circuit

breaker and on the bus bars for synchronization

The standard accuracy classes for ClTs will be

bull for m~csurement 02 05 10 and 30

bull for protection 3P and 6P

T ormer

Transformer is the largest piece of equipment in a substation ond it is therefore

important from the point of view of station layout For instance due to its large

dimensions and reliability it is generally not possible to accommodate two

transformers in adjacent boys One of the problems could oe the radiators being

wider than the bay width In order to reduce the risk of fire large transformers are

provided with stone metol filled sooking pits with voids of capacity adequote to contain

the total quantity of oil Besides separation walls are provided in-between the

transformers and between transformers and roads within the substation

One of the important factors governing the layout of the substation is whether the

transformer is a three-phose unit or a bank of three single-phose transformers The

space required for single-phase banks is more than that with three-phase

transformers Besides single-phose bonks are usually provided with one spare singleshy

phose transformer which is kept in the service boy and used in case of a fault or

-

~ )

)

v

~olntenOrce 01 one d the single-phose uni~ Allernatively the spore un [l~ be

o~rmoneniy installed in the switchyord ready to replace the uni wn~ I~ )u of

Vlce Tni however requires on elaborate bus arrangement and isolalor SWitching

Reactivi Compensation Equipment

Reactive compensation may be switched or non-switched type as indicated by system

studies 01 Ine network The non-switched type compensation usually comprises shunt

reactors p-rmonently connected to transmission line or to bus bars at the substation

t-lext to Ihmiddot transformer shunt reodor is the largest piece of equipment These also

can be In the form of single-phase units or threemiddotphose units Often neulral

grounding reador which is connected between the neutral bushing of the line shunt

reactor the earth is provided to facilitate singlemiddotpole auto reclosing Since these

equlprr 00 contain oil all fire-safety precautions that are token for transformers

should be followed

Switched compensotion can be through switched reodors switched capacitors ormiddot

thyristor controlled readors and thyristor switched capacitors known as Stotic VAr

Compensators (SVC) These are selected according to the system requirements and

conneded diredly to the system through their own dedicoted tronsformers The shunt

capacitor bonks ore composed of 200middot400 kVAr copocitor units mounted on rocks in

seriesparallel operated ingroups to provide the required reodive power (MVAr)

output at the system voltage Monyotime only some of trese moy be required in the

initial stage and may undergo alteration as the system develops

Dired Stroke Lightning Protection

Any substation hos to be shielded from direct lightning strokes either by provision of

overhead shield wireearth wire or spikes (masts) The methodology followed for

systems up to 145 kV is by suitable placement of earth wiresmasts to provide

coverage to the entire station equipment Generally 60deg angle of shield for zones

covered by 2 or more wiresmasts and 45deg for single wiremost is considered

adequate For installations of 245 kVand above eledromognetic methods are used

The commonly used methods for determining shielded zones are the Mousa Method

and Razevig Method

Surge ArrestorsLightning Arrestors

Besides direct strokes the substation equipment has also to be protected against

travelling waves due to surge strokes on the lines entering the substation The

equiprlent most commonly used for this purpose is the surge arrestor 01 the line entry

of the __ ostalion The most important and the costliest equipment in a sub_ 1110n is the

trans - -ner and the normal practice is to install surge arrestors as near the

transL cner as possible The fixing up of insulation level for equipment within a

middot ~bstalon requires a detailed insulation co-ordination s1udy with surge arrestor as the shy[ocal ~oint for protecting the equipment from power frequen- -er-voltoge exceeding

) the or- estor rating Besides protecting the transformers the surge arrestors also

(J protee to the equipment located Win their protection zone Additional surge

arresters con be provided depending up on the isocerounic level anticipotedC) overvohoges and the protection requirements

-J

0 ) Insulators

(i)

bull Adequate insulation should be provided in a substation for reliability of supply ond

safety of personnel However the station design should be so evolved that the_

Q quantity of insulators required is the minimum and commensurate with the expected

security of supply An importont consideration in determining the insulation in a 0

bull substotion porticularly if it is located near sea a thermol power generating station or

on industrial place is the level of pollution which can be combated using insulators of

higher creepage distance In case this does not suffice the insulators need to be hot0 line washed periodically and this aspect has to be kept in mind while deciding the

bull 0 loyout of the substation Another method which hos proved to be successful is

-~iying suitable type of greases or compounds on 1he surface of the insulators ofter

cleaning the frequency depending upon ~ degree and the type of pollution

0 FOLLUTION LEVELS AND MINIMUM NOMINAL CREEPAGE DISTANCE TO BE

ADOPTED AS PER ISIEC0

~ Pollution Min Norrinal Creepage Type of Pollution

J Level Distance (mmkV)

0

~gt

Light 16 Non-Industrial Agricultural Mountainous areas beyond 20 Km from sea

~ Medium 20 Industrial Area without polluting

smoke and chemical effl uents and

) not too dose to sea

) Heavy 25 Industrial Area with polluting smoke amp chemical efffuents close

~ to sea and exposed winds from sea

to strong

Very Heavy 31 Industrial Area subjected to conductive dust polluhon smoke very close to sea exposed to sea and very strong winds from sea desert areas etc

The highest line-to-Iine voltage of the system IS used to determine the creepage

distance

The following types of insulators are normally used

a) Bus Support Insulators

(i) Solid core type

b) Strain Insulators

(i) Disc insulators c _

(ii) long Rod Porcelain insulators

) (iii) Polymer insulators

Structures(3

~ The cost of structures also is a major consideration while deciding the layout of a

) substation For instance in the case of flexible bus-bar arrangement cost of

structures is much higher than in the case of rigid bus type Similarly the form of 0

structures also ploys on important port and the choice is usually between using a few

0 heOYy structures or more number of smaller structures

0 Hot-dip galvonized steel is the most commonly used material in Indio for substation

0 structures When galvanizing is not effective particularly in a substation located In

0 coastal or industrial areas paInting becomes essential

Q Power Line Carrier Communication (PLCC)

0

0 The carner equipment required for communication relaying and tele metering is

connected to line through high frequency coble coupling capacitor and wove trap D The wave trap is installed at the line entrance The coupling capacitors are installed

~ - ~_~I on the line side of the wave trap and are normally base mounted The wave traps for -

voltage levels up to 145 kV can be mounted on the gantry structure on which the line -

is terminated at the substation or mounted on top of the capacitor voltage -

transformer Wave traps for voltage level of 245 kV and above generally require

separate supporting insulator stock mounted on structures of appropriate height

however 245 kV wave traps can also be suspended from the line side gantry

The differ-ent types of coupling used are

bull Inter-circuit coupling

Incase of double circuit lines one phose on each circuit need be used

lor communicotion This type of coupling is called inter-circuit

coupling

bull pr~e to Phose coupling

Incose of single circuit lines coupling con between any two pi-Jses of

) tne circuit depending up on the impedance of the phases

bull Phose to Earth coupling

Any one phose only can be use~ for carrier communication where the

earth is used as the return path

o -~--__ ()

tl ~ )i

o cD

~

bull o

It)

bull o

- -

shy v u ) U U J U W ~ () r bull u bull bull 00 ( co 0 0 () 0 c ~ -) ) V 0 t4

shy

-(H-~ i A-Ie 0- L(r -V---middotmiddot~~~Jl I r __ ~~__ ~2~i~tJ

~ I r- ~~~ COUPLING 1 -out-G-I[lt7~PAClTO~ C~PACITOR

COUPLING DEVICE

CARRIER TERMINAL

I COUPliNG i ~-------- j---GI OE ~ I I METER I

READING r-- - bull ~ bull ---- ~~ bT3YSTj

I IPHrEI

-InONE ICARRIiR --- OPTICJL r i[iHtlN-IL I fiBRE PATH fiBRE

l~a CPTIC r gt~IC I Ll-~ 1i()C tI-ltiL LJ II - t - I -j ~____~~~ri~~~~1 ~= ---

bullbull j EPX I =X bull -__1L 1 -I STATIC I I N~iwORO(C L_____ I I jlANAGERIiNERGY

N 1

~[lER

iTtLE PRINTER I~ L~ N~ flINE IL_ __bull__

ivALUAliON UNIT RELAY PANELS

~H~NEj WITH PRINTERRtLAY- PANELS - bull

Substation switching schemes

ti )

~

a t)

0

0

0

~

G

~

a ~

)

-

shy

shy

dela11s the switching sCMmes

Selection of a bus bar scheme for a porticular sub station is on important step in

design The choice of the bus-switching scheme is ~overned by various factors

which aim at a simple ~elioble safe and economic sub-station Some 01 the

important fodors that dictate the choice of the bus-switching scheme are

bull System reliability and ovailat y

bull Operational flexibility

bull Limitation of short circuit level

bull Simplicity of protection arrangements

bull Ease of extension

bull Availability of land

bull Cost

The relative importance of these factors varies from case to case and depending on

the voltage level number of circuits desired level of security etc

Types of schemes

The various bus-switching schemes that are in pradice are

bull Single bus

bull Sectional Single bus

bull Main and Transfer bus

bull Double Main

bull Double Main and Transfer bus

bull One and Half breaker

bull Mesh scheme

Aport from these schemes there are a few which are less frequently used

bull Sectionolized Main and Transfer bus

bull Double Main with bypass isolator

bull Sedionalized Double Main and Transfer bus

bull Double bus and double breaker

i

bull

Criteria for seledion

lhe following criteria are usually followed when selecting a switching scheme for a

sub-station

i __

bull It should be possible to take out any circuit breaker or any other equipment for

1J0intenance without removing the corresponding circuit from service

bull The rrin bus could be isolated for maintenance without loss of any circuit

bull CB failure Bus fault should couse minimum loss of circuits

bull Economy

J

bull The acceptable level of reliability has not been defined by any standard and therefore

jt is extremely difficult to quantify it for a system In such a situation the prevailing

practices and experience gained from system operation are token into consideration J I For instance in 400 kV systems One and Half breaker scheme is preferred over other

0 schemes os a major shut down cousing loss of 2 or more feeders is just improbable

albeit being more expensive than others Furthermore for 220 kV systems the Double ~ Main T ronder scheme is preferred

middot3

0 Single bus bar scheme

This type of arrangement can be used only where interruption to service is relatively ) unimportant But this is a simplest arrangement where each circuit is provided with its

own circuit breaker

The circuit breaker enables the feeder to be removed from service while it is carryingD

bull the loads when there is fault on the feeder The disadvantage with this r-Ongement is

that if the incoming circuit breaker is to be shut down for mainteno ~1e load on

gt that feeder has also to be shut down If the bus is supplied by more t~1i one feeder

the reliability of supply to the feeders using this type of layout is considerablyJ

increased J

_r Sectionalised single bus bar scheme

If adequate number of bus sections are made the single sectionalised bus provides an

economical way of limiting circuit outage is case of fault on a bus sedion as the

section circuit breakers acts as backup to the circuit breakers of the main circuits ThE

arrangement may be considered for intermediate switching stations or smoi

generating stations where mil1imising of circuit outage is important for systern ~

Ii

reliability The sectional ising breaker may also be used at medium sized substations

bull

)

)

)

j

_r

)

)

)

I j I 0 J

0

3

0

-3

I

bull Q)

bull ~

bull 0

1)

J

)

J

~J

-

- gt

)

)

receiving supply from more thon ltme source to synchronise or segregate the supplies

as per the opemting requirements

The interlocking arrangement is simple for both the types of arrangements

Main and Transfer bus bar scheme

In this type of cnongement the main ond transfer bus bors are coupled by means of

a normally open circuit brealcer All the incoming and outgoing circuits are connected

with the main bus bars through thei controlling circuit br~kers keeping the transfer

bus idle Each circuit is also connected to the transfer bus bar through on isolator In

case the circuit breaker of any circuit is shut down for maintenance this circuit is

cannected to the transfer bus bar through its tronsfer bus isolator Under such

circumstances Jhis particular circuit will be controlled by the bus transfer circuit

breaker Since the arrangement to the transfer bus is through the isolators coreful

interlocking is necessary with bus transfer breolcer so that only one circuit transferred

at a time

Double bus bar scheme

In this arrangement each incoming and outgoing circuit has its own controllingdrcuit

breaker and btmiddot means of bus selection isolators can be conneded to either of the

buses Each bus bar is designed to take the station total load and either bus bar

y be token out for moin1enonce Each circuit may in addition be provided with a

bye-pass isol enabling it to be connected directly to one of the bus bars byeshy

passing the controlling circuit breakers of the circuit The circuit can in that case be

energised through the bus bar coupler circuit breaker as in the main and tansfer bus

scheme and the controlling circuit breaker of the circuit token out for mainterance

Use of a bye-pass isolator with double bus necessarily requires adoption of a relatively

costly switchyard arrangement It should therefore be resorted to only in case where

outage of the particular circuit will have undesirable repercussions on the system

operation In case maintenance of the circuit Ix-eakers can be arranged by taking the

relevant circuit out (eg where two or more circuits or alternative routes are available)

the normal double bus arrangement without bye-pass should be favoured as simpler

and cheaper physical layouts can then be used The two buses of a double bus bar

arrangement enn be sectionalised through circuit breokers or isolators as required

from reliability considerations

)

) Double Main and Transfer scheme

In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one

spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )

transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from

) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to

couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3

~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple

() ------~-------

One and a half breakers scheme0

a I

bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two

0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme

described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid

feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)

feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in

0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two

breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit

bull emiddot

Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it

is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often

0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be

bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it

bull Mesh scheme

~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This

) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or

) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station

ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes

) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited

gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS

preferred to mesh scheme )

)

gt

layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS

Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on

the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of

the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0

generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power

network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only

interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond

instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available

generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission

line

a Feeder Oearance

Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty

feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two

breakers to isolate a fault

Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive

loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that

particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to

F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible

In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault

becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths

b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components

The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of

equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any

equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of

failure af these is discussed below

Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable

substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the

continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon

in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a

~--

-

t2

- ~

Q I

0

0

0

0

bull 0

~ ~

J

~

l

--

bull

stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on

which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck

Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service

c Redundancy in Design

The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active

or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are

switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite

advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even

during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of

breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active

redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder

Operational Flexibility

Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different

switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one

arrangement to another

Simplicity of protedion Arrangements

More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions

more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when

automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one

breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to

be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip

circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in

Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus

bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may

complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus

differential protedion is simple

Maintenance - effects on System Security

)

From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J

out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit

breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular

concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit

breaker maintenance

Ease of Extensions

Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af

feeders

InterlocksJ

~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches

) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic

1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes

ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be

~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are

0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated

bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its

associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT

designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull

aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES

The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the

r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance

) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety

I

reasons during the maintenance of equipment -

The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system

400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage

-

LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge

kV 1425 10501 950

6501 550

5501 450

325

SWitching surge withstond voltage

kVp 1050

1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge

kV 630 460 140

Phase to ground Clearance

- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned

overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted

bull gt

0

() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to

J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0

3 Phase to Phase Clearance

()

It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD

bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the

phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system

a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection

variation in equipment geometry

bull ~ I

Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and

9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator

3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a

inm

400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063

) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063

Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)

Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10

i

J

Equipment Spacing

)

I

J

~ shy

a 0

i ~

bull 3

a

bull eshy

bull 0

bull middot3

)

3 )

) bull

)

)

)

)

-

The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering

bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment

bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment

bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches

bull Land availability

bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering

protection reach of LA

Bus Bars

The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors

Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers

The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations

Structure

All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal

conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit

amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in

design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry

structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation

hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15

a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure

sholl be hot dipped golvonised

Equipment Supports

Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type

Road Layout

Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance

Bus Post Insulator

~

~)0

~

0

i)

bull D

bull ~

-

i ~

7

I )

V

J

J

~

-

~ ~

sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor

Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical

requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design

Electrical design

The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for

use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse

withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet

power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio

interference voltage

For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in

the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the

insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance

Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)

Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be

designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to

short-circuit seismic load ond wind load

Short Circuit Force

Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force

N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108

Fs = p

Where

Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current

p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters

l = Span between two supporting points in meters

N = Correction fodor for actual field condition

K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular

buses K= 1

M = Multiplying factor

Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as

(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8

RMS Symmetrical 800

IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs

-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-

~ three phose symmetrical fault

~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the

() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value

for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )

f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally

)

The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)

I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range

of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component

i

FE =S x W

raquo bull ~

F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very

t strong

1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg

D Wind Force

~)

Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the

C J mechanical design of support insulators

--

The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS

802) isI --

p = 06 X Vl

)

f~

~ Where

) v = Vt x k x k

basic wind speed msJ

k = 0 wind force in kg is

1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII

Where 10

L _ length of the insulator

J B = breadth of the insulator

0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force

D

J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for

support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I

projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly

disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8

The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either

due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and

earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of

earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8

under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice

bull ~

i 0

)

0

Bus Hars

-

~~) J )

~

)

lJ

) Busmiddot8ft ~tr

bull

)

)

Sclce n of blls bars

BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used

for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The

bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf

bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and

conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to

large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed

that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus

The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between

supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited

to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting

tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design

of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably

locating the spacers in the conductor bundles

The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum

Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid

bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly

U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not

encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans

expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to

thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus

bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will

alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during

operation

The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the

specific application for which these are chosen

Rigid Bus Bor

Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are

available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on

the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to

consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar

Electrical

The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are

Continuous current rating and

Shof me current rating

Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due

convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be

13 times that of 1 s rating

The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the

specified time is

I x t x (2SAf A =)

0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258

Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =

t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC

T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0

Mechanical 9

The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are

Bending Stress

Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration

Bending stress

Three loads which causes the bending stress are

Wind load

Short circuit Force

Dead load

Wind load

Wind load on bus bar per meter length

WI = pxD

Where

p = wind pressure in kgm1

D = diameter of the rigid bus bar

S~)rt circuit force

10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =

Nnere

Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current

P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-

L Span between two supporting points in m -r~

J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady

~ - force N=OS

K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)

buses K= 1

( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8

(

Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0

due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically

0

The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl

8 where

g M = Belding moment in kgm

= WL8

bull ~

= resultant force in kgm

L = length of the bus bar in m

Z = section modulus m3

- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2

and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )

Vertical deflection

The vertical deflection is~

00054 X LA X W) =

Ex MI Where

L = unsupportedlengthinm

W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm

E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m

)

Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or

l200

Aeolian vibration

The natural frequency of vibration is

561 ~deflection

which should be more than 275 cycles per second

-

~ Flexible Bus Bar

shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed

)-j

1)

0

0

middotV 0

fl)

0

~ ~

D

D

~l

-

Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment

t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under

IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen

limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near

grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock

-

Grounding can be of one the following two types

Intentional( -0

This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface

0 Accidental

~

g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor

1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility

J CLumstances that lead to a shock

0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system

and its resistance to remote earth

2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential

gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface

3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is

bridging iwo points of high potential difference

4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance

current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances

5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current

through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current

intensity

The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other

kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable

conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141

(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding

calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -

recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above

Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing

j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is

advantageous for two reasons ~

I0I0- gt --

1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time

J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes

) or possible hours

2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief

0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of

primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9

a Effed of Reclosing

Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such

circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~

permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single

~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively

bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus

accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is

reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater

Potential Difference during Shock Situations

Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid

may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of

remote earth

Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0

distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect

)

TCAP

-~

I

shy

- I

f t3

a middot3

D

bull 0

bull ~

)

~ ~

rl

shy

0

)

Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and

lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time

navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure

IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence

oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot

neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed

ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both

lands

Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground

grid

Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS

transferred into or out of the substation

Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE

Std 80 - 1986

Sizing the Conductor

The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression

te a p 10

=

Where

A = T

To = T

=0 0

=a

p =

RMS current in kA

conductor cross section in mm2

maximum allowable temperature in degC

ambient allowable temperature in degC

reference temperature in degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T

resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in

~

1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf

duration of current flow in s

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 3: Alstom Training Manual

introduces lhe di(fllrent types 01 submiddotslaions

Generation station

Generation is done at 11 kV - 15 kV level As power of very high capacities cannot be nsmitted for long distances at these voltages it is stepped up using generator transformers to 110 kV - 400 kV levels Generation stations are in simple terms ~ step-up stations

)

Grid station o () Grid Stations are used to interconnect different gridsregionssectors They are

generally 400 kV substations They are stotions switching power from one generationgrid station to other They can olso be called Switching Stations

Distribution station

Distribution Stations are located at the load points where the power is stepped down to bull ~

bull o 11 kV - 110 kV levels

Bulk Industrial supply stations o

bull Bulk Industrial Supply Stations are distribution stations catering to one or 0 few consumers The supply voltage can range from 33 kV to 110 kV Industriol users do

I have their own generotion focilities besides the SEB supply and these s1a1ions oct asie step-up stations as well

bull o Sur 1S can also be classified as Step-up stotions Primary grid Stations Secondary

stc Sub-secondary stations and Distributions stations depending upon their POSHIn in the power system hierarchy

bull Generally the Substations are of outdoor type for 33 kV and above EHV Stations can be indoor depending upon the environmental conditions like pollution salinity etc and space constraints Indoor stations are Air - Insulated or SF6 gas - insulated depending upon the availability of space and financial constraints Gas Insulated D Substations (GIS) are extremely costly and requires extra maintenance and hence are preferred only when it is absolutely necessary

3

gt

Substation types

r

~1

~~

I

~

~

()

fJ j

G

D

0

bull 0

bull 0

~

0

a J )

J

--middot

c~

~ bull

D

-

Salient features of major equipment Major eqc Omenl In a $vbslalion

Tr substation layout is influenced to a great middot~xtent by the dimension of the

eCjUlpment and their accessories within the substwlon

Circuit Breakers

Circuit Breaker is a mechanical device capable of making carrying and breaking

currents undN normal circuit conditions and making carrying for a specified time and

breaking IS under short circuit conditions Circuit Breakers of the types indicated

below are used in India

36 kV Minimum oil Vacuum Sulfur hexa fluoride (SF6)

725 kV Minimum oil Sulphur hexa fluoride (SF6)

145 kV and above Sulphur hexa fluoride (SF)

245 kV and higher voltage outdoor circuit breakers generally necessitate the

provision of approach roods for breaker maintenance

400 kV CBs may hove pre-insertion resistors depending up on the system

requirement When a CB interrupts a transformer or a reactor circuit switching over

voltages can be more than 15 pu or 25 pu respectively (maximum limit

recommended by IEC) resistors are required to prevent restrikes due to current

chopping When lightly loaded tines are disconnected interruption of capacitive

currents take place causing restrikes which can set in oscillations of a few hundred Hz

CBs with self generating pressure and comparatively slow contad movement such as

bulkmiddotoil minimum- oil SF puffer type might restrike However modern SF6 puffer

type breakers are designed restrike-free

CBs can be live tank type or dead tonk type depending up on ihe substation design

and economy Dead tank type CBs come by design with sets of current tronsformers

on the bushings They are normally used in the lh breaker or Ring bus scheme

where there are CT s on either side of the CB This type of ca is less expensive when

compared with a live tonk type ca and two free standing (generally oil filled) CTs

combination These are not popular in Indio

Live tank CBs are used in other schemes where CTs are not required on either sides

of the ca like double main scheme double main transfer scheme etc as they ore less

PlCnensive than dead tank CBs

-

middot

~

)

0

)

0 ~)

0

middot0

bull 1)

11

bull V

~

0

0

~

0

J

D

J

f)

gt ~

Disconnect Switches and Earth Switches

Disconnect switches are mechanical devices which provide in their ope positions

isolating distances to meet the specified dearances A disconnect switch can open

and dose a circuit when either a negligible current has to be broken or mode or when

middotere is no significant change in voltage across the terminals of each pole of the

Qlsconnect It can also carry currents under normal circuit itions and the short

circuit currents for a specified time Disconnect switches are used for transfer of load

from one bus to another cnd to i$laquo 13 equipment for maintenonce Although a

variety of disconnect switches are available the fadar which hos the maximum

influence on the station layout is whether the disconnect switch is of the verticol breok

type or horizontal break type Horizontal break type normally occupies more space

than the vertical break type Between the horizontal center break and horizontal

double break types the former requires large phase to phose clearance

The location of disconnect switches in substations affects not only the substaianshy

loyouts but maintenance of the disconnect contacts also In some substations the

disconnects are mounted of high positions either vertically or horizontally Although

such substations occupy lesser area the maintenance of those disconnect switches is

more difficult and time consuming

The disconnect switch serves as adamonaf protection for personnel with breoker

orln during maintenance or repair work on the feeder and also enobles the breaker

e isolated from the bus for inspection and maintenance

Earth ~itch is a mechanical switching device for earthing different ports of a circuit

which is capable of withstanding short-circuit currents for a specified time but not

required to carry normal rated currents of the circuit

Instrument Transformers

Instrument transformers are devices used to transform currents and voltages in the

primary system to values suitable for ins1ruments meters protective relays etc They

isoloe the primary system from the secondary

Current Transformers (CTs) may either be of the bushing type or wound type The

bushing type is accommodated within the transformer bushings and the wound types

are seporateJy mounted The location of the cr with resped to associated circuit

breaker depends on the protection scheme and the layout ofsubstotion as well So

for Ihe wcund type CTs with dead tonk construction has been useo Howeve current

transformers with live tonk construction also are being offered It is cklImed thot These

transform offer the following advantages

bull They ~ capable of withstanding high short circuit currents due to their short and

ngid mary conductar and hence more reliable

bull They rJve 0W reactance and therefare hove better transient performance

bull These current transfarmeuro s do nat have their majar insulation over the high

currer carrying primary Therefore the heat generated is easily dissipoted due to

which 1e insulation has superior thermal stability and longer life However these

have mitations in withstanding seismic forces and have 10 handled and

transported carefully -

~ It -

I ) Different classes of accuracy i

The two different uses of a CT are0 bull Protection

~ bull Metering

These two requires conflicting properties of saturation hence different types of cores ~ are used For protection the CT should faithfully reproduce the changes in the current

f)

bull for higher magnitudes whereas for metering the CT should saturate at higher

magnitudes in order to prevent any damage to the meters

~ Protection Classesmiddot

(110

bull

bull PS

Closs PS CTs are Ot low reactance and their performance will be spec In

terms of the following charaderiscs it

1 Turns Ratio which will be numerically the same as the roled

0 transformation ratio

3 2 Minimum Knee-Point Voltage (Vk) specified in accordance with the

j formula Vk = K I ( R + RJ - K -+ poromete~ specified by the purchaser which depends on the system foult level

and the characteristics of the refoy intended 10 be used

I -+ rated secondary current of Ihe CT

R -+ resistance of the secondary corrected 1o 7OC

~ -+ impedance of the secondary circuit as pacified by the purchaser

3 Maximum Exciting Current at the rated knee-point voltage or at any

specified fraction of the rated knee-point voltage

- J

~

1

~-- V

J -I

1)

0

~

fJ It

J

bull

)

~ 9

)

~ V

~

I

In this way a CT designated in terms of percent composIte error ond

accuracy limit factor

x ~ Composite errDI Ihe RMS value of Ihe difference oetweefl til nSlontancous

volues at Ihe prtmory current and lhe rated Iranstormohon rohO hOles the octur

secondary currenl The standord composile errors ~rcent are 5 10 and 15

P -+ Protection

Y -+ Accuracy limit factor Ihe ralio of the raled accuracy 1011 pnmary urreonllo

lhe rated primClrf current where raled occvracy Iim1 primary current IS th value of

lhe highest primory currenl up la which the transformer will comply wth the specified

limits of the compqsile error The standard accuracy hmit foclors are 5 1O 15 20

ond30

Voltage Transformer (VTs) may be either Electro-magnetic type (IVT) or capacitor

type (CVT) IVTs are commonly used where high accuracy is required like revenue

metering For other applications CIT is preferred particularly at high voltages due to

their lower cost and can be used as a coupling capacitor as well for the Power line

Carrier Communication (PlCq equipment Each CVT will be earthed through an

earth electrode

For ground fault relaying on additional core is required in the VTs which can oe

connected in open delta The VTs are connected on the feeder side of the circuit

breaker and on the bus bars for synchronization

The standard accuracy classes for ClTs will be

bull for m~csurement 02 05 10 and 30

bull for protection 3P and 6P

T ormer

Transformer is the largest piece of equipment in a substation ond it is therefore

important from the point of view of station layout For instance due to its large

dimensions and reliability it is generally not possible to accommodate two

transformers in adjacent boys One of the problems could oe the radiators being

wider than the bay width In order to reduce the risk of fire large transformers are

provided with stone metol filled sooking pits with voids of capacity adequote to contain

the total quantity of oil Besides separation walls are provided in-between the

transformers and between transformers and roads within the substation

One of the important factors governing the layout of the substation is whether the

transformer is a three-phose unit or a bank of three single-phose transformers The

space required for single-phase banks is more than that with three-phase

transformers Besides single-phose bonks are usually provided with one spare singleshy

phose transformer which is kept in the service boy and used in case of a fault or

-

~ )

)

v

~olntenOrce 01 one d the single-phose uni~ Allernatively the spore un [l~ be

o~rmoneniy installed in the switchyord ready to replace the uni wn~ I~ )u of

Vlce Tni however requires on elaborate bus arrangement and isolalor SWitching

Reactivi Compensation Equipment

Reactive compensation may be switched or non-switched type as indicated by system

studies 01 Ine network The non-switched type compensation usually comprises shunt

reactors p-rmonently connected to transmission line or to bus bars at the substation

t-lext to Ihmiddot transformer shunt reodor is the largest piece of equipment These also

can be In the form of single-phase units or threemiddotphose units Often neulral

grounding reador which is connected between the neutral bushing of the line shunt

reactor the earth is provided to facilitate singlemiddotpole auto reclosing Since these

equlprr 00 contain oil all fire-safety precautions that are token for transformers

should be followed

Switched compensotion can be through switched reodors switched capacitors ormiddot

thyristor controlled readors and thyristor switched capacitors known as Stotic VAr

Compensators (SVC) These are selected according to the system requirements and

conneded diredly to the system through their own dedicoted tronsformers The shunt

capacitor bonks ore composed of 200middot400 kVAr copocitor units mounted on rocks in

seriesparallel operated ingroups to provide the required reodive power (MVAr)

output at the system voltage Monyotime only some of trese moy be required in the

initial stage and may undergo alteration as the system develops

Dired Stroke Lightning Protection

Any substation hos to be shielded from direct lightning strokes either by provision of

overhead shield wireearth wire or spikes (masts) The methodology followed for

systems up to 145 kV is by suitable placement of earth wiresmasts to provide

coverage to the entire station equipment Generally 60deg angle of shield for zones

covered by 2 or more wiresmasts and 45deg for single wiremost is considered

adequate For installations of 245 kVand above eledromognetic methods are used

The commonly used methods for determining shielded zones are the Mousa Method

and Razevig Method

Surge ArrestorsLightning Arrestors

Besides direct strokes the substation equipment has also to be protected against

travelling waves due to surge strokes on the lines entering the substation The

equiprlent most commonly used for this purpose is the surge arrestor 01 the line entry

of the __ ostalion The most important and the costliest equipment in a sub_ 1110n is the

trans - -ner and the normal practice is to install surge arrestors as near the

transL cner as possible The fixing up of insulation level for equipment within a

middot ~bstalon requires a detailed insulation co-ordination s1udy with surge arrestor as the shy[ocal ~oint for protecting the equipment from power frequen- -er-voltoge exceeding

) the or- estor rating Besides protecting the transformers the surge arrestors also

(J protee to the equipment located Win their protection zone Additional surge

arresters con be provided depending up on the isocerounic level anticipotedC) overvohoges and the protection requirements

-J

0 ) Insulators

(i)

bull Adequate insulation should be provided in a substation for reliability of supply ond

safety of personnel However the station design should be so evolved that the_

Q quantity of insulators required is the minimum and commensurate with the expected

security of supply An importont consideration in determining the insulation in a 0

bull substotion porticularly if it is located near sea a thermol power generating station or

on industrial place is the level of pollution which can be combated using insulators of

higher creepage distance In case this does not suffice the insulators need to be hot0 line washed periodically and this aspect has to be kept in mind while deciding the

bull 0 loyout of the substation Another method which hos proved to be successful is

-~iying suitable type of greases or compounds on 1he surface of the insulators ofter

cleaning the frequency depending upon ~ degree and the type of pollution

0 FOLLUTION LEVELS AND MINIMUM NOMINAL CREEPAGE DISTANCE TO BE

ADOPTED AS PER ISIEC0

~ Pollution Min Norrinal Creepage Type of Pollution

J Level Distance (mmkV)

0

~gt

Light 16 Non-Industrial Agricultural Mountainous areas beyond 20 Km from sea

~ Medium 20 Industrial Area without polluting

smoke and chemical effl uents and

) not too dose to sea

) Heavy 25 Industrial Area with polluting smoke amp chemical efffuents close

~ to sea and exposed winds from sea

to strong

Very Heavy 31 Industrial Area subjected to conductive dust polluhon smoke very close to sea exposed to sea and very strong winds from sea desert areas etc

The highest line-to-Iine voltage of the system IS used to determine the creepage

distance

The following types of insulators are normally used

a) Bus Support Insulators

(i) Solid core type

b) Strain Insulators

(i) Disc insulators c _

(ii) long Rod Porcelain insulators

) (iii) Polymer insulators

Structures(3

~ The cost of structures also is a major consideration while deciding the layout of a

) substation For instance in the case of flexible bus-bar arrangement cost of

structures is much higher than in the case of rigid bus type Similarly the form of 0

structures also ploys on important port and the choice is usually between using a few

0 heOYy structures or more number of smaller structures

0 Hot-dip galvonized steel is the most commonly used material in Indio for substation

0 structures When galvanizing is not effective particularly in a substation located In

0 coastal or industrial areas paInting becomes essential

Q Power Line Carrier Communication (PLCC)

0

0 The carner equipment required for communication relaying and tele metering is

connected to line through high frequency coble coupling capacitor and wove trap D The wave trap is installed at the line entrance The coupling capacitors are installed

~ - ~_~I on the line side of the wave trap and are normally base mounted The wave traps for -

voltage levels up to 145 kV can be mounted on the gantry structure on which the line -

is terminated at the substation or mounted on top of the capacitor voltage -

transformer Wave traps for voltage level of 245 kV and above generally require

separate supporting insulator stock mounted on structures of appropriate height

however 245 kV wave traps can also be suspended from the line side gantry

The differ-ent types of coupling used are

bull Inter-circuit coupling

Incase of double circuit lines one phose on each circuit need be used

lor communicotion This type of coupling is called inter-circuit

coupling

bull pr~e to Phose coupling

Incose of single circuit lines coupling con between any two pi-Jses of

) tne circuit depending up on the impedance of the phases

bull Phose to Earth coupling

Any one phose only can be use~ for carrier communication where the

earth is used as the return path

o -~--__ ()

tl ~ )i

o cD

~

bull o

It)

bull o

- -

shy v u ) U U J U W ~ () r bull u bull bull 00 ( co 0 0 () 0 c ~ -) ) V 0 t4

shy

-(H-~ i A-Ie 0- L(r -V---middotmiddot~~~Jl I r __ ~~__ ~2~i~tJ

~ I r- ~~~ COUPLING 1 -out-G-I[lt7~PAClTO~ C~PACITOR

COUPLING DEVICE

CARRIER TERMINAL

I COUPliNG i ~-------- j---GI OE ~ I I METER I

READING r-- - bull ~ bull ---- ~~ bT3YSTj

I IPHrEI

-InONE ICARRIiR --- OPTICJL r i[iHtlN-IL I fiBRE PATH fiBRE

l~a CPTIC r gt~IC I Ll-~ 1i()C tI-ltiL LJ II - t - I -j ~____~~~ri~~~~1 ~= ---

bullbull j EPX I =X bull -__1L 1 -I STATIC I I N~iwORO(C L_____ I I jlANAGERIiNERGY

N 1

~[lER

iTtLE PRINTER I~ L~ N~ flINE IL_ __bull__

ivALUAliON UNIT RELAY PANELS

~H~NEj WITH PRINTERRtLAY- PANELS - bull

Substation switching schemes

ti )

~

a t)

0

0

0

~

G

~

a ~

)

-

shy

shy

dela11s the switching sCMmes

Selection of a bus bar scheme for a porticular sub station is on important step in

design The choice of the bus-switching scheme is ~overned by various factors

which aim at a simple ~elioble safe and economic sub-station Some 01 the

important fodors that dictate the choice of the bus-switching scheme are

bull System reliability and ovailat y

bull Operational flexibility

bull Limitation of short circuit level

bull Simplicity of protection arrangements

bull Ease of extension

bull Availability of land

bull Cost

The relative importance of these factors varies from case to case and depending on

the voltage level number of circuits desired level of security etc

Types of schemes

The various bus-switching schemes that are in pradice are

bull Single bus

bull Sectional Single bus

bull Main and Transfer bus

bull Double Main

bull Double Main and Transfer bus

bull One and Half breaker

bull Mesh scheme

Aport from these schemes there are a few which are less frequently used

bull Sectionolized Main and Transfer bus

bull Double Main with bypass isolator

bull Sedionalized Double Main and Transfer bus

bull Double bus and double breaker

i

bull

Criteria for seledion

lhe following criteria are usually followed when selecting a switching scheme for a

sub-station

i __

bull It should be possible to take out any circuit breaker or any other equipment for

1J0intenance without removing the corresponding circuit from service

bull The rrin bus could be isolated for maintenance without loss of any circuit

bull CB failure Bus fault should couse minimum loss of circuits

bull Economy

J

bull The acceptable level of reliability has not been defined by any standard and therefore

jt is extremely difficult to quantify it for a system In such a situation the prevailing

practices and experience gained from system operation are token into consideration J I For instance in 400 kV systems One and Half breaker scheme is preferred over other

0 schemes os a major shut down cousing loss of 2 or more feeders is just improbable

albeit being more expensive than others Furthermore for 220 kV systems the Double ~ Main T ronder scheme is preferred

middot3

0 Single bus bar scheme

This type of arrangement can be used only where interruption to service is relatively ) unimportant But this is a simplest arrangement where each circuit is provided with its

own circuit breaker

The circuit breaker enables the feeder to be removed from service while it is carryingD

bull the loads when there is fault on the feeder The disadvantage with this r-Ongement is

that if the incoming circuit breaker is to be shut down for mainteno ~1e load on

gt that feeder has also to be shut down If the bus is supplied by more t~1i one feeder

the reliability of supply to the feeders using this type of layout is considerablyJ

increased J

_r Sectionalised single bus bar scheme

If adequate number of bus sections are made the single sectionalised bus provides an

economical way of limiting circuit outage is case of fault on a bus sedion as the

section circuit breakers acts as backup to the circuit breakers of the main circuits ThE

arrangement may be considered for intermediate switching stations or smoi

generating stations where mil1imising of circuit outage is important for systern ~

Ii

reliability The sectional ising breaker may also be used at medium sized substations

bull

)

)

)

j

_r

)

)

)

I j I 0 J

0

3

0

-3

I

bull Q)

bull ~

bull 0

1)

J

)

J

~J

-

- gt

)

)

receiving supply from more thon ltme source to synchronise or segregate the supplies

as per the opemting requirements

The interlocking arrangement is simple for both the types of arrangements

Main and Transfer bus bar scheme

In this type of cnongement the main ond transfer bus bors are coupled by means of

a normally open circuit brealcer All the incoming and outgoing circuits are connected

with the main bus bars through thei controlling circuit br~kers keeping the transfer

bus idle Each circuit is also connected to the transfer bus bar through on isolator In

case the circuit breaker of any circuit is shut down for maintenance this circuit is

cannected to the transfer bus bar through its tronsfer bus isolator Under such

circumstances Jhis particular circuit will be controlled by the bus transfer circuit

breaker Since the arrangement to the transfer bus is through the isolators coreful

interlocking is necessary with bus transfer breolcer so that only one circuit transferred

at a time

Double bus bar scheme

In this arrangement each incoming and outgoing circuit has its own controllingdrcuit

breaker and btmiddot means of bus selection isolators can be conneded to either of the

buses Each bus bar is designed to take the station total load and either bus bar

y be token out for moin1enonce Each circuit may in addition be provided with a

bye-pass isol enabling it to be connected directly to one of the bus bars byeshy

passing the controlling circuit breakers of the circuit The circuit can in that case be

energised through the bus bar coupler circuit breaker as in the main and tansfer bus

scheme and the controlling circuit breaker of the circuit token out for mainterance

Use of a bye-pass isolator with double bus necessarily requires adoption of a relatively

costly switchyard arrangement It should therefore be resorted to only in case where

outage of the particular circuit will have undesirable repercussions on the system

operation In case maintenance of the circuit Ix-eakers can be arranged by taking the

relevant circuit out (eg where two or more circuits or alternative routes are available)

the normal double bus arrangement without bye-pass should be favoured as simpler

and cheaper physical layouts can then be used The two buses of a double bus bar

arrangement enn be sectionalised through circuit breokers or isolators as required

from reliability considerations

)

) Double Main and Transfer scheme

In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one

spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )

transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from

) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to

couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3

~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple

() ------~-------

One and a half breakers scheme0

a I

bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two

0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme

described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid

feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)

feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in

0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two

breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit

bull emiddot

Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it

is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often

0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be

bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it

bull Mesh scheme

~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This

) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or

) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station

ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes

) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited

gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS

preferred to mesh scheme )

)

gt

layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS

Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on

the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of

the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0

generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power

network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only

interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond

instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available

generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission

line

a Feeder Oearance

Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty

feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two

breakers to isolate a fault

Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive

loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that

particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to

F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible

In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault

becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths

b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components

The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of

equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any

equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of

failure af these is discussed below

Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable

substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the

continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon

in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a

~--

-

t2

- ~

Q I

0

0

0

0

bull 0

~ ~

J

~

l

--

bull

stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on

which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck

Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service

c Redundancy in Design

The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active

or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are

switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite

advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even

during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of

breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active

redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder

Operational Flexibility

Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different

switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one

arrangement to another

Simplicity of protedion Arrangements

More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions

more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when

automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one

breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to

be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip

circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in

Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus

bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may

complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus

differential protedion is simple

Maintenance - effects on System Security

)

From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J

out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit

breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular

concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit

breaker maintenance

Ease of Extensions

Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af

feeders

InterlocksJ

~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches

) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic

1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes

ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be

~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are

0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated

bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its

associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT

designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull

aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES

The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the

r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance

) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety

I

reasons during the maintenance of equipment -

The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system

400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage

-

LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge

kV 1425 10501 950

6501 550

5501 450

325

SWitching surge withstond voltage

kVp 1050

1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge

kV 630 460 140

Phase to ground Clearance

- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned

overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted

bull gt

0

() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to

J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0

3 Phase to Phase Clearance

()

It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD

bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the

phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system

a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection

variation in equipment geometry

bull ~ I

Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and

9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator

3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a

inm

400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063

) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063

Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)

Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10

i

J

Equipment Spacing

)

I

J

~ shy

a 0

i ~

bull 3

a

bull eshy

bull 0

bull middot3

)

3 )

) bull

)

)

)

)

-

The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering

bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment

bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment

bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches

bull Land availability

bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering

protection reach of LA

Bus Bars

The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors

Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers

The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations

Structure

All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal

conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit

amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in

design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry

structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation

hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15

a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure

sholl be hot dipped golvonised

Equipment Supports

Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type

Road Layout

Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance

Bus Post Insulator

~

~)0

~

0

i)

bull D

bull ~

-

i ~

7

I )

V

J

J

~

-

~ ~

sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor

Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical

requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design

Electrical design

The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for

use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse

withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet

power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio

interference voltage

For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in

the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the

insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance

Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)

Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be

designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to

short-circuit seismic load ond wind load

Short Circuit Force

Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force

N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108

Fs = p

Where

Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current

p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters

l = Span between two supporting points in meters

N = Correction fodor for actual field condition

K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular

buses K= 1

M = Multiplying factor

Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as

(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8

RMS Symmetrical 800

IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs

-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-

~ three phose symmetrical fault

~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the

() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value

for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )

f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally

)

The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)

I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range

of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component

i

FE =S x W

raquo bull ~

F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very

t strong

1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg

D Wind Force

~)

Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the

C J mechanical design of support insulators

--

The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS

802) isI --

p = 06 X Vl

)

f~

~ Where

) v = Vt x k x k

basic wind speed msJ

k = 0 wind force in kg is

1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII

Where 10

L _ length of the insulator

J B = breadth of the insulator

0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force

D

J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for

support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I

projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly

disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8

The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either

due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and

earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of

earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8

under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice

bull ~

i 0

)

0

Bus Hars

-

~~) J )

~

)

lJ

) Busmiddot8ft ~tr

bull

)

)

Sclce n of blls bars

BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used

for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The

bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf

bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and

conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to

large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed

that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus

The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between

supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited

to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting

tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design

of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably

locating the spacers in the conductor bundles

The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum

Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid

bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly

U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not

encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans

expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to

thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus

bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will

alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during

operation

The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the

specific application for which these are chosen

Rigid Bus Bor

Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are

available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on

the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to

consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar

Electrical

The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are

Continuous current rating and

Shof me current rating

Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due

convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be

13 times that of 1 s rating

The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the

specified time is

I x t x (2SAf A =)

0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258

Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =

t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC

T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0

Mechanical 9

The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are

Bending Stress

Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration

Bending stress

Three loads which causes the bending stress are

Wind load

Short circuit Force

Dead load

Wind load

Wind load on bus bar per meter length

WI = pxD

Where

p = wind pressure in kgm1

D = diameter of the rigid bus bar

S~)rt circuit force

10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =

Nnere

Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current

P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-

L Span between two supporting points in m -r~

J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady

~ - force N=OS

K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)

buses K= 1

( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8

(

Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0

due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically

0

The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl

8 where

g M = Belding moment in kgm

= WL8

bull ~

= resultant force in kgm

L = length of the bus bar in m

Z = section modulus m3

- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2

and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )

Vertical deflection

The vertical deflection is~

00054 X LA X W) =

Ex MI Where

L = unsupportedlengthinm

W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm

E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m

)

Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or

l200

Aeolian vibration

The natural frequency of vibration is

561 ~deflection

which should be more than 275 cycles per second

-

~ Flexible Bus Bar

shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed

)-j

1)

0

0

middotV 0

fl)

0

~ ~

D

D

~l

-

Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment

t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under

IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen

limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near

grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock

-

Grounding can be of one the following two types

Intentional( -0

This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface

0 Accidental

~

g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor

1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility

J CLumstances that lead to a shock

0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system

and its resistance to remote earth

2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential

gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface

3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is

bridging iwo points of high potential difference

4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance

current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances

5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current

through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current

intensity

The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other

kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable

conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141

(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding

calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -

recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above

Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing

j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is

advantageous for two reasons ~

I0I0- gt --

1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time

J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes

) or possible hours

2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief

0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of

primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9

a Effed of Reclosing

Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such

circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~

permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single

~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively

bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus

accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is

reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater

Potential Difference during Shock Situations

Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid

may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of

remote earth

Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0

distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect

)

TCAP

-~

I

shy

- I

f t3

a middot3

D

bull 0

bull ~

)

~ ~

rl

shy

0

)

Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and

lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time

navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure

IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence

oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot

neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed

ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both

lands

Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground

grid

Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS

transferred into or out of the substation

Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE

Std 80 - 1986

Sizing the Conductor

The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression

te a p 10

=

Where

A = T

To = T

=0 0

=a

p =

RMS current in kA

conductor cross section in mm2

maximum allowable temperature in degC

ambient allowable temperature in degC

reference temperature in degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T

resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in

~

1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf

duration of current flow in s

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 4: Alstom Training Manual

r

~1

~~

I

~

~

()

fJ j

G

D

0

bull 0

bull 0

~

0

a J )

J

--middot

c~

~ bull

D

-

Salient features of major equipment Major eqc Omenl In a $vbslalion

Tr substation layout is influenced to a great middot~xtent by the dimension of the

eCjUlpment and their accessories within the substwlon

Circuit Breakers

Circuit Breaker is a mechanical device capable of making carrying and breaking

currents undN normal circuit conditions and making carrying for a specified time and

breaking IS under short circuit conditions Circuit Breakers of the types indicated

below are used in India

36 kV Minimum oil Vacuum Sulfur hexa fluoride (SF6)

725 kV Minimum oil Sulphur hexa fluoride (SF6)

145 kV and above Sulphur hexa fluoride (SF)

245 kV and higher voltage outdoor circuit breakers generally necessitate the

provision of approach roods for breaker maintenance

400 kV CBs may hove pre-insertion resistors depending up on the system

requirement When a CB interrupts a transformer or a reactor circuit switching over

voltages can be more than 15 pu or 25 pu respectively (maximum limit

recommended by IEC) resistors are required to prevent restrikes due to current

chopping When lightly loaded tines are disconnected interruption of capacitive

currents take place causing restrikes which can set in oscillations of a few hundred Hz

CBs with self generating pressure and comparatively slow contad movement such as

bulkmiddotoil minimum- oil SF puffer type might restrike However modern SF6 puffer

type breakers are designed restrike-free

CBs can be live tank type or dead tonk type depending up on ihe substation design

and economy Dead tank type CBs come by design with sets of current tronsformers

on the bushings They are normally used in the lh breaker or Ring bus scheme

where there are CT s on either side of the CB This type of ca is less expensive when

compared with a live tonk type ca and two free standing (generally oil filled) CTs

combination These are not popular in Indio

Live tank CBs are used in other schemes where CTs are not required on either sides

of the ca like double main scheme double main transfer scheme etc as they ore less

PlCnensive than dead tank CBs

-

middot

~

)

0

)

0 ~)

0

middot0

bull 1)

11

bull V

~

0

0

~

0

J

D

J

f)

gt ~

Disconnect Switches and Earth Switches

Disconnect switches are mechanical devices which provide in their ope positions

isolating distances to meet the specified dearances A disconnect switch can open

and dose a circuit when either a negligible current has to be broken or mode or when

middotere is no significant change in voltage across the terminals of each pole of the

Qlsconnect It can also carry currents under normal circuit itions and the short

circuit currents for a specified time Disconnect switches are used for transfer of load

from one bus to another cnd to i$laquo 13 equipment for maintenonce Although a

variety of disconnect switches are available the fadar which hos the maximum

influence on the station layout is whether the disconnect switch is of the verticol breok

type or horizontal break type Horizontal break type normally occupies more space

than the vertical break type Between the horizontal center break and horizontal

double break types the former requires large phase to phose clearance

The location of disconnect switches in substations affects not only the substaianshy

loyouts but maintenance of the disconnect contacts also In some substations the

disconnects are mounted of high positions either vertically or horizontally Although

such substations occupy lesser area the maintenance of those disconnect switches is

more difficult and time consuming

The disconnect switch serves as adamonaf protection for personnel with breoker

orln during maintenance or repair work on the feeder and also enobles the breaker

e isolated from the bus for inspection and maintenance

Earth ~itch is a mechanical switching device for earthing different ports of a circuit

which is capable of withstanding short-circuit currents for a specified time but not

required to carry normal rated currents of the circuit

Instrument Transformers

Instrument transformers are devices used to transform currents and voltages in the

primary system to values suitable for ins1ruments meters protective relays etc They

isoloe the primary system from the secondary

Current Transformers (CTs) may either be of the bushing type or wound type The

bushing type is accommodated within the transformer bushings and the wound types

are seporateJy mounted The location of the cr with resped to associated circuit

breaker depends on the protection scheme and the layout ofsubstotion as well So

for Ihe wcund type CTs with dead tonk construction has been useo Howeve current

transformers with live tonk construction also are being offered It is cklImed thot These

transform offer the following advantages

bull They ~ capable of withstanding high short circuit currents due to their short and

ngid mary conductar and hence more reliable

bull They rJve 0W reactance and therefare hove better transient performance

bull These current transfarmeuro s do nat have their majar insulation over the high

currer carrying primary Therefore the heat generated is easily dissipoted due to

which 1e insulation has superior thermal stability and longer life However these

have mitations in withstanding seismic forces and have 10 handled and

transported carefully -

~ It -

I ) Different classes of accuracy i

The two different uses of a CT are0 bull Protection

~ bull Metering

These two requires conflicting properties of saturation hence different types of cores ~ are used For protection the CT should faithfully reproduce the changes in the current

f)

bull for higher magnitudes whereas for metering the CT should saturate at higher

magnitudes in order to prevent any damage to the meters

~ Protection Classesmiddot

(110

bull

bull PS

Closs PS CTs are Ot low reactance and their performance will be spec In

terms of the following charaderiscs it

1 Turns Ratio which will be numerically the same as the roled

0 transformation ratio

3 2 Minimum Knee-Point Voltage (Vk) specified in accordance with the

j formula Vk = K I ( R + RJ - K -+ poromete~ specified by the purchaser which depends on the system foult level

and the characteristics of the refoy intended 10 be used

I -+ rated secondary current of Ihe CT

R -+ resistance of the secondary corrected 1o 7OC

~ -+ impedance of the secondary circuit as pacified by the purchaser

3 Maximum Exciting Current at the rated knee-point voltage or at any

specified fraction of the rated knee-point voltage

- J

~

1

~-- V

J -I

1)

0

~

fJ It

J

bull

)

~ 9

)

~ V

~

I

In this way a CT designated in terms of percent composIte error ond

accuracy limit factor

x ~ Composite errDI Ihe RMS value of Ihe difference oetweefl til nSlontancous

volues at Ihe prtmory current and lhe rated Iranstormohon rohO hOles the octur

secondary currenl The standord composile errors ~rcent are 5 10 and 15

P -+ Protection

Y -+ Accuracy limit factor Ihe ralio of the raled accuracy 1011 pnmary urreonllo

lhe rated primClrf current where raled occvracy Iim1 primary current IS th value of

lhe highest primory currenl up la which the transformer will comply wth the specified

limits of the compqsile error The standard accuracy hmit foclors are 5 1O 15 20

ond30

Voltage Transformer (VTs) may be either Electro-magnetic type (IVT) or capacitor

type (CVT) IVTs are commonly used where high accuracy is required like revenue

metering For other applications CIT is preferred particularly at high voltages due to

their lower cost and can be used as a coupling capacitor as well for the Power line

Carrier Communication (PlCq equipment Each CVT will be earthed through an

earth electrode

For ground fault relaying on additional core is required in the VTs which can oe

connected in open delta The VTs are connected on the feeder side of the circuit

breaker and on the bus bars for synchronization

The standard accuracy classes for ClTs will be

bull for m~csurement 02 05 10 and 30

bull for protection 3P and 6P

T ormer

Transformer is the largest piece of equipment in a substation ond it is therefore

important from the point of view of station layout For instance due to its large

dimensions and reliability it is generally not possible to accommodate two

transformers in adjacent boys One of the problems could oe the radiators being

wider than the bay width In order to reduce the risk of fire large transformers are

provided with stone metol filled sooking pits with voids of capacity adequote to contain

the total quantity of oil Besides separation walls are provided in-between the

transformers and between transformers and roads within the substation

One of the important factors governing the layout of the substation is whether the

transformer is a three-phose unit or a bank of three single-phose transformers The

space required for single-phase banks is more than that with three-phase

transformers Besides single-phose bonks are usually provided with one spare singleshy

phose transformer which is kept in the service boy and used in case of a fault or

-

~ )

)

v

~olntenOrce 01 one d the single-phose uni~ Allernatively the spore un [l~ be

o~rmoneniy installed in the switchyord ready to replace the uni wn~ I~ )u of

Vlce Tni however requires on elaborate bus arrangement and isolalor SWitching

Reactivi Compensation Equipment

Reactive compensation may be switched or non-switched type as indicated by system

studies 01 Ine network The non-switched type compensation usually comprises shunt

reactors p-rmonently connected to transmission line or to bus bars at the substation

t-lext to Ihmiddot transformer shunt reodor is the largest piece of equipment These also

can be In the form of single-phase units or threemiddotphose units Often neulral

grounding reador which is connected between the neutral bushing of the line shunt

reactor the earth is provided to facilitate singlemiddotpole auto reclosing Since these

equlprr 00 contain oil all fire-safety precautions that are token for transformers

should be followed

Switched compensotion can be through switched reodors switched capacitors ormiddot

thyristor controlled readors and thyristor switched capacitors known as Stotic VAr

Compensators (SVC) These are selected according to the system requirements and

conneded diredly to the system through their own dedicoted tronsformers The shunt

capacitor bonks ore composed of 200middot400 kVAr copocitor units mounted on rocks in

seriesparallel operated ingroups to provide the required reodive power (MVAr)

output at the system voltage Monyotime only some of trese moy be required in the

initial stage and may undergo alteration as the system develops

Dired Stroke Lightning Protection

Any substation hos to be shielded from direct lightning strokes either by provision of

overhead shield wireearth wire or spikes (masts) The methodology followed for

systems up to 145 kV is by suitable placement of earth wiresmasts to provide

coverage to the entire station equipment Generally 60deg angle of shield for zones

covered by 2 or more wiresmasts and 45deg for single wiremost is considered

adequate For installations of 245 kVand above eledromognetic methods are used

The commonly used methods for determining shielded zones are the Mousa Method

and Razevig Method

Surge ArrestorsLightning Arrestors

Besides direct strokes the substation equipment has also to be protected against

travelling waves due to surge strokes on the lines entering the substation The

equiprlent most commonly used for this purpose is the surge arrestor 01 the line entry

of the __ ostalion The most important and the costliest equipment in a sub_ 1110n is the

trans - -ner and the normal practice is to install surge arrestors as near the

transL cner as possible The fixing up of insulation level for equipment within a

middot ~bstalon requires a detailed insulation co-ordination s1udy with surge arrestor as the shy[ocal ~oint for protecting the equipment from power frequen- -er-voltoge exceeding

) the or- estor rating Besides protecting the transformers the surge arrestors also

(J protee to the equipment located Win their protection zone Additional surge

arresters con be provided depending up on the isocerounic level anticipotedC) overvohoges and the protection requirements

-J

0 ) Insulators

(i)

bull Adequate insulation should be provided in a substation for reliability of supply ond

safety of personnel However the station design should be so evolved that the_

Q quantity of insulators required is the minimum and commensurate with the expected

security of supply An importont consideration in determining the insulation in a 0

bull substotion porticularly if it is located near sea a thermol power generating station or

on industrial place is the level of pollution which can be combated using insulators of

higher creepage distance In case this does not suffice the insulators need to be hot0 line washed periodically and this aspect has to be kept in mind while deciding the

bull 0 loyout of the substation Another method which hos proved to be successful is

-~iying suitable type of greases or compounds on 1he surface of the insulators ofter

cleaning the frequency depending upon ~ degree and the type of pollution

0 FOLLUTION LEVELS AND MINIMUM NOMINAL CREEPAGE DISTANCE TO BE

ADOPTED AS PER ISIEC0

~ Pollution Min Norrinal Creepage Type of Pollution

J Level Distance (mmkV)

0

~gt

Light 16 Non-Industrial Agricultural Mountainous areas beyond 20 Km from sea

~ Medium 20 Industrial Area without polluting

smoke and chemical effl uents and

) not too dose to sea

) Heavy 25 Industrial Area with polluting smoke amp chemical efffuents close

~ to sea and exposed winds from sea

to strong

Very Heavy 31 Industrial Area subjected to conductive dust polluhon smoke very close to sea exposed to sea and very strong winds from sea desert areas etc

The highest line-to-Iine voltage of the system IS used to determine the creepage

distance

The following types of insulators are normally used

a) Bus Support Insulators

(i) Solid core type

b) Strain Insulators

(i) Disc insulators c _

(ii) long Rod Porcelain insulators

) (iii) Polymer insulators

Structures(3

~ The cost of structures also is a major consideration while deciding the layout of a

) substation For instance in the case of flexible bus-bar arrangement cost of

structures is much higher than in the case of rigid bus type Similarly the form of 0

structures also ploys on important port and the choice is usually between using a few

0 heOYy structures or more number of smaller structures

0 Hot-dip galvonized steel is the most commonly used material in Indio for substation

0 structures When galvanizing is not effective particularly in a substation located In

0 coastal or industrial areas paInting becomes essential

Q Power Line Carrier Communication (PLCC)

0

0 The carner equipment required for communication relaying and tele metering is

connected to line through high frequency coble coupling capacitor and wove trap D The wave trap is installed at the line entrance The coupling capacitors are installed

~ - ~_~I on the line side of the wave trap and are normally base mounted The wave traps for -

voltage levels up to 145 kV can be mounted on the gantry structure on which the line -

is terminated at the substation or mounted on top of the capacitor voltage -

transformer Wave traps for voltage level of 245 kV and above generally require

separate supporting insulator stock mounted on structures of appropriate height

however 245 kV wave traps can also be suspended from the line side gantry

The differ-ent types of coupling used are

bull Inter-circuit coupling

Incase of double circuit lines one phose on each circuit need be used

lor communicotion This type of coupling is called inter-circuit

coupling

bull pr~e to Phose coupling

Incose of single circuit lines coupling con between any two pi-Jses of

) tne circuit depending up on the impedance of the phases

bull Phose to Earth coupling

Any one phose only can be use~ for carrier communication where the

earth is used as the return path

o -~--__ ()

tl ~ )i

o cD

~

bull o

It)

bull o

- -

shy v u ) U U J U W ~ () r bull u bull bull 00 ( co 0 0 () 0 c ~ -) ) V 0 t4

shy

-(H-~ i A-Ie 0- L(r -V---middotmiddot~~~Jl I r __ ~~__ ~2~i~tJ

~ I r- ~~~ COUPLING 1 -out-G-I[lt7~PAClTO~ C~PACITOR

COUPLING DEVICE

CARRIER TERMINAL

I COUPliNG i ~-------- j---GI OE ~ I I METER I

READING r-- - bull ~ bull ---- ~~ bT3YSTj

I IPHrEI

-InONE ICARRIiR --- OPTICJL r i[iHtlN-IL I fiBRE PATH fiBRE

l~a CPTIC r gt~IC I Ll-~ 1i()C tI-ltiL LJ II - t - I -j ~____~~~ri~~~~1 ~= ---

bullbull j EPX I =X bull -__1L 1 -I STATIC I I N~iwORO(C L_____ I I jlANAGERIiNERGY

N 1

~[lER

iTtLE PRINTER I~ L~ N~ flINE IL_ __bull__

ivALUAliON UNIT RELAY PANELS

~H~NEj WITH PRINTERRtLAY- PANELS - bull

Substation switching schemes

ti )

~

a t)

0

0

0

~

G

~

a ~

)

-

shy

shy

dela11s the switching sCMmes

Selection of a bus bar scheme for a porticular sub station is on important step in

design The choice of the bus-switching scheme is ~overned by various factors

which aim at a simple ~elioble safe and economic sub-station Some 01 the

important fodors that dictate the choice of the bus-switching scheme are

bull System reliability and ovailat y

bull Operational flexibility

bull Limitation of short circuit level

bull Simplicity of protection arrangements

bull Ease of extension

bull Availability of land

bull Cost

The relative importance of these factors varies from case to case and depending on

the voltage level number of circuits desired level of security etc

Types of schemes

The various bus-switching schemes that are in pradice are

bull Single bus

bull Sectional Single bus

bull Main and Transfer bus

bull Double Main

bull Double Main and Transfer bus

bull One and Half breaker

bull Mesh scheme

Aport from these schemes there are a few which are less frequently used

bull Sectionolized Main and Transfer bus

bull Double Main with bypass isolator

bull Sedionalized Double Main and Transfer bus

bull Double bus and double breaker

i

bull

Criteria for seledion

lhe following criteria are usually followed when selecting a switching scheme for a

sub-station

i __

bull It should be possible to take out any circuit breaker or any other equipment for

1J0intenance without removing the corresponding circuit from service

bull The rrin bus could be isolated for maintenance without loss of any circuit

bull CB failure Bus fault should couse minimum loss of circuits

bull Economy

J

bull The acceptable level of reliability has not been defined by any standard and therefore

jt is extremely difficult to quantify it for a system In such a situation the prevailing

practices and experience gained from system operation are token into consideration J I For instance in 400 kV systems One and Half breaker scheme is preferred over other

0 schemes os a major shut down cousing loss of 2 or more feeders is just improbable

albeit being more expensive than others Furthermore for 220 kV systems the Double ~ Main T ronder scheme is preferred

middot3

0 Single bus bar scheme

This type of arrangement can be used only where interruption to service is relatively ) unimportant But this is a simplest arrangement where each circuit is provided with its

own circuit breaker

The circuit breaker enables the feeder to be removed from service while it is carryingD

bull the loads when there is fault on the feeder The disadvantage with this r-Ongement is

that if the incoming circuit breaker is to be shut down for mainteno ~1e load on

gt that feeder has also to be shut down If the bus is supplied by more t~1i one feeder

the reliability of supply to the feeders using this type of layout is considerablyJ

increased J

_r Sectionalised single bus bar scheme

If adequate number of bus sections are made the single sectionalised bus provides an

economical way of limiting circuit outage is case of fault on a bus sedion as the

section circuit breakers acts as backup to the circuit breakers of the main circuits ThE

arrangement may be considered for intermediate switching stations or smoi

generating stations where mil1imising of circuit outage is important for systern ~

Ii

reliability The sectional ising breaker may also be used at medium sized substations

bull

)

)

)

j

_r

)

)

)

I j I 0 J

0

3

0

-3

I

bull Q)

bull ~

bull 0

1)

J

)

J

~J

-

- gt

)

)

receiving supply from more thon ltme source to synchronise or segregate the supplies

as per the opemting requirements

The interlocking arrangement is simple for both the types of arrangements

Main and Transfer bus bar scheme

In this type of cnongement the main ond transfer bus bors are coupled by means of

a normally open circuit brealcer All the incoming and outgoing circuits are connected

with the main bus bars through thei controlling circuit br~kers keeping the transfer

bus idle Each circuit is also connected to the transfer bus bar through on isolator In

case the circuit breaker of any circuit is shut down for maintenance this circuit is

cannected to the transfer bus bar through its tronsfer bus isolator Under such

circumstances Jhis particular circuit will be controlled by the bus transfer circuit

breaker Since the arrangement to the transfer bus is through the isolators coreful

interlocking is necessary with bus transfer breolcer so that only one circuit transferred

at a time

Double bus bar scheme

In this arrangement each incoming and outgoing circuit has its own controllingdrcuit

breaker and btmiddot means of bus selection isolators can be conneded to either of the

buses Each bus bar is designed to take the station total load and either bus bar

y be token out for moin1enonce Each circuit may in addition be provided with a

bye-pass isol enabling it to be connected directly to one of the bus bars byeshy

passing the controlling circuit breakers of the circuit The circuit can in that case be

energised through the bus bar coupler circuit breaker as in the main and tansfer bus

scheme and the controlling circuit breaker of the circuit token out for mainterance

Use of a bye-pass isolator with double bus necessarily requires adoption of a relatively

costly switchyard arrangement It should therefore be resorted to only in case where

outage of the particular circuit will have undesirable repercussions on the system

operation In case maintenance of the circuit Ix-eakers can be arranged by taking the

relevant circuit out (eg where two or more circuits or alternative routes are available)

the normal double bus arrangement without bye-pass should be favoured as simpler

and cheaper physical layouts can then be used The two buses of a double bus bar

arrangement enn be sectionalised through circuit breokers or isolators as required

from reliability considerations

)

) Double Main and Transfer scheme

In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one

spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )

transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from

) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to

couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3

~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple

() ------~-------

One and a half breakers scheme0

a I

bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two

0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme

described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid

feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)

feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in

0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two

breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit

bull emiddot

Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it

is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often

0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be

bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it

bull Mesh scheme

~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This

) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or

) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station

ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes

) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited

gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS

preferred to mesh scheme )

)

gt

layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS

Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on

the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of

the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0

generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power

network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only

interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond

instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available

generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission

line

a Feeder Oearance

Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty

feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two

breakers to isolate a fault

Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive

loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that

particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to

F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible

In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault

becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths

b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components

The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of

equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any

equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of

failure af these is discussed below

Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable

substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the

continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon

in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a

~--

-

t2

- ~

Q I

0

0

0

0

bull 0

~ ~

J

~

l

--

bull

stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on

which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck

Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service

c Redundancy in Design

The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active

or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are

switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite

advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even

during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of

breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active

redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder

Operational Flexibility

Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different

switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one

arrangement to another

Simplicity of protedion Arrangements

More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions

more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when

automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one

breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to

be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip

circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in

Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus

bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may

complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus

differential protedion is simple

Maintenance - effects on System Security

)

From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J

out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit

breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular

concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit

breaker maintenance

Ease of Extensions

Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af

feeders

InterlocksJ

~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches

) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic

1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes

ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be

~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are

0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated

bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its

associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT

designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull

aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES

The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the

r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance

) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety

I

reasons during the maintenance of equipment -

The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system

400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage

-

LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge

kV 1425 10501 950

6501 550

5501 450

325

SWitching surge withstond voltage

kVp 1050

1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge

kV 630 460 140

Phase to ground Clearance

- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned

overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted

bull gt

0

() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to

J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0

3 Phase to Phase Clearance

()

It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD

bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the

phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system

a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection

variation in equipment geometry

bull ~ I

Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and

9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator

3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a

inm

400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063

) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063

Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)

Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10

i

J

Equipment Spacing

)

I

J

~ shy

a 0

i ~

bull 3

a

bull eshy

bull 0

bull middot3

)

3 )

) bull

)

)

)

)

-

The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering

bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment

bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment

bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches

bull Land availability

bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering

protection reach of LA

Bus Bars

The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors

Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers

The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations

Structure

All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal

conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit

amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in

design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry

structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation

hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15

a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure

sholl be hot dipped golvonised

Equipment Supports

Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type

Road Layout

Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance

Bus Post Insulator

~

~)0

~

0

i)

bull D

bull ~

-

i ~

7

I )

V

J

J

~

-

~ ~

sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor

Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical

requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design

Electrical design

The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for

use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse

withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet

power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio

interference voltage

For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in

the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the

insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance

Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)

Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be

designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to

short-circuit seismic load ond wind load

Short Circuit Force

Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force

N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108

Fs = p

Where

Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current

p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters

l = Span between two supporting points in meters

N = Correction fodor for actual field condition

K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular

buses K= 1

M = Multiplying factor

Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as

(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8

RMS Symmetrical 800

IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs

-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-

~ three phose symmetrical fault

~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the

() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value

for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )

f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally

)

The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)

I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range

of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component

i

FE =S x W

raquo bull ~

F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very

t strong

1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg

D Wind Force

~)

Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the

C J mechanical design of support insulators

--

The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS

802) isI --

p = 06 X Vl

)

f~

~ Where

) v = Vt x k x k

basic wind speed msJ

k = 0 wind force in kg is

1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII

Where 10

L _ length of the insulator

J B = breadth of the insulator

0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force

D

J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for

support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I

projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly

disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8

The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either

due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and

earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of

earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8

under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice

bull ~

i 0

)

0

Bus Hars

-

~~) J )

~

)

lJ

) Busmiddot8ft ~tr

bull

)

)

Sclce n of blls bars

BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used

for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The

bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf

bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and

conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to

large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed

that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus

The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between

supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited

to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting

tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design

of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably

locating the spacers in the conductor bundles

The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum

Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid

bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly

U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not

encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans

expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to

thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus

bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will

alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during

operation

The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the

specific application for which these are chosen

Rigid Bus Bor

Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are

available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on

the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to

consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar

Electrical

The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are

Continuous current rating and

Shof me current rating

Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due

convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be

13 times that of 1 s rating

The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the

specified time is

I x t x (2SAf A =)

0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258

Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =

t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC

T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0

Mechanical 9

The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are

Bending Stress

Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration

Bending stress

Three loads which causes the bending stress are

Wind load

Short circuit Force

Dead load

Wind load

Wind load on bus bar per meter length

WI = pxD

Where

p = wind pressure in kgm1

D = diameter of the rigid bus bar

S~)rt circuit force

10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =

Nnere

Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current

P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-

L Span between two supporting points in m -r~

J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady

~ - force N=OS

K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)

buses K= 1

( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8

(

Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0

due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically

0

The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl

8 where

g M = Belding moment in kgm

= WL8

bull ~

= resultant force in kgm

L = length of the bus bar in m

Z = section modulus m3

- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2

and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )

Vertical deflection

The vertical deflection is~

00054 X LA X W) =

Ex MI Where

L = unsupportedlengthinm

W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm

E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m

)

Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or

l200

Aeolian vibration

The natural frequency of vibration is

561 ~deflection

which should be more than 275 cycles per second

-

~ Flexible Bus Bar

shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed

)-j

1)

0

0

middotV 0

fl)

0

~ ~

D

D

~l

-

Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment

t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under

IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen

limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near

grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock

-

Grounding can be of one the following two types

Intentional( -0

This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface

0 Accidental

~

g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor

1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility

J CLumstances that lead to a shock

0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system

and its resistance to remote earth

2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential

gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface

3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is

bridging iwo points of high potential difference

4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance

current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances

5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current

through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current

intensity

The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other

kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable

conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141

(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding

calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -

recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above

Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing

j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is

advantageous for two reasons ~

I0I0- gt --

1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time

J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes

) or possible hours

2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief

0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of

primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9

a Effed of Reclosing

Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such

circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~

permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single

~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively

bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus

accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is

reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater

Potential Difference during Shock Situations

Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid

may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of

remote earth

Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0

distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect

)

TCAP

-~

I

shy

- I

f t3

a middot3

D

bull 0

bull ~

)

~ ~

rl

shy

0

)

Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and

lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time

navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure

IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence

oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot

neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed

ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both

lands

Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground

grid

Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS

transferred into or out of the substation

Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE

Std 80 - 1986

Sizing the Conductor

The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression

te a p 10

=

Where

A = T

To = T

=0 0

=a

p =

RMS current in kA

conductor cross section in mm2

maximum allowable temperature in degC

ambient allowable temperature in degC

reference temperature in degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T

resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in

~

1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf

duration of current flow in s

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 5: Alstom Training Manual

-

middot

~

)

0

)

0 ~)

0

middot0

bull 1)

11

bull V

~

0

0

~

0

J

D

J

f)

gt ~

Disconnect Switches and Earth Switches

Disconnect switches are mechanical devices which provide in their ope positions

isolating distances to meet the specified dearances A disconnect switch can open

and dose a circuit when either a negligible current has to be broken or mode or when

middotere is no significant change in voltage across the terminals of each pole of the

Qlsconnect It can also carry currents under normal circuit itions and the short

circuit currents for a specified time Disconnect switches are used for transfer of load

from one bus to another cnd to i$laquo 13 equipment for maintenonce Although a

variety of disconnect switches are available the fadar which hos the maximum

influence on the station layout is whether the disconnect switch is of the verticol breok

type or horizontal break type Horizontal break type normally occupies more space

than the vertical break type Between the horizontal center break and horizontal

double break types the former requires large phase to phose clearance

The location of disconnect switches in substations affects not only the substaianshy

loyouts but maintenance of the disconnect contacts also In some substations the

disconnects are mounted of high positions either vertically or horizontally Although

such substations occupy lesser area the maintenance of those disconnect switches is

more difficult and time consuming

The disconnect switch serves as adamonaf protection for personnel with breoker

orln during maintenance or repair work on the feeder and also enobles the breaker

e isolated from the bus for inspection and maintenance

Earth ~itch is a mechanical switching device for earthing different ports of a circuit

which is capable of withstanding short-circuit currents for a specified time but not

required to carry normal rated currents of the circuit

Instrument Transformers

Instrument transformers are devices used to transform currents and voltages in the

primary system to values suitable for ins1ruments meters protective relays etc They

isoloe the primary system from the secondary

Current Transformers (CTs) may either be of the bushing type or wound type The

bushing type is accommodated within the transformer bushings and the wound types

are seporateJy mounted The location of the cr with resped to associated circuit

breaker depends on the protection scheme and the layout ofsubstotion as well So

for Ihe wcund type CTs with dead tonk construction has been useo Howeve current

transformers with live tonk construction also are being offered It is cklImed thot These

transform offer the following advantages

bull They ~ capable of withstanding high short circuit currents due to their short and

ngid mary conductar and hence more reliable

bull They rJve 0W reactance and therefare hove better transient performance

bull These current transfarmeuro s do nat have their majar insulation over the high

currer carrying primary Therefore the heat generated is easily dissipoted due to

which 1e insulation has superior thermal stability and longer life However these

have mitations in withstanding seismic forces and have 10 handled and

transported carefully -

~ It -

I ) Different classes of accuracy i

The two different uses of a CT are0 bull Protection

~ bull Metering

These two requires conflicting properties of saturation hence different types of cores ~ are used For protection the CT should faithfully reproduce the changes in the current

f)

bull for higher magnitudes whereas for metering the CT should saturate at higher

magnitudes in order to prevent any damage to the meters

~ Protection Classesmiddot

(110

bull

bull PS

Closs PS CTs are Ot low reactance and their performance will be spec In

terms of the following charaderiscs it

1 Turns Ratio which will be numerically the same as the roled

0 transformation ratio

3 2 Minimum Knee-Point Voltage (Vk) specified in accordance with the

j formula Vk = K I ( R + RJ - K -+ poromete~ specified by the purchaser which depends on the system foult level

and the characteristics of the refoy intended 10 be used

I -+ rated secondary current of Ihe CT

R -+ resistance of the secondary corrected 1o 7OC

~ -+ impedance of the secondary circuit as pacified by the purchaser

3 Maximum Exciting Current at the rated knee-point voltage or at any

specified fraction of the rated knee-point voltage

- J

~

1

~-- V

J -I

1)

0

~

fJ It

J

bull

)

~ 9

)

~ V

~

I

In this way a CT designated in terms of percent composIte error ond

accuracy limit factor

x ~ Composite errDI Ihe RMS value of Ihe difference oetweefl til nSlontancous

volues at Ihe prtmory current and lhe rated Iranstormohon rohO hOles the octur

secondary currenl The standord composile errors ~rcent are 5 10 and 15

P -+ Protection

Y -+ Accuracy limit factor Ihe ralio of the raled accuracy 1011 pnmary urreonllo

lhe rated primClrf current where raled occvracy Iim1 primary current IS th value of

lhe highest primory currenl up la which the transformer will comply wth the specified

limits of the compqsile error The standard accuracy hmit foclors are 5 1O 15 20

ond30

Voltage Transformer (VTs) may be either Electro-magnetic type (IVT) or capacitor

type (CVT) IVTs are commonly used where high accuracy is required like revenue

metering For other applications CIT is preferred particularly at high voltages due to

their lower cost and can be used as a coupling capacitor as well for the Power line

Carrier Communication (PlCq equipment Each CVT will be earthed through an

earth electrode

For ground fault relaying on additional core is required in the VTs which can oe

connected in open delta The VTs are connected on the feeder side of the circuit

breaker and on the bus bars for synchronization

The standard accuracy classes for ClTs will be

bull for m~csurement 02 05 10 and 30

bull for protection 3P and 6P

T ormer

Transformer is the largest piece of equipment in a substation ond it is therefore

important from the point of view of station layout For instance due to its large

dimensions and reliability it is generally not possible to accommodate two

transformers in adjacent boys One of the problems could oe the radiators being

wider than the bay width In order to reduce the risk of fire large transformers are

provided with stone metol filled sooking pits with voids of capacity adequote to contain

the total quantity of oil Besides separation walls are provided in-between the

transformers and between transformers and roads within the substation

One of the important factors governing the layout of the substation is whether the

transformer is a three-phose unit or a bank of three single-phose transformers The

space required for single-phase banks is more than that with three-phase

transformers Besides single-phose bonks are usually provided with one spare singleshy

phose transformer which is kept in the service boy and used in case of a fault or

-

~ )

)

v

~olntenOrce 01 one d the single-phose uni~ Allernatively the spore un [l~ be

o~rmoneniy installed in the switchyord ready to replace the uni wn~ I~ )u of

Vlce Tni however requires on elaborate bus arrangement and isolalor SWitching

Reactivi Compensation Equipment

Reactive compensation may be switched or non-switched type as indicated by system

studies 01 Ine network The non-switched type compensation usually comprises shunt

reactors p-rmonently connected to transmission line or to bus bars at the substation

t-lext to Ihmiddot transformer shunt reodor is the largest piece of equipment These also

can be In the form of single-phase units or threemiddotphose units Often neulral

grounding reador which is connected between the neutral bushing of the line shunt

reactor the earth is provided to facilitate singlemiddotpole auto reclosing Since these

equlprr 00 contain oil all fire-safety precautions that are token for transformers

should be followed

Switched compensotion can be through switched reodors switched capacitors ormiddot

thyristor controlled readors and thyristor switched capacitors known as Stotic VAr

Compensators (SVC) These are selected according to the system requirements and

conneded diredly to the system through their own dedicoted tronsformers The shunt

capacitor bonks ore composed of 200middot400 kVAr copocitor units mounted on rocks in

seriesparallel operated ingroups to provide the required reodive power (MVAr)

output at the system voltage Monyotime only some of trese moy be required in the

initial stage and may undergo alteration as the system develops

Dired Stroke Lightning Protection

Any substation hos to be shielded from direct lightning strokes either by provision of

overhead shield wireearth wire or spikes (masts) The methodology followed for

systems up to 145 kV is by suitable placement of earth wiresmasts to provide

coverage to the entire station equipment Generally 60deg angle of shield for zones

covered by 2 or more wiresmasts and 45deg for single wiremost is considered

adequate For installations of 245 kVand above eledromognetic methods are used

The commonly used methods for determining shielded zones are the Mousa Method

and Razevig Method

Surge ArrestorsLightning Arrestors

Besides direct strokes the substation equipment has also to be protected against

travelling waves due to surge strokes on the lines entering the substation The

equiprlent most commonly used for this purpose is the surge arrestor 01 the line entry

of the __ ostalion The most important and the costliest equipment in a sub_ 1110n is the

trans - -ner and the normal practice is to install surge arrestors as near the

transL cner as possible The fixing up of insulation level for equipment within a

middot ~bstalon requires a detailed insulation co-ordination s1udy with surge arrestor as the shy[ocal ~oint for protecting the equipment from power frequen- -er-voltoge exceeding

) the or- estor rating Besides protecting the transformers the surge arrestors also

(J protee to the equipment located Win their protection zone Additional surge

arresters con be provided depending up on the isocerounic level anticipotedC) overvohoges and the protection requirements

-J

0 ) Insulators

(i)

bull Adequate insulation should be provided in a substation for reliability of supply ond

safety of personnel However the station design should be so evolved that the_

Q quantity of insulators required is the minimum and commensurate with the expected

security of supply An importont consideration in determining the insulation in a 0

bull substotion porticularly if it is located near sea a thermol power generating station or

on industrial place is the level of pollution which can be combated using insulators of

higher creepage distance In case this does not suffice the insulators need to be hot0 line washed periodically and this aspect has to be kept in mind while deciding the

bull 0 loyout of the substation Another method which hos proved to be successful is

-~iying suitable type of greases or compounds on 1he surface of the insulators ofter

cleaning the frequency depending upon ~ degree and the type of pollution

0 FOLLUTION LEVELS AND MINIMUM NOMINAL CREEPAGE DISTANCE TO BE

ADOPTED AS PER ISIEC0

~ Pollution Min Norrinal Creepage Type of Pollution

J Level Distance (mmkV)

0

~gt

Light 16 Non-Industrial Agricultural Mountainous areas beyond 20 Km from sea

~ Medium 20 Industrial Area without polluting

smoke and chemical effl uents and

) not too dose to sea

) Heavy 25 Industrial Area with polluting smoke amp chemical efffuents close

~ to sea and exposed winds from sea

to strong

Very Heavy 31 Industrial Area subjected to conductive dust polluhon smoke very close to sea exposed to sea and very strong winds from sea desert areas etc

The highest line-to-Iine voltage of the system IS used to determine the creepage

distance

The following types of insulators are normally used

a) Bus Support Insulators

(i) Solid core type

b) Strain Insulators

(i) Disc insulators c _

(ii) long Rod Porcelain insulators

) (iii) Polymer insulators

Structures(3

~ The cost of structures also is a major consideration while deciding the layout of a

) substation For instance in the case of flexible bus-bar arrangement cost of

structures is much higher than in the case of rigid bus type Similarly the form of 0

structures also ploys on important port and the choice is usually between using a few

0 heOYy structures or more number of smaller structures

0 Hot-dip galvonized steel is the most commonly used material in Indio for substation

0 structures When galvanizing is not effective particularly in a substation located In

0 coastal or industrial areas paInting becomes essential

Q Power Line Carrier Communication (PLCC)

0

0 The carner equipment required for communication relaying and tele metering is

connected to line through high frequency coble coupling capacitor and wove trap D The wave trap is installed at the line entrance The coupling capacitors are installed

~ - ~_~I on the line side of the wave trap and are normally base mounted The wave traps for -

voltage levels up to 145 kV can be mounted on the gantry structure on which the line -

is terminated at the substation or mounted on top of the capacitor voltage -

transformer Wave traps for voltage level of 245 kV and above generally require

separate supporting insulator stock mounted on structures of appropriate height

however 245 kV wave traps can also be suspended from the line side gantry

The differ-ent types of coupling used are

bull Inter-circuit coupling

Incase of double circuit lines one phose on each circuit need be used

lor communicotion This type of coupling is called inter-circuit

coupling

bull pr~e to Phose coupling

Incose of single circuit lines coupling con between any two pi-Jses of

) tne circuit depending up on the impedance of the phases

bull Phose to Earth coupling

Any one phose only can be use~ for carrier communication where the

earth is used as the return path

o -~--__ ()

tl ~ )i

o cD

~

bull o

It)

bull o

- -

shy v u ) U U J U W ~ () r bull u bull bull 00 ( co 0 0 () 0 c ~ -) ) V 0 t4

shy

-(H-~ i A-Ie 0- L(r -V---middotmiddot~~~Jl I r __ ~~__ ~2~i~tJ

~ I r- ~~~ COUPLING 1 -out-G-I[lt7~PAClTO~ C~PACITOR

COUPLING DEVICE

CARRIER TERMINAL

I COUPliNG i ~-------- j---GI OE ~ I I METER I

READING r-- - bull ~ bull ---- ~~ bT3YSTj

I IPHrEI

-InONE ICARRIiR --- OPTICJL r i[iHtlN-IL I fiBRE PATH fiBRE

l~a CPTIC r gt~IC I Ll-~ 1i()C tI-ltiL LJ II - t - I -j ~____~~~ri~~~~1 ~= ---

bullbull j EPX I =X bull -__1L 1 -I STATIC I I N~iwORO(C L_____ I I jlANAGERIiNERGY

N 1

~[lER

iTtLE PRINTER I~ L~ N~ flINE IL_ __bull__

ivALUAliON UNIT RELAY PANELS

~H~NEj WITH PRINTERRtLAY- PANELS - bull

Substation switching schemes

ti )

~

a t)

0

0

0

~

G

~

a ~

)

-

shy

shy

dela11s the switching sCMmes

Selection of a bus bar scheme for a porticular sub station is on important step in

design The choice of the bus-switching scheme is ~overned by various factors

which aim at a simple ~elioble safe and economic sub-station Some 01 the

important fodors that dictate the choice of the bus-switching scheme are

bull System reliability and ovailat y

bull Operational flexibility

bull Limitation of short circuit level

bull Simplicity of protection arrangements

bull Ease of extension

bull Availability of land

bull Cost

The relative importance of these factors varies from case to case and depending on

the voltage level number of circuits desired level of security etc

Types of schemes

The various bus-switching schemes that are in pradice are

bull Single bus

bull Sectional Single bus

bull Main and Transfer bus

bull Double Main

bull Double Main and Transfer bus

bull One and Half breaker

bull Mesh scheme

Aport from these schemes there are a few which are less frequently used

bull Sectionolized Main and Transfer bus

bull Double Main with bypass isolator

bull Sedionalized Double Main and Transfer bus

bull Double bus and double breaker

i

bull

Criteria for seledion

lhe following criteria are usually followed when selecting a switching scheme for a

sub-station

i __

bull It should be possible to take out any circuit breaker or any other equipment for

1J0intenance without removing the corresponding circuit from service

bull The rrin bus could be isolated for maintenance without loss of any circuit

bull CB failure Bus fault should couse minimum loss of circuits

bull Economy

J

bull The acceptable level of reliability has not been defined by any standard and therefore

jt is extremely difficult to quantify it for a system In such a situation the prevailing

practices and experience gained from system operation are token into consideration J I For instance in 400 kV systems One and Half breaker scheme is preferred over other

0 schemes os a major shut down cousing loss of 2 or more feeders is just improbable

albeit being more expensive than others Furthermore for 220 kV systems the Double ~ Main T ronder scheme is preferred

middot3

0 Single bus bar scheme

This type of arrangement can be used only where interruption to service is relatively ) unimportant But this is a simplest arrangement where each circuit is provided with its

own circuit breaker

The circuit breaker enables the feeder to be removed from service while it is carryingD

bull the loads when there is fault on the feeder The disadvantage with this r-Ongement is

that if the incoming circuit breaker is to be shut down for mainteno ~1e load on

gt that feeder has also to be shut down If the bus is supplied by more t~1i one feeder

the reliability of supply to the feeders using this type of layout is considerablyJ

increased J

_r Sectionalised single bus bar scheme

If adequate number of bus sections are made the single sectionalised bus provides an

economical way of limiting circuit outage is case of fault on a bus sedion as the

section circuit breakers acts as backup to the circuit breakers of the main circuits ThE

arrangement may be considered for intermediate switching stations or smoi

generating stations where mil1imising of circuit outage is important for systern ~

Ii

reliability The sectional ising breaker may also be used at medium sized substations

bull

)

)

)

j

_r

)

)

)

I j I 0 J

0

3

0

-3

I

bull Q)

bull ~

bull 0

1)

J

)

J

~J

-

- gt

)

)

receiving supply from more thon ltme source to synchronise or segregate the supplies

as per the opemting requirements

The interlocking arrangement is simple for both the types of arrangements

Main and Transfer bus bar scheme

In this type of cnongement the main ond transfer bus bors are coupled by means of

a normally open circuit brealcer All the incoming and outgoing circuits are connected

with the main bus bars through thei controlling circuit br~kers keeping the transfer

bus idle Each circuit is also connected to the transfer bus bar through on isolator In

case the circuit breaker of any circuit is shut down for maintenance this circuit is

cannected to the transfer bus bar through its tronsfer bus isolator Under such

circumstances Jhis particular circuit will be controlled by the bus transfer circuit

breaker Since the arrangement to the transfer bus is through the isolators coreful

interlocking is necessary with bus transfer breolcer so that only one circuit transferred

at a time

Double bus bar scheme

In this arrangement each incoming and outgoing circuit has its own controllingdrcuit

breaker and btmiddot means of bus selection isolators can be conneded to either of the

buses Each bus bar is designed to take the station total load and either bus bar

y be token out for moin1enonce Each circuit may in addition be provided with a

bye-pass isol enabling it to be connected directly to one of the bus bars byeshy

passing the controlling circuit breakers of the circuit The circuit can in that case be

energised through the bus bar coupler circuit breaker as in the main and tansfer bus

scheme and the controlling circuit breaker of the circuit token out for mainterance

Use of a bye-pass isolator with double bus necessarily requires adoption of a relatively

costly switchyard arrangement It should therefore be resorted to only in case where

outage of the particular circuit will have undesirable repercussions on the system

operation In case maintenance of the circuit Ix-eakers can be arranged by taking the

relevant circuit out (eg where two or more circuits or alternative routes are available)

the normal double bus arrangement without bye-pass should be favoured as simpler

and cheaper physical layouts can then be used The two buses of a double bus bar

arrangement enn be sectionalised through circuit breokers or isolators as required

from reliability considerations

)

) Double Main and Transfer scheme

In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one

spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )

transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from

) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to

couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3

~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple

() ------~-------

One and a half breakers scheme0

a I

bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two

0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme

described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid

feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)

feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in

0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two

breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit

bull emiddot

Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it

is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often

0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be

bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it

bull Mesh scheme

~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This

) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or

) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station

ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes

) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited

gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS

preferred to mesh scheme )

)

gt

layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS

Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on

the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of

the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0

generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power

network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only

interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond

instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available

generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission

line

a Feeder Oearance

Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty

feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two

breakers to isolate a fault

Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive

loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that

particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to

F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible

In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault

becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths

b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components

The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of

equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any

equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of

failure af these is discussed below

Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable

substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the

continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon

in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a

~--

-

t2

- ~

Q I

0

0

0

0

bull 0

~ ~

J

~

l

--

bull

stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on

which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck

Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service

c Redundancy in Design

The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active

or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are

switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite

advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even

during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of

breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active

redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder

Operational Flexibility

Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different

switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one

arrangement to another

Simplicity of protedion Arrangements

More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions

more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when

automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one

breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to

be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip

circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in

Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus

bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may

complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus

differential protedion is simple

Maintenance - effects on System Security

)

From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J

out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit

breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular

concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit

breaker maintenance

Ease of Extensions

Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af

feeders

InterlocksJ

~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches

) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic

1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes

ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be

~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are

0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated

bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its

associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT

designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull

aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES

The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the

r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance

) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety

I

reasons during the maintenance of equipment -

The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system

400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage

-

LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge

kV 1425 10501 950

6501 550

5501 450

325

SWitching surge withstond voltage

kVp 1050

1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge

kV 630 460 140

Phase to ground Clearance

- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned

overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted

bull gt

0

() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to

J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0

3 Phase to Phase Clearance

()

It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD

bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the

phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system

a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection

variation in equipment geometry

bull ~ I

Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and

9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator

3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a

inm

400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063

) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063

Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)

Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10

i

J

Equipment Spacing

)

I

J

~ shy

a 0

i ~

bull 3

a

bull eshy

bull 0

bull middot3

)

3 )

) bull

)

)

)

)

-

The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering

bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment

bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment

bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches

bull Land availability

bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering

protection reach of LA

Bus Bars

The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors

Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers

The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations

Structure

All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal

conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit

amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in

design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry

structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation

hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15

a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure

sholl be hot dipped golvonised

Equipment Supports

Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type

Road Layout

Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance

Bus Post Insulator

~

~)0

~

0

i)

bull D

bull ~

-

i ~

7

I )

V

J

J

~

-

~ ~

sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor

Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical

requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design

Electrical design

The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for

use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse

withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet

power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio

interference voltage

For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in

the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the

insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance

Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)

Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be

designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to

short-circuit seismic load ond wind load

Short Circuit Force

Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force

N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108

Fs = p

Where

Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current

p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters

l = Span between two supporting points in meters

N = Correction fodor for actual field condition

K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular

buses K= 1

M = Multiplying factor

Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as

(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8

RMS Symmetrical 800

IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs

-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-

~ three phose symmetrical fault

~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the

() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value

for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )

f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally

)

The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)

I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range

of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component

i

FE =S x W

raquo bull ~

F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very

t strong

1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg

D Wind Force

~)

Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the

C J mechanical design of support insulators

--

The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS

802) isI --

p = 06 X Vl

)

f~

~ Where

) v = Vt x k x k

basic wind speed msJ

k = 0 wind force in kg is

1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII

Where 10

L _ length of the insulator

J B = breadth of the insulator

0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force

D

J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for

support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I

projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly

disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8

The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either

due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and

earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of

earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8

under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice

bull ~

i 0

)

0

Bus Hars

-

~~) J )

~

)

lJ

) Busmiddot8ft ~tr

bull

)

)

Sclce n of blls bars

BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used

for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The

bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf

bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and

conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to

large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed

that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus

The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between

supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited

to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting

tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design

of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably

locating the spacers in the conductor bundles

The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum

Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid

bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly

U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not

encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans

expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to

thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus

bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will

alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during

operation

The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the

specific application for which these are chosen

Rigid Bus Bor

Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are

available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on

the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to

consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar

Electrical

The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are

Continuous current rating and

Shof me current rating

Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due

convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be

13 times that of 1 s rating

The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the

specified time is

I x t x (2SAf A =)

0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258

Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =

t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC

T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0

Mechanical 9

The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are

Bending Stress

Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration

Bending stress

Three loads which causes the bending stress are

Wind load

Short circuit Force

Dead load

Wind load

Wind load on bus bar per meter length

WI = pxD

Where

p = wind pressure in kgm1

D = diameter of the rigid bus bar

S~)rt circuit force

10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =

Nnere

Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current

P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-

L Span between two supporting points in m -r~

J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady

~ - force N=OS

K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)

buses K= 1

( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8

(

Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0

due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically

0

The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl

8 where

g M = Belding moment in kgm

= WL8

bull ~

= resultant force in kgm

L = length of the bus bar in m

Z = section modulus m3

- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2

and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )

Vertical deflection

The vertical deflection is~

00054 X LA X W) =

Ex MI Where

L = unsupportedlengthinm

W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm

E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m

)

Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or

l200

Aeolian vibration

The natural frequency of vibration is

561 ~deflection

which should be more than 275 cycles per second

-

~ Flexible Bus Bar

shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed

)-j

1)

0

0

middotV 0

fl)

0

~ ~

D

D

~l

-

Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment

t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under

IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen

limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near

grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock

-

Grounding can be of one the following two types

Intentional( -0

This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface

0 Accidental

~

g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor

1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility

J CLumstances that lead to a shock

0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system

and its resistance to remote earth

2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential

gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface

3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is

bridging iwo points of high potential difference

4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance

current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances

5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current

through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current

intensity

The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other

kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable

conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141

(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding

calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -

recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above

Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing

j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is

advantageous for two reasons ~

I0I0- gt --

1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time

J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes

) or possible hours

2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief

0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of

primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9

a Effed of Reclosing

Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such

circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~

permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single

~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively

bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus

accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is

reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater

Potential Difference during Shock Situations

Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid

may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of

remote earth

Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0

distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect

)

TCAP

-~

I

shy

- I

f t3

a middot3

D

bull 0

bull ~

)

~ ~

rl

shy

0

)

Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and

lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time

navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure

IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence

oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot

neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed

ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both

lands

Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground

grid

Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS

transferred into or out of the substation

Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE

Std 80 - 1986

Sizing the Conductor

The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression

te a p 10

=

Where

A = T

To = T

=0 0

=a

p =

RMS current in kA

conductor cross section in mm2

maximum allowable temperature in degC

ambient allowable temperature in degC

reference temperature in degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T

resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in

~

1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf

duration of current flow in s

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 6: Alstom Training Manual

for Ihe wcund type CTs with dead tonk construction has been useo Howeve current

transformers with live tonk construction also are being offered It is cklImed thot These

transform offer the following advantages

bull They ~ capable of withstanding high short circuit currents due to their short and

ngid mary conductar and hence more reliable

bull They rJve 0W reactance and therefare hove better transient performance

bull These current transfarmeuro s do nat have their majar insulation over the high

currer carrying primary Therefore the heat generated is easily dissipoted due to

which 1e insulation has superior thermal stability and longer life However these

have mitations in withstanding seismic forces and have 10 handled and

transported carefully -

~ It -

I ) Different classes of accuracy i

The two different uses of a CT are0 bull Protection

~ bull Metering

These two requires conflicting properties of saturation hence different types of cores ~ are used For protection the CT should faithfully reproduce the changes in the current

f)

bull for higher magnitudes whereas for metering the CT should saturate at higher

magnitudes in order to prevent any damage to the meters

~ Protection Classesmiddot

(110

bull

bull PS

Closs PS CTs are Ot low reactance and their performance will be spec In

terms of the following charaderiscs it

1 Turns Ratio which will be numerically the same as the roled

0 transformation ratio

3 2 Minimum Knee-Point Voltage (Vk) specified in accordance with the

j formula Vk = K I ( R + RJ - K -+ poromete~ specified by the purchaser which depends on the system foult level

and the characteristics of the refoy intended 10 be used

I -+ rated secondary current of Ihe CT

R -+ resistance of the secondary corrected 1o 7OC

~ -+ impedance of the secondary circuit as pacified by the purchaser

3 Maximum Exciting Current at the rated knee-point voltage or at any

specified fraction of the rated knee-point voltage

- J

~

1

~-- V

J -I

1)

0

~

fJ It

J

bull

)

~ 9

)

~ V

~

I

In this way a CT designated in terms of percent composIte error ond

accuracy limit factor

x ~ Composite errDI Ihe RMS value of Ihe difference oetweefl til nSlontancous

volues at Ihe prtmory current and lhe rated Iranstormohon rohO hOles the octur

secondary currenl The standord composile errors ~rcent are 5 10 and 15

P -+ Protection

Y -+ Accuracy limit factor Ihe ralio of the raled accuracy 1011 pnmary urreonllo

lhe rated primClrf current where raled occvracy Iim1 primary current IS th value of

lhe highest primory currenl up la which the transformer will comply wth the specified

limits of the compqsile error The standard accuracy hmit foclors are 5 1O 15 20

ond30

Voltage Transformer (VTs) may be either Electro-magnetic type (IVT) or capacitor

type (CVT) IVTs are commonly used where high accuracy is required like revenue

metering For other applications CIT is preferred particularly at high voltages due to

their lower cost and can be used as a coupling capacitor as well for the Power line

Carrier Communication (PlCq equipment Each CVT will be earthed through an

earth electrode

For ground fault relaying on additional core is required in the VTs which can oe

connected in open delta The VTs are connected on the feeder side of the circuit

breaker and on the bus bars for synchronization

The standard accuracy classes for ClTs will be

bull for m~csurement 02 05 10 and 30

bull for protection 3P and 6P

T ormer

Transformer is the largest piece of equipment in a substation ond it is therefore

important from the point of view of station layout For instance due to its large

dimensions and reliability it is generally not possible to accommodate two

transformers in adjacent boys One of the problems could oe the radiators being

wider than the bay width In order to reduce the risk of fire large transformers are

provided with stone metol filled sooking pits with voids of capacity adequote to contain

the total quantity of oil Besides separation walls are provided in-between the

transformers and between transformers and roads within the substation

One of the important factors governing the layout of the substation is whether the

transformer is a three-phose unit or a bank of three single-phose transformers The

space required for single-phase banks is more than that with three-phase

transformers Besides single-phose bonks are usually provided with one spare singleshy

phose transformer which is kept in the service boy and used in case of a fault or

-

~ )

)

v

~olntenOrce 01 one d the single-phose uni~ Allernatively the spore un [l~ be

o~rmoneniy installed in the switchyord ready to replace the uni wn~ I~ )u of

Vlce Tni however requires on elaborate bus arrangement and isolalor SWitching

Reactivi Compensation Equipment

Reactive compensation may be switched or non-switched type as indicated by system

studies 01 Ine network The non-switched type compensation usually comprises shunt

reactors p-rmonently connected to transmission line or to bus bars at the substation

t-lext to Ihmiddot transformer shunt reodor is the largest piece of equipment These also

can be In the form of single-phase units or threemiddotphose units Often neulral

grounding reador which is connected between the neutral bushing of the line shunt

reactor the earth is provided to facilitate singlemiddotpole auto reclosing Since these

equlprr 00 contain oil all fire-safety precautions that are token for transformers

should be followed

Switched compensotion can be through switched reodors switched capacitors ormiddot

thyristor controlled readors and thyristor switched capacitors known as Stotic VAr

Compensators (SVC) These are selected according to the system requirements and

conneded diredly to the system through their own dedicoted tronsformers The shunt

capacitor bonks ore composed of 200middot400 kVAr copocitor units mounted on rocks in

seriesparallel operated ingroups to provide the required reodive power (MVAr)

output at the system voltage Monyotime only some of trese moy be required in the

initial stage and may undergo alteration as the system develops

Dired Stroke Lightning Protection

Any substation hos to be shielded from direct lightning strokes either by provision of

overhead shield wireearth wire or spikes (masts) The methodology followed for

systems up to 145 kV is by suitable placement of earth wiresmasts to provide

coverage to the entire station equipment Generally 60deg angle of shield for zones

covered by 2 or more wiresmasts and 45deg for single wiremost is considered

adequate For installations of 245 kVand above eledromognetic methods are used

The commonly used methods for determining shielded zones are the Mousa Method

and Razevig Method

Surge ArrestorsLightning Arrestors

Besides direct strokes the substation equipment has also to be protected against

travelling waves due to surge strokes on the lines entering the substation The

equiprlent most commonly used for this purpose is the surge arrestor 01 the line entry

of the __ ostalion The most important and the costliest equipment in a sub_ 1110n is the

trans - -ner and the normal practice is to install surge arrestors as near the

transL cner as possible The fixing up of insulation level for equipment within a

middot ~bstalon requires a detailed insulation co-ordination s1udy with surge arrestor as the shy[ocal ~oint for protecting the equipment from power frequen- -er-voltoge exceeding

) the or- estor rating Besides protecting the transformers the surge arrestors also

(J protee to the equipment located Win their protection zone Additional surge

arresters con be provided depending up on the isocerounic level anticipotedC) overvohoges and the protection requirements

-J

0 ) Insulators

(i)

bull Adequate insulation should be provided in a substation for reliability of supply ond

safety of personnel However the station design should be so evolved that the_

Q quantity of insulators required is the minimum and commensurate with the expected

security of supply An importont consideration in determining the insulation in a 0

bull substotion porticularly if it is located near sea a thermol power generating station or

on industrial place is the level of pollution which can be combated using insulators of

higher creepage distance In case this does not suffice the insulators need to be hot0 line washed periodically and this aspect has to be kept in mind while deciding the

bull 0 loyout of the substation Another method which hos proved to be successful is

-~iying suitable type of greases or compounds on 1he surface of the insulators ofter

cleaning the frequency depending upon ~ degree and the type of pollution

0 FOLLUTION LEVELS AND MINIMUM NOMINAL CREEPAGE DISTANCE TO BE

ADOPTED AS PER ISIEC0

~ Pollution Min Norrinal Creepage Type of Pollution

J Level Distance (mmkV)

0

~gt

Light 16 Non-Industrial Agricultural Mountainous areas beyond 20 Km from sea

~ Medium 20 Industrial Area without polluting

smoke and chemical effl uents and

) not too dose to sea

) Heavy 25 Industrial Area with polluting smoke amp chemical efffuents close

~ to sea and exposed winds from sea

to strong

Very Heavy 31 Industrial Area subjected to conductive dust polluhon smoke very close to sea exposed to sea and very strong winds from sea desert areas etc

The highest line-to-Iine voltage of the system IS used to determine the creepage

distance

The following types of insulators are normally used

a) Bus Support Insulators

(i) Solid core type

b) Strain Insulators

(i) Disc insulators c _

(ii) long Rod Porcelain insulators

) (iii) Polymer insulators

Structures(3

~ The cost of structures also is a major consideration while deciding the layout of a

) substation For instance in the case of flexible bus-bar arrangement cost of

structures is much higher than in the case of rigid bus type Similarly the form of 0

structures also ploys on important port and the choice is usually between using a few

0 heOYy structures or more number of smaller structures

0 Hot-dip galvonized steel is the most commonly used material in Indio for substation

0 structures When galvanizing is not effective particularly in a substation located In

0 coastal or industrial areas paInting becomes essential

Q Power Line Carrier Communication (PLCC)

0

0 The carner equipment required for communication relaying and tele metering is

connected to line through high frequency coble coupling capacitor and wove trap D The wave trap is installed at the line entrance The coupling capacitors are installed

~ - ~_~I on the line side of the wave trap and are normally base mounted The wave traps for -

voltage levels up to 145 kV can be mounted on the gantry structure on which the line -

is terminated at the substation or mounted on top of the capacitor voltage -

transformer Wave traps for voltage level of 245 kV and above generally require

separate supporting insulator stock mounted on structures of appropriate height

however 245 kV wave traps can also be suspended from the line side gantry

The differ-ent types of coupling used are

bull Inter-circuit coupling

Incase of double circuit lines one phose on each circuit need be used

lor communicotion This type of coupling is called inter-circuit

coupling

bull pr~e to Phose coupling

Incose of single circuit lines coupling con between any two pi-Jses of

) tne circuit depending up on the impedance of the phases

bull Phose to Earth coupling

Any one phose only can be use~ for carrier communication where the

earth is used as the return path

o -~--__ ()

tl ~ )i

o cD

~

bull o

It)

bull o

- -

shy v u ) U U J U W ~ () r bull u bull bull 00 ( co 0 0 () 0 c ~ -) ) V 0 t4

shy

-(H-~ i A-Ie 0- L(r -V---middotmiddot~~~Jl I r __ ~~__ ~2~i~tJ

~ I r- ~~~ COUPLING 1 -out-G-I[lt7~PAClTO~ C~PACITOR

COUPLING DEVICE

CARRIER TERMINAL

I COUPliNG i ~-------- j---GI OE ~ I I METER I

READING r-- - bull ~ bull ---- ~~ bT3YSTj

I IPHrEI

-InONE ICARRIiR --- OPTICJL r i[iHtlN-IL I fiBRE PATH fiBRE

l~a CPTIC r gt~IC I Ll-~ 1i()C tI-ltiL LJ II - t - I -j ~____~~~ri~~~~1 ~= ---

bullbull j EPX I =X bull -__1L 1 -I STATIC I I N~iwORO(C L_____ I I jlANAGERIiNERGY

N 1

~[lER

iTtLE PRINTER I~ L~ N~ flINE IL_ __bull__

ivALUAliON UNIT RELAY PANELS

~H~NEj WITH PRINTERRtLAY- PANELS - bull

Substation switching schemes

ti )

~

a t)

0

0

0

~

G

~

a ~

)

-

shy

shy

dela11s the switching sCMmes

Selection of a bus bar scheme for a porticular sub station is on important step in

design The choice of the bus-switching scheme is ~overned by various factors

which aim at a simple ~elioble safe and economic sub-station Some 01 the

important fodors that dictate the choice of the bus-switching scheme are

bull System reliability and ovailat y

bull Operational flexibility

bull Limitation of short circuit level

bull Simplicity of protection arrangements

bull Ease of extension

bull Availability of land

bull Cost

The relative importance of these factors varies from case to case and depending on

the voltage level number of circuits desired level of security etc

Types of schemes

The various bus-switching schemes that are in pradice are

bull Single bus

bull Sectional Single bus

bull Main and Transfer bus

bull Double Main

bull Double Main and Transfer bus

bull One and Half breaker

bull Mesh scheme

Aport from these schemes there are a few which are less frequently used

bull Sectionolized Main and Transfer bus

bull Double Main with bypass isolator

bull Sedionalized Double Main and Transfer bus

bull Double bus and double breaker

i

bull

Criteria for seledion

lhe following criteria are usually followed when selecting a switching scheme for a

sub-station

i __

bull It should be possible to take out any circuit breaker or any other equipment for

1J0intenance without removing the corresponding circuit from service

bull The rrin bus could be isolated for maintenance without loss of any circuit

bull CB failure Bus fault should couse minimum loss of circuits

bull Economy

J

bull The acceptable level of reliability has not been defined by any standard and therefore

jt is extremely difficult to quantify it for a system In such a situation the prevailing

practices and experience gained from system operation are token into consideration J I For instance in 400 kV systems One and Half breaker scheme is preferred over other

0 schemes os a major shut down cousing loss of 2 or more feeders is just improbable

albeit being more expensive than others Furthermore for 220 kV systems the Double ~ Main T ronder scheme is preferred

middot3

0 Single bus bar scheme

This type of arrangement can be used only where interruption to service is relatively ) unimportant But this is a simplest arrangement where each circuit is provided with its

own circuit breaker

The circuit breaker enables the feeder to be removed from service while it is carryingD

bull the loads when there is fault on the feeder The disadvantage with this r-Ongement is

that if the incoming circuit breaker is to be shut down for mainteno ~1e load on

gt that feeder has also to be shut down If the bus is supplied by more t~1i one feeder

the reliability of supply to the feeders using this type of layout is considerablyJ

increased J

_r Sectionalised single bus bar scheme

If adequate number of bus sections are made the single sectionalised bus provides an

economical way of limiting circuit outage is case of fault on a bus sedion as the

section circuit breakers acts as backup to the circuit breakers of the main circuits ThE

arrangement may be considered for intermediate switching stations or smoi

generating stations where mil1imising of circuit outage is important for systern ~

Ii

reliability The sectional ising breaker may also be used at medium sized substations

bull

)

)

)

j

_r

)

)

)

I j I 0 J

0

3

0

-3

I

bull Q)

bull ~

bull 0

1)

J

)

J

~J

-

- gt

)

)

receiving supply from more thon ltme source to synchronise or segregate the supplies

as per the opemting requirements

The interlocking arrangement is simple for both the types of arrangements

Main and Transfer bus bar scheme

In this type of cnongement the main ond transfer bus bors are coupled by means of

a normally open circuit brealcer All the incoming and outgoing circuits are connected

with the main bus bars through thei controlling circuit br~kers keeping the transfer

bus idle Each circuit is also connected to the transfer bus bar through on isolator In

case the circuit breaker of any circuit is shut down for maintenance this circuit is

cannected to the transfer bus bar through its tronsfer bus isolator Under such

circumstances Jhis particular circuit will be controlled by the bus transfer circuit

breaker Since the arrangement to the transfer bus is through the isolators coreful

interlocking is necessary with bus transfer breolcer so that only one circuit transferred

at a time

Double bus bar scheme

In this arrangement each incoming and outgoing circuit has its own controllingdrcuit

breaker and btmiddot means of bus selection isolators can be conneded to either of the

buses Each bus bar is designed to take the station total load and either bus bar

y be token out for moin1enonce Each circuit may in addition be provided with a

bye-pass isol enabling it to be connected directly to one of the bus bars byeshy

passing the controlling circuit breakers of the circuit The circuit can in that case be

energised through the bus bar coupler circuit breaker as in the main and tansfer bus

scheme and the controlling circuit breaker of the circuit token out for mainterance

Use of a bye-pass isolator with double bus necessarily requires adoption of a relatively

costly switchyard arrangement It should therefore be resorted to only in case where

outage of the particular circuit will have undesirable repercussions on the system

operation In case maintenance of the circuit Ix-eakers can be arranged by taking the

relevant circuit out (eg where two or more circuits or alternative routes are available)

the normal double bus arrangement without bye-pass should be favoured as simpler

and cheaper physical layouts can then be used The two buses of a double bus bar

arrangement enn be sectionalised through circuit breokers or isolators as required

from reliability considerations

)

) Double Main and Transfer scheme

In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one

spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )

transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from

) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to

couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3

~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple

() ------~-------

One and a half breakers scheme0

a I

bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two

0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme

described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid

feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)

feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in

0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two

breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit

bull emiddot

Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it

is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often

0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be

bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it

bull Mesh scheme

~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This

) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or

) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station

ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes

) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited

gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS

preferred to mesh scheme )

)

gt

layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS

Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on

the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of

the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0

generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power

network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only

interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond

instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available

generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission

line

a Feeder Oearance

Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty

feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two

breakers to isolate a fault

Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive

loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that

particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to

F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible

In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault

becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths

b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components

The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of

equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any

equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of

failure af these is discussed below

Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable

substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the

continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon

in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a

~--

-

t2

- ~

Q I

0

0

0

0

bull 0

~ ~

J

~

l

--

bull

stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on

which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck

Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service

c Redundancy in Design

The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active

or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are

switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite

advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even

during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of

breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active

redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder

Operational Flexibility

Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different

switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one

arrangement to another

Simplicity of protedion Arrangements

More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions

more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when

automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one

breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to

be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip

circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in

Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus

bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may

complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus

differential protedion is simple

Maintenance - effects on System Security

)

From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J

out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit

breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular

concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit

breaker maintenance

Ease of Extensions

Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af

feeders

InterlocksJ

~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches

) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic

1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes

ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be

~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are

0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated

bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its

associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT

designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull

aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES

The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the

r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance

) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety

I

reasons during the maintenance of equipment -

The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system

400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage

-

LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge

kV 1425 10501 950

6501 550

5501 450

325

SWitching surge withstond voltage

kVp 1050

1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge

kV 630 460 140

Phase to ground Clearance

- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned

overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted

bull gt

0

() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to

J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0

3 Phase to Phase Clearance

()

It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD

bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the

phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system

a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection

variation in equipment geometry

bull ~ I

Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and

9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator

3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a

inm

400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063

) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063

Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)

Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10

i

J

Equipment Spacing

)

I

J

~ shy

a 0

i ~

bull 3

a

bull eshy

bull 0

bull middot3

)

3 )

) bull

)

)

)

)

-

The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering

bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment

bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment

bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches

bull Land availability

bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering

protection reach of LA

Bus Bars

The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors

Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers

The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations

Structure

All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal

conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit

amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in

design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry

structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation

hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15

a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure

sholl be hot dipped golvonised

Equipment Supports

Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type

Road Layout

Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance

Bus Post Insulator

~

~)0

~

0

i)

bull D

bull ~

-

i ~

7

I )

V

J

J

~

-

~ ~

sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor

Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical

requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design

Electrical design

The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for

use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse

withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet

power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio

interference voltage

For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in

the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the

insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance

Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)

Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be

designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to

short-circuit seismic load ond wind load

Short Circuit Force

Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force

N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108

Fs = p

Where

Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current

p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters

l = Span between two supporting points in meters

N = Correction fodor for actual field condition

K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular

buses K= 1

M = Multiplying factor

Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as

(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8

RMS Symmetrical 800

IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs

-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-

~ three phose symmetrical fault

~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the

() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value

for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )

f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally

)

The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)

I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range

of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component

i

FE =S x W

raquo bull ~

F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very

t strong

1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg

D Wind Force

~)

Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the

C J mechanical design of support insulators

--

The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS

802) isI --

p = 06 X Vl

)

f~

~ Where

) v = Vt x k x k

basic wind speed msJ

k = 0 wind force in kg is

1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII

Where 10

L _ length of the insulator

J B = breadth of the insulator

0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force

D

J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for

support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I

projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly

disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8

The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either

due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and

earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of

earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8

under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice

bull ~

i 0

)

0

Bus Hars

-

~~) J )

~

)

lJ

) Busmiddot8ft ~tr

bull

)

)

Sclce n of blls bars

BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used

for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The

bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf

bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and

conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to

large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed

that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus

The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between

supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited

to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting

tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design

of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably

locating the spacers in the conductor bundles

The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum

Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid

bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly

U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not

encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans

expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to

thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus

bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will

alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during

operation

The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the

specific application for which these are chosen

Rigid Bus Bor

Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are

available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on

the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to

consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar

Electrical

The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are

Continuous current rating and

Shof me current rating

Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due

convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be

13 times that of 1 s rating

The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the

specified time is

I x t x (2SAf A =)

0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258

Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =

t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC

T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0

Mechanical 9

The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are

Bending Stress

Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration

Bending stress

Three loads which causes the bending stress are

Wind load

Short circuit Force

Dead load

Wind load

Wind load on bus bar per meter length

WI = pxD

Where

p = wind pressure in kgm1

D = diameter of the rigid bus bar

S~)rt circuit force

10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =

Nnere

Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current

P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-

L Span between two supporting points in m -r~

J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady

~ - force N=OS

K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)

buses K= 1

( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8

(

Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0

due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically

0

The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl

8 where

g M = Belding moment in kgm

= WL8

bull ~

= resultant force in kgm

L = length of the bus bar in m

Z = section modulus m3

- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2

and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )

Vertical deflection

The vertical deflection is~

00054 X LA X W) =

Ex MI Where

L = unsupportedlengthinm

W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm

E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m

)

Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or

l200

Aeolian vibration

The natural frequency of vibration is

561 ~deflection

which should be more than 275 cycles per second

-

~ Flexible Bus Bar

shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed

)-j

1)

0

0

middotV 0

fl)

0

~ ~

D

D

~l

-

Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment

t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under

IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen

limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near

grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock

-

Grounding can be of one the following two types

Intentional( -0

This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface

0 Accidental

~

g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor

1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility

J CLumstances that lead to a shock

0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system

and its resistance to remote earth

2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential

gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface

3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is

bridging iwo points of high potential difference

4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance

current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances

5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current

through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current

intensity

The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other

kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable

conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141

(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding

calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -

recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above

Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing

j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is

advantageous for two reasons ~

I0I0- gt --

1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time

J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes

) or possible hours

2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief

0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of

primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9

a Effed of Reclosing

Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such

circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~

permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single

~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively

bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus

accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is

reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater

Potential Difference during Shock Situations

Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid

may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of

remote earth

Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0

distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect

)

TCAP

-~

I

shy

- I

f t3

a middot3

D

bull 0

bull ~

)

~ ~

rl

shy

0

)

Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and

lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time

navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure

IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence

oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot

neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed

ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both

lands

Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground

grid

Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS

transferred into or out of the substation

Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE

Std 80 - 1986

Sizing the Conductor

The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression

te a p 10

=

Where

A = T

To = T

=0 0

=a

p =

RMS current in kA

conductor cross section in mm2

maximum allowable temperature in degC

ambient allowable temperature in degC

reference temperature in degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T

resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in

~

1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf

duration of current flow in s

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 7: Alstom Training Manual

- J

~

1

~-- V

J -I

1)

0

~

fJ It

J

bull

)

~ 9

)

~ V

~

I

In this way a CT designated in terms of percent composIte error ond

accuracy limit factor

x ~ Composite errDI Ihe RMS value of Ihe difference oetweefl til nSlontancous

volues at Ihe prtmory current and lhe rated Iranstormohon rohO hOles the octur

secondary currenl The standord composile errors ~rcent are 5 10 and 15

P -+ Protection

Y -+ Accuracy limit factor Ihe ralio of the raled accuracy 1011 pnmary urreonllo

lhe rated primClrf current where raled occvracy Iim1 primary current IS th value of

lhe highest primory currenl up la which the transformer will comply wth the specified

limits of the compqsile error The standard accuracy hmit foclors are 5 1O 15 20

ond30

Voltage Transformer (VTs) may be either Electro-magnetic type (IVT) or capacitor

type (CVT) IVTs are commonly used where high accuracy is required like revenue

metering For other applications CIT is preferred particularly at high voltages due to

their lower cost and can be used as a coupling capacitor as well for the Power line

Carrier Communication (PlCq equipment Each CVT will be earthed through an

earth electrode

For ground fault relaying on additional core is required in the VTs which can oe

connected in open delta The VTs are connected on the feeder side of the circuit

breaker and on the bus bars for synchronization

The standard accuracy classes for ClTs will be

bull for m~csurement 02 05 10 and 30

bull for protection 3P and 6P

T ormer

Transformer is the largest piece of equipment in a substation ond it is therefore

important from the point of view of station layout For instance due to its large

dimensions and reliability it is generally not possible to accommodate two

transformers in adjacent boys One of the problems could oe the radiators being

wider than the bay width In order to reduce the risk of fire large transformers are

provided with stone metol filled sooking pits with voids of capacity adequote to contain

the total quantity of oil Besides separation walls are provided in-between the

transformers and between transformers and roads within the substation

One of the important factors governing the layout of the substation is whether the

transformer is a three-phose unit or a bank of three single-phose transformers The

space required for single-phase banks is more than that with three-phase

transformers Besides single-phose bonks are usually provided with one spare singleshy

phose transformer which is kept in the service boy and used in case of a fault or

-

~ )

)

v

~olntenOrce 01 one d the single-phose uni~ Allernatively the spore un [l~ be

o~rmoneniy installed in the switchyord ready to replace the uni wn~ I~ )u of

Vlce Tni however requires on elaborate bus arrangement and isolalor SWitching

Reactivi Compensation Equipment

Reactive compensation may be switched or non-switched type as indicated by system

studies 01 Ine network The non-switched type compensation usually comprises shunt

reactors p-rmonently connected to transmission line or to bus bars at the substation

t-lext to Ihmiddot transformer shunt reodor is the largest piece of equipment These also

can be In the form of single-phase units or threemiddotphose units Often neulral

grounding reador which is connected between the neutral bushing of the line shunt

reactor the earth is provided to facilitate singlemiddotpole auto reclosing Since these

equlprr 00 contain oil all fire-safety precautions that are token for transformers

should be followed

Switched compensotion can be through switched reodors switched capacitors ormiddot

thyristor controlled readors and thyristor switched capacitors known as Stotic VAr

Compensators (SVC) These are selected according to the system requirements and

conneded diredly to the system through their own dedicoted tronsformers The shunt

capacitor bonks ore composed of 200middot400 kVAr copocitor units mounted on rocks in

seriesparallel operated ingroups to provide the required reodive power (MVAr)

output at the system voltage Monyotime only some of trese moy be required in the

initial stage and may undergo alteration as the system develops

Dired Stroke Lightning Protection

Any substation hos to be shielded from direct lightning strokes either by provision of

overhead shield wireearth wire or spikes (masts) The methodology followed for

systems up to 145 kV is by suitable placement of earth wiresmasts to provide

coverage to the entire station equipment Generally 60deg angle of shield for zones

covered by 2 or more wiresmasts and 45deg for single wiremost is considered

adequate For installations of 245 kVand above eledromognetic methods are used

The commonly used methods for determining shielded zones are the Mousa Method

and Razevig Method

Surge ArrestorsLightning Arrestors

Besides direct strokes the substation equipment has also to be protected against

travelling waves due to surge strokes on the lines entering the substation The

equiprlent most commonly used for this purpose is the surge arrestor 01 the line entry

of the __ ostalion The most important and the costliest equipment in a sub_ 1110n is the

trans - -ner and the normal practice is to install surge arrestors as near the

transL cner as possible The fixing up of insulation level for equipment within a

middot ~bstalon requires a detailed insulation co-ordination s1udy with surge arrestor as the shy[ocal ~oint for protecting the equipment from power frequen- -er-voltoge exceeding

) the or- estor rating Besides protecting the transformers the surge arrestors also

(J protee to the equipment located Win their protection zone Additional surge

arresters con be provided depending up on the isocerounic level anticipotedC) overvohoges and the protection requirements

-J

0 ) Insulators

(i)

bull Adequate insulation should be provided in a substation for reliability of supply ond

safety of personnel However the station design should be so evolved that the_

Q quantity of insulators required is the minimum and commensurate with the expected

security of supply An importont consideration in determining the insulation in a 0

bull substotion porticularly if it is located near sea a thermol power generating station or

on industrial place is the level of pollution which can be combated using insulators of

higher creepage distance In case this does not suffice the insulators need to be hot0 line washed periodically and this aspect has to be kept in mind while deciding the

bull 0 loyout of the substation Another method which hos proved to be successful is

-~iying suitable type of greases or compounds on 1he surface of the insulators ofter

cleaning the frequency depending upon ~ degree and the type of pollution

0 FOLLUTION LEVELS AND MINIMUM NOMINAL CREEPAGE DISTANCE TO BE

ADOPTED AS PER ISIEC0

~ Pollution Min Norrinal Creepage Type of Pollution

J Level Distance (mmkV)

0

~gt

Light 16 Non-Industrial Agricultural Mountainous areas beyond 20 Km from sea

~ Medium 20 Industrial Area without polluting

smoke and chemical effl uents and

) not too dose to sea

) Heavy 25 Industrial Area with polluting smoke amp chemical efffuents close

~ to sea and exposed winds from sea

to strong

Very Heavy 31 Industrial Area subjected to conductive dust polluhon smoke very close to sea exposed to sea and very strong winds from sea desert areas etc

The highest line-to-Iine voltage of the system IS used to determine the creepage

distance

The following types of insulators are normally used

a) Bus Support Insulators

(i) Solid core type

b) Strain Insulators

(i) Disc insulators c _

(ii) long Rod Porcelain insulators

) (iii) Polymer insulators

Structures(3

~ The cost of structures also is a major consideration while deciding the layout of a

) substation For instance in the case of flexible bus-bar arrangement cost of

structures is much higher than in the case of rigid bus type Similarly the form of 0

structures also ploys on important port and the choice is usually between using a few

0 heOYy structures or more number of smaller structures

0 Hot-dip galvonized steel is the most commonly used material in Indio for substation

0 structures When galvanizing is not effective particularly in a substation located In

0 coastal or industrial areas paInting becomes essential

Q Power Line Carrier Communication (PLCC)

0

0 The carner equipment required for communication relaying and tele metering is

connected to line through high frequency coble coupling capacitor and wove trap D The wave trap is installed at the line entrance The coupling capacitors are installed

~ - ~_~I on the line side of the wave trap and are normally base mounted The wave traps for -

voltage levels up to 145 kV can be mounted on the gantry structure on which the line -

is terminated at the substation or mounted on top of the capacitor voltage -

transformer Wave traps for voltage level of 245 kV and above generally require

separate supporting insulator stock mounted on structures of appropriate height

however 245 kV wave traps can also be suspended from the line side gantry

The differ-ent types of coupling used are

bull Inter-circuit coupling

Incase of double circuit lines one phose on each circuit need be used

lor communicotion This type of coupling is called inter-circuit

coupling

bull pr~e to Phose coupling

Incose of single circuit lines coupling con between any two pi-Jses of

) tne circuit depending up on the impedance of the phases

bull Phose to Earth coupling

Any one phose only can be use~ for carrier communication where the

earth is used as the return path

o -~--__ ()

tl ~ )i

o cD

~

bull o

It)

bull o

- -

shy v u ) U U J U W ~ () r bull u bull bull 00 ( co 0 0 () 0 c ~ -) ) V 0 t4

shy

-(H-~ i A-Ie 0- L(r -V---middotmiddot~~~Jl I r __ ~~__ ~2~i~tJ

~ I r- ~~~ COUPLING 1 -out-G-I[lt7~PAClTO~ C~PACITOR

COUPLING DEVICE

CARRIER TERMINAL

I COUPliNG i ~-------- j---GI OE ~ I I METER I

READING r-- - bull ~ bull ---- ~~ bT3YSTj

I IPHrEI

-InONE ICARRIiR --- OPTICJL r i[iHtlN-IL I fiBRE PATH fiBRE

l~a CPTIC r gt~IC I Ll-~ 1i()C tI-ltiL LJ II - t - I -j ~____~~~ri~~~~1 ~= ---

bullbull j EPX I =X bull -__1L 1 -I STATIC I I N~iwORO(C L_____ I I jlANAGERIiNERGY

N 1

~[lER

iTtLE PRINTER I~ L~ N~ flINE IL_ __bull__

ivALUAliON UNIT RELAY PANELS

~H~NEj WITH PRINTERRtLAY- PANELS - bull

Substation switching schemes

ti )

~

a t)

0

0

0

~

G

~

a ~

)

-

shy

shy

dela11s the switching sCMmes

Selection of a bus bar scheme for a porticular sub station is on important step in

design The choice of the bus-switching scheme is ~overned by various factors

which aim at a simple ~elioble safe and economic sub-station Some 01 the

important fodors that dictate the choice of the bus-switching scheme are

bull System reliability and ovailat y

bull Operational flexibility

bull Limitation of short circuit level

bull Simplicity of protection arrangements

bull Ease of extension

bull Availability of land

bull Cost

The relative importance of these factors varies from case to case and depending on

the voltage level number of circuits desired level of security etc

Types of schemes

The various bus-switching schemes that are in pradice are

bull Single bus

bull Sectional Single bus

bull Main and Transfer bus

bull Double Main

bull Double Main and Transfer bus

bull One and Half breaker

bull Mesh scheme

Aport from these schemes there are a few which are less frequently used

bull Sectionolized Main and Transfer bus

bull Double Main with bypass isolator

bull Sedionalized Double Main and Transfer bus

bull Double bus and double breaker

i

bull

Criteria for seledion

lhe following criteria are usually followed when selecting a switching scheme for a

sub-station

i __

bull It should be possible to take out any circuit breaker or any other equipment for

1J0intenance without removing the corresponding circuit from service

bull The rrin bus could be isolated for maintenance without loss of any circuit

bull CB failure Bus fault should couse minimum loss of circuits

bull Economy

J

bull The acceptable level of reliability has not been defined by any standard and therefore

jt is extremely difficult to quantify it for a system In such a situation the prevailing

practices and experience gained from system operation are token into consideration J I For instance in 400 kV systems One and Half breaker scheme is preferred over other

0 schemes os a major shut down cousing loss of 2 or more feeders is just improbable

albeit being more expensive than others Furthermore for 220 kV systems the Double ~ Main T ronder scheme is preferred

middot3

0 Single bus bar scheme

This type of arrangement can be used only where interruption to service is relatively ) unimportant But this is a simplest arrangement where each circuit is provided with its

own circuit breaker

The circuit breaker enables the feeder to be removed from service while it is carryingD

bull the loads when there is fault on the feeder The disadvantage with this r-Ongement is

that if the incoming circuit breaker is to be shut down for mainteno ~1e load on

gt that feeder has also to be shut down If the bus is supplied by more t~1i one feeder

the reliability of supply to the feeders using this type of layout is considerablyJ

increased J

_r Sectionalised single bus bar scheme

If adequate number of bus sections are made the single sectionalised bus provides an

economical way of limiting circuit outage is case of fault on a bus sedion as the

section circuit breakers acts as backup to the circuit breakers of the main circuits ThE

arrangement may be considered for intermediate switching stations or smoi

generating stations where mil1imising of circuit outage is important for systern ~

Ii

reliability The sectional ising breaker may also be used at medium sized substations

bull

)

)

)

j

_r

)

)

)

I j I 0 J

0

3

0

-3

I

bull Q)

bull ~

bull 0

1)

J

)

J

~J

-

- gt

)

)

receiving supply from more thon ltme source to synchronise or segregate the supplies

as per the opemting requirements

The interlocking arrangement is simple for both the types of arrangements

Main and Transfer bus bar scheme

In this type of cnongement the main ond transfer bus bors are coupled by means of

a normally open circuit brealcer All the incoming and outgoing circuits are connected

with the main bus bars through thei controlling circuit br~kers keeping the transfer

bus idle Each circuit is also connected to the transfer bus bar through on isolator In

case the circuit breaker of any circuit is shut down for maintenance this circuit is

cannected to the transfer bus bar through its tronsfer bus isolator Under such

circumstances Jhis particular circuit will be controlled by the bus transfer circuit

breaker Since the arrangement to the transfer bus is through the isolators coreful

interlocking is necessary with bus transfer breolcer so that only one circuit transferred

at a time

Double bus bar scheme

In this arrangement each incoming and outgoing circuit has its own controllingdrcuit

breaker and btmiddot means of bus selection isolators can be conneded to either of the

buses Each bus bar is designed to take the station total load and either bus bar

y be token out for moin1enonce Each circuit may in addition be provided with a

bye-pass isol enabling it to be connected directly to one of the bus bars byeshy

passing the controlling circuit breakers of the circuit The circuit can in that case be

energised through the bus bar coupler circuit breaker as in the main and tansfer bus

scheme and the controlling circuit breaker of the circuit token out for mainterance

Use of a bye-pass isolator with double bus necessarily requires adoption of a relatively

costly switchyard arrangement It should therefore be resorted to only in case where

outage of the particular circuit will have undesirable repercussions on the system

operation In case maintenance of the circuit Ix-eakers can be arranged by taking the

relevant circuit out (eg where two or more circuits or alternative routes are available)

the normal double bus arrangement without bye-pass should be favoured as simpler

and cheaper physical layouts can then be used The two buses of a double bus bar

arrangement enn be sectionalised through circuit breokers or isolators as required

from reliability considerations

)

) Double Main and Transfer scheme

In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one

spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )

transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from

) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to

couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3

~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple

() ------~-------

One and a half breakers scheme0

a I

bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two

0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme

described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid

feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)

feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in

0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two

breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit

bull emiddot

Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it

is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often

0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be

bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it

bull Mesh scheme

~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This

) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or

) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station

ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes

) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited

gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS

preferred to mesh scheme )

)

gt

layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS

Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on

the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of

the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0

generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power

network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only

interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond

instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available

generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission

line

a Feeder Oearance

Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty

feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two

breakers to isolate a fault

Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive

loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that

particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to

F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible

In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault

becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths

b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components

The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of

equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any

equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of

failure af these is discussed below

Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable

substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the

continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon

in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a

~--

-

t2

- ~

Q I

0

0

0

0

bull 0

~ ~

J

~

l

--

bull

stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on

which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck

Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service

c Redundancy in Design

The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active

or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are

switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite

advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even

during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of

breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active

redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder

Operational Flexibility

Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different

switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one

arrangement to another

Simplicity of protedion Arrangements

More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions

more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when

automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one

breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to

be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip

circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in

Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus

bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may

complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus

differential protedion is simple

Maintenance - effects on System Security

)

From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J

out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit

breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular

concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit

breaker maintenance

Ease of Extensions

Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af

feeders

InterlocksJ

~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches

) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic

1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes

ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be

~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are

0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated

bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its

associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT

designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull

aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES

The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the

r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance

) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety

I

reasons during the maintenance of equipment -

The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system

400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage

-

LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge

kV 1425 10501 950

6501 550

5501 450

325

SWitching surge withstond voltage

kVp 1050

1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge

kV 630 460 140

Phase to ground Clearance

- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned

overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted

bull gt

0

() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to

J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0

3 Phase to Phase Clearance

()

It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD

bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the

phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system

a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection

variation in equipment geometry

bull ~ I

Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and

9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator

3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a

inm

400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063

) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063

Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)

Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10

i

J

Equipment Spacing

)

I

J

~ shy

a 0

i ~

bull 3

a

bull eshy

bull 0

bull middot3

)

3 )

) bull

)

)

)

)

-

The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering

bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment

bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment

bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches

bull Land availability

bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering

protection reach of LA

Bus Bars

The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors

Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers

The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations

Structure

All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal

conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit

amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in

design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry

structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation

hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15

a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure

sholl be hot dipped golvonised

Equipment Supports

Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type

Road Layout

Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance

Bus Post Insulator

~

~)0

~

0

i)

bull D

bull ~

-

i ~

7

I )

V

J

J

~

-

~ ~

sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor

Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical

requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design

Electrical design

The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for

use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse

withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet

power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio

interference voltage

For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in

the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the

insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance

Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)

Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be

designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to

short-circuit seismic load ond wind load

Short Circuit Force

Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force

N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108

Fs = p

Where

Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current

p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters

l = Span between two supporting points in meters

N = Correction fodor for actual field condition

K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular

buses K= 1

M = Multiplying factor

Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as

(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8

RMS Symmetrical 800

IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs

-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-

~ three phose symmetrical fault

~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the

() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value

for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )

f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally

)

The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)

I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range

of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component

i

FE =S x W

raquo bull ~

F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very

t strong

1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg

D Wind Force

~)

Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the

C J mechanical design of support insulators

--

The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS

802) isI --

p = 06 X Vl

)

f~

~ Where

) v = Vt x k x k

basic wind speed msJ

k = 0 wind force in kg is

1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII

Where 10

L _ length of the insulator

J B = breadth of the insulator

0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force

D

J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for

support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I

projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly

disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8

The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either

due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and

earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of

earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8

under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice

bull ~

i 0

)

0

Bus Hars

-

~~) J )

~

)

lJ

) Busmiddot8ft ~tr

bull

)

)

Sclce n of blls bars

BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used

for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The

bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf

bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and

conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to

large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed

that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus

The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between

supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited

to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting

tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design

of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably

locating the spacers in the conductor bundles

The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum

Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid

bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly

U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not

encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans

expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to

thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus

bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will

alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during

operation

The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the

specific application for which these are chosen

Rigid Bus Bor

Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are

available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on

the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to

consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar

Electrical

The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are

Continuous current rating and

Shof me current rating

Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due

convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be

13 times that of 1 s rating

The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the

specified time is

I x t x (2SAf A =)

0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258

Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =

t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC

T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0

Mechanical 9

The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are

Bending Stress

Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration

Bending stress

Three loads which causes the bending stress are

Wind load

Short circuit Force

Dead load

Wind load

Wind load on bus bar per meter length

WI = pxD

Where

p = wind pressure in kgm1

D = diameter of the rigid bus bar

S~)rt circuit force

10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =

Nnere

Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current

P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-

L Span between two supporting points in m -r~

J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady

~ - force N=OS

K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)

buses K= 1

( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8

(

Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0

due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically

0

The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl

8 where

g M = Belding moment in kgm

= WL8

bull ~

= resultant force in kgm

L = length of the bus bar in m

Z = section modulus m3

- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2

and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )

Vertical deflection

The vertical deflection is~

00054 X LA X W) =

Ex MI Where

L = unsupportedlengthinm

W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm

E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m

)

Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or

l200

Aeolian vibration

The natural frequency of vibration is

561 ~deflection

which should be more than 275 cycles per second

-

~ Flexible Bus Bar

shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed

)-j

1)

0

0

middotV 0

fl)

0

~ ~

D

D

~l

-

Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment

t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under

IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen

limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near

grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock

-

Grounding can be of one the following two types

Intentional( -0

This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface

0 Accidental

~

g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor

1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility

J CLumstances that lead to a shock

0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system

and its resistance to remote earth

2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential

gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface

3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is

bridging iwo points of high potential difference

4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance

current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances

5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current

through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current

intensity

The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other

kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable

conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141

(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding

calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -

recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above

Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing

j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is

advantageous for two reasons ~

I0I0- gt --

1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time

J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes

) or possible hours

2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief

0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of

primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9

a Effed of Reclosing

Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such

circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~

permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single

~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively

bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus

accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is

reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater

Potential Difference during Shock Situations

Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid

may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of

remote earth

Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0

distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect

)

TCAP

-~

I

shy

- I

f t3

a middot3

D

bull 0

bull ~

)

~ ~

rl

shy

0

)

Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and

lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time

navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure

IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence

oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot

neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed

ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both

lands

Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground

grid

Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS

transferred into or out of the substation

Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE

Std 80 - 1986

Sizing the Conductor

The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression

te a p 10

=

Where

A = T

To = T

=0 0

=a

p =

RMS current in kA

conductor cross section in mm2

maximum allowable temperature in degC

ambient allowable temperature in degC

reference temperature in degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T

resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in

~

1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf

duration of current flow in s

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 8: Alstom Training Manual

-

~ )

)

v

~olntenOrce 01 one d the single-phose uni~ Allernatively the spore un [l~ be

o~rmoneniy installed in the switchyord ready to replace the uni wn~ I~ )u of

Vlce Tni however requires on elaborate bus arrangement and isolalor SWitching

Reactivi Compensation Equipment

Reactive compensation may be switched or non-switched type as indicated by system

studies 01 Ine network The non-switched type compensation usually comprises shunt

reactors p-rmonently connected to transmission line or to bus bars at the substation

t-lext to Ihmiddot transformer shunt reodor is the largest piece of equipment These also

can be In the form of single-phase units or threemiddotphose units Often neulral

grounding reador which is connected between the neutral bushing of the line shunt

reactor the earth is provided to facilitate singlemiddotpole auto reclosing Since these

equlprr 00 contain oil all fire-safety precautions that are token for transformers

should be followed

Switched compensotion can be through switched reodors switched capacitors ormiddot

thyristor controlled readors and thyristor switched capacitors known as Stotic VAr

Compensators (SVC) These are selected according to the system requirements and

conneded diredly to the system through their own dedicoted tronsformers The shunt

capacitor bonks ore composed of 200middot400 kVAr copocitor units mounted on rocks in

seriesparallel operated ingroups to provide the required reodive power (MVAr)

output at the system voltage Monyotime only some of trese moy be required in the

initial stage and may undergo alteration as the system develops

Dired Stroke Lightning Protection

Any substation hos to be shielded from direct lightning strokes either by provision of

overhead shield wireearth wire or spikes (masts) The methodology followed for

systems up to 145 kV is by suitable placement of earth wiresmasts to provide

coverage to the entire station equipment Generally 60deg angle of shield for zones

covered by 2 or more wiresmasts and 45deg for single wiremost is considered

adequate For installations of 245 kVand above eledromognetic methods are used

The commonly used methods for determining shielded zones are the Mousa Method

and Razevig Method

Surge ArrestorsLightning Arrestors

Besides direct strokes the substation equipment has also to be protected against

travelling waves due to surge strokes on the lines entering the substation The

equiprlent most commonly used for this purpose is the surge arrestor 01 the line entry

of the __ ostalion The most important and the costliest equipment in a sub_ 1110n is the

trans - -ner and the normal practice is to install surge arrestors as near the

transL cner as possible The fixing up of insulation level for equipment within a

middot ~bstalon requires a detailed insulation co-ordination s1udy with surge arrestor as the shy[ocal ~oint for protecting the equipment from power frequen- -er-voltoge exceeding

) the or- estor rating Besides protecting the transformers the surge arrestors also

(J protee to the equipment located Win their protection zone Additional surge

arresters con be provided depending up on the isocerounic level anticipotedC) overvohoges and the protection requirements

-J

0 ) Insulators

(i)

bull Adequate insulation should be provided in a substation for reliability of supply ond

safety of personnel However the station design should be so evolved that the_

Q quantity of insulators required is the minimum and commensurate with the expected

security of supply An importont consideration in determining the insulation in a 0

bull substotion porticularly if it is located near sea a thermol power generating station or

on industrial place is the level of pollution which can be combated using insulators of

higher creepage distance In case this does not suffice the insulators need to be hot0 line washed periodically and this aspect has to be kept in mind while deciding the

bull 0 loyout of the substation Another method which hos proved to be successful is

-~iying suitable type of greases or compounds on 1he surface of the insulators ofter

cleaning the frequency depending upon ~ degree and the type of pollution

0 FOLLUTION LEVELS AND MINIMUM NOMINAL CREEPAGE DISTANCE TO BE

ADOPTED AS PER ISIEC0

~ Pollution Min Norrinal Creepage Type of Pollution

J Level Distance (mmkV)

0

~gt

Light 16 Non-Industrial Agricultural Mountainous areas beyond 20 Km from sea

~ Medium 20 Industrial Area without polluting

smoke and chemical effl uents and

) not too dose to sea

) Heavy 25 Industrial Area with polluting smoke amp chemical efffuents close

~ to sea and exposed winds from sea

to strong

Very Heavy 31 Industrial Area subjected to conductive dust polluhon smoke very close to sea exposed to sea and very strong winds from sea desert areas etc

The highest line-to-Iine voltage of the system IS used to determine the creepage

distance

The following types of insulators are normally used

a) Bus Support Insulators

(i) Solid core type

b) Strain Insulators

(i) Disc insulators c _

(ii) long Rod Porcelain insulators

) (iii) Polymer insulators

Structures(3

~ The cost of structures also is a major consideration while deciding the layout of a

) substation For instance in the case of flexible bus-bar arrangement cost of

structures is much higher than in the case of rigid bus type Similarly the form of 0

structures also ploys on important port and the choice is usually between using a few

0 heOYy structures or more number of smaller structures

0 Hot-dip galvonized steel is the most commonly used material in Indio for substation

0 structures When galvanizing is not effective particularly in a substation located In

0 coastal or industrial areas paInting becomes essential

Q Power Line Carrier Communication (PLCC)

0

0 The carner equipment required for communication relaying and tele metering is

connected to line through high frequency coble coupling capacitor and wove trap D The wave trap is installed at the line entrance The coupling capacitors are installed

~ - ~_~I on the line side of the wave trap and are normally base mounted The wave traps for -

voltage levels up to 145 kV can be mounted on the gantry structure on which the line -

is terminated at the substation or mounted on top of the capacitor voltage -

transformer Wave traps for voltage level of 245 kV and above generally require

separate supporting insulator stock mounted on structures of appropriate height

however 245 kV wave traps can also be suspended from the line side gantry

The differ-ent types of coupling used are

bull Inter-circuit coupling

Incase of double circuit lines one phose on each circuit need be used

lor communicotion This type of coupling is called inter-circuit

coupling

bull pr~e to Phose coupling

Incose of single circuit lines coupling con between any two pi-Jses of

) tne circuit depending up on the impedance of the phases

bull Phose to Earth coupling

Any one phose only can be use~ for carrier communication where the

earth is used as the return path

o -~--__ ()

tl ~ )i

o cD

~

bull o

It)

bull o

- -

shy v u ) U U J U W ~ () r bull u bull bull 00 ( co 0 0 () 0 c ~ -) ) V 0 t4

shy

-(H-~ i A-Ie 0- L(r -V---middotmiddot~~~Jl I r __ ~~__ ~2~i~tJ

~ I r- ~~~ COUPLING 1 -out-G-I[lt7~PAClTO~ C~PACITOR

COUPLING DEVICE

CARRIER TERMINAL

I COUPliNG i ~-------- j---GI OE ~ I I METER I

READING r-- - bull ~ bull ---- ~~ bT3YSTj

I IPHrEI

-InONE ICARRIiR --- OPTICJL r i[iHtlN-IL I fiBRE PATH fiBRE

l~a CPTIC r gt~IC I Ll-~ 1i()C tI-ltiL LJ II - t - I -j ~____~~~ri~~~~1 ~= ---

bullbull j EPX I =X bull -__1L 1 -I STATIC I I N~iwORO(C L_____ I I jlANAGERIiNERGY

N 1

~[lER

iTtLE PRINTER I~ L~ N~ flINE IL_ __bull__

ivALUAliON UNIT RELAY PANELS

~H~NEj WITH PRINTERRtLAY- PANELS - bull

Substation switching schemes

ti )

~

a t)

0

0

0

~

G

~

a ~

)

-

shy

shy

dela11s the switching sCMmes

Selection of a bus bar scheme for a porticular sub station is on important step in

design The choice of the bus-switching scheme is ~overned by various factors

which aim at a simple ~elioble safe and economic sub-station Some 01 the

important fodors that dictate the choice of the bus-switching scheme are

bull System reliability and ovailat y

bull Operational flexibility

bull Limitation of short circuit level

bull Simplicity of protection arrangements

bull Ease of extension

bull Availability of land

bull Cost

The relative importance of these factors varies from case to case and depending on

the voltage level number of circuits desired level of security etc

Types of schemes

The various bus-switching schemes that are in pradice are

bull Single bus

bull Sectional Single bus

bull Main and Transfer bus

bull Double Main

bull Double Main and Transfer bus

bull One and Half breaker

bull Mesh scheme

Aport from these schemes there are a few which are less frequently used

bull Sectionolized Main and Transfer bus

bull Double Main with bypass isolator

bull Sedionalized Double Main and Transfer bus

bull Double bus and double breaker

i

bull

Criteria for seledion

lhe following criteria are usually followed when selecting a switching scheme for a

sub-station

i __

bull It should be possible to take out any circuit breaker or any other equipment for

1J0intenance without removing the corresponding circuit from service

bull The rrin bus could be isolated for maintenance without loss of any circuit

bull CB failure Bus fault should couse minimum loss of circuits

bull Economy

J

bull The acceptable level of reliability has not been defined by any standard and therefore

jt is extremely difficult to quantify it for a system In such a situation the prevailing

practices and experience gained from system operation are token into consideration J I For instance in 400 kV systems One and Half breaker scheme is preferred over other

0 schemes os a major shut down cousing loss of 2 or more feeders is just improbable

albeit being more expensive than others Furthermore for 220 kV systems the Double ~ Main T ronder scheme is preferred

middot3

0 Single bus bar scheme

This type of arrangement can be used only where interruption to service is relatively ) unimportant But this is a simplest arrangement where each circuit is provided with its

own circuit breaker

The circuit breaker enables the feeder to be removed from service while it is carryingD

bull the loads when there is fault on the feeder The disadvantage with this r-Ongement is

that if the incoming circuit breaker is to be shut down for mainteno ~1e load on

gt that feeder has also to be shut down If the bus is supplied by more t~1i one feeder

the reliability of supply to the feeders using this type of layout is considerablyJ

increased J

_r Sectionalised single bus bar scheme

If adequate number of bus sections are made the single sectionalised bus provides an

economical way of limiting circuit outage is case of fault on a bus sedion as the

section circuit breakers acts as backup to the circuit breakers of the main circuits ThE

arrangement may be considered for intermediate switching stations or smoi

generating stations where mil1imising of circuit outage is important for systern ~

Ii

reliability The sectional ising breaker may also be used at medium sized substations

bull

)

)

)

j

_r

)

)

)

I j I 0 J

0

3

0

-3

I

bull Q)

bull ~

bull 0

1)

J

)

J

~J

-

- gt

)

)

receiving supply from more thon ltme source to synchronise or segregate the supplies

as per the opemting requirements

The interlocking arrangement is simple for both the types of arrangements

Main and Transfer bus bar scheme

In this type of cnongement the main ond transfer bus bors are coupled by means of

a normally open circuit brealcer All the incoming and outgoing circuits are connected

with the main bus bars through thei controlling circuit br~kers keeping the transfer

bus idle Each circuit is also connected to the transfer bus bar through on isolator In

case the circuit breaker of any circuit is shut down for maintenance this circuit is

cannected to the transfer bus bar through its tronsfer bus isolator Under such

circumstances Jhis particular circuit will be controlled by the bus transfer circuit

breaker Since the arrangement to the transfer bus is through the isolators coreful

interlocking is necessary with bus transfer breolcer so that only one circuit transferred

at a time

Double bus bar scheme

In this arrangement each incoming and outgoing circuit has its own controllingdrcuit

breaker and btmiddot means of bus selection isolators can be conneded to either of the

buses Each bus bar is designed to take the station total load and either bus bar

y be token out for moin1enonce Each circuit may in addition be provided with a

bye-pass isol enabling it to be connected directly to one of the bus bars byeshy

passing the controlling circuit breakers of the circuit The circuit can in that case be

energised through the bus bar coupler circuit breaker as in the main and tansfer bus

scheme and the controlling circuit breaker of the circuit token out for mainterance

Use of a bye-pass isolator with double bus necessarily requires adoption of a relatively

costly switchyard arrangement It should therefore be resorted to only in case where

outage of the particular circuit will have undesirable repercussions on the system

operation In case maintenance of the circuit Ix-eakers can be arranged by taking the

relevant circuit out (eg where two or more circuits or alternative routes are available)

the normal double bus arrangement without bye-pass should be favoured as simpler

and cheaper physical layouts can then be used The two buses of a double bus bar

arrangement enn be sectionalised through circuit breokers or isolators as required

from reliability considerations

)

) Double Main and Transfer scheme

In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one

spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )

transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from

) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to

couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3

~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple

() ------~-------

One and a half breakers scheme0

a I

bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two

0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme

described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid

feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)

feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in

0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two

breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit

bull emiddot

Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it

is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often

0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be

bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it

bull Mesh scheme

~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This

) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or

) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station

ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes

) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited

gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS

preferred to mesh scheme )

)

gt

layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS

Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on

the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of

the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0

generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power

network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only

interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond

instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available

generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission

line

a Feeder Oearance

Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty

feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two

breakers to isolate a fault

Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive

loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that

particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to

F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible

In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault

becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths

b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components

The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of

equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any

equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of

failure af these is discussed below

Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable

substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the

continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon

in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a

~--

-

t2

- ~

Q I

0

0

0

0

bull 0

~ ~

J

~

l

--

bull

stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on

which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck

Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service

c Redundancy in Design

The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active

or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are

switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite

advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even

during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of

breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active

redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder

Operational Flexibility

Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different

switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one

arrangement to another

Simplicity of protedion Arrangements

More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions

more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when

automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one

breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to

be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip

circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in

Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus

bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may

complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus

differential protedion is simple

Maintenance - effects on System Security

)

From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J

out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit

breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular

concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit

breaker maintenance

Ease of Extensions

Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af

feeders

InterlocksJ

~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches

) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic

1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes

ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be

~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are

0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated

bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its

associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT

designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull

aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES

The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the

r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance

) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety

I

reasons during the maintenance of equipment -

The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system

400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage

-

LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge

kV 1425 10501 950

6501 550

5501 450

325

SWitching surge withstond voltage

kVp 1050

1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge

kV 630 460 140

Phase to ground Clearance

- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned

overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted

bull gt

0

() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to

J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0

3 Phase to Phase Clearance

()

It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD

bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the

phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system

a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection

variation in equipment geometry

bull ~ I

Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and

9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator

3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a

inm

400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063

) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063

Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)

Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10

i

J

Equipment Spacing

)

I

J

~ shy

a 0

i ~

bull 3

a

bull eshy

bull 0

bull middot3

)

3 )

) bull

)

)

)

)

-

The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering

bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment

bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment

bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches

bull Land availability

bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering

protection reach of LA

Bus Bars

The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors

Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers

The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations

Structure

All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal

conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit

amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in

design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry

structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation

hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15

a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure

sholl be hot dipped golvonised

Equipment Supports

Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type

Road Layout

Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance

Bus Post Insulator

~

~)0

~

0

i)

bull D

bull ~

-

i ~

7

I )

V

J

J

~

-

~ ~

sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor

Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical

requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design

Electrical design

The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for

use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse

withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet

power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio

interference voltage

For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in

the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the

insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance

Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)

Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be

designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to

short-circuit seismic load ond wind load

Short Circuit Force

Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force

N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108

Fs = p

Where

Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current

p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters

l = Span between two supporting points in meters

N = Correction fodor for actual field condition

K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular

buses K= 1

M = Multiplying factor

Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as

(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8

RMS Symmetrical 800

IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs

-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-

~ three phose symmetrical fault

~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the

() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value

for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )

f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally

)

The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)

I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range

of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component

i

FE =S x W

raquo bull ~

F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very

t strong

1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg

D Wind Force

~)

Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the

C J mechanical design of support insulators

--

The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS

802) isI --

p = 06 X Vl

)

f~

~ Where

) v = Vt x k x k

basic wind speed msJ

k = 0 wind force in kg is

1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII

Where 10

L _ length of the insulator

J B = breadth of the insulator

0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force

D

J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for

support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I

projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly

disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8

The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either

due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and

earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of

earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8

under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice

bull ~

i 0

)

0

Bus Hars

-

~~) J )

~

)

lJ

) Busmiddot8ft ~tr

bull

)

)

Sclce n of blls bars

BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used

for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The

bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf

bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and

conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to

large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed

that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus

The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between

supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited

to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting

tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design

of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably

locating the spacers in the conductor bundles

The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum

Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid

bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly

U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not

encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans

expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to

thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus

bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will

alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during

operation

The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the

specific application for which these are chosen

Rigid Bus Bor

Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are

available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on

the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to

consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar

Electrical

The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are

Continuous current rating and

Shof me current rating

Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due

convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be

13 times that of 1 s rating

The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the

specified time is

I x t x (2SAf A =)

0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258

Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =

t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC

T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0

Mechanical 9

The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are

Bending Stress

Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration

Bending stress

Three loads which causes the bending stress are

Wind load

Short circuit Force

Dead load

Wind load

Wind load on bus bar per meter length

WI = pxD

Where

p = wind pressure in kgm1

D = diameter of the rigid bus bar

S~)rt circuit force

10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =

Nnere

Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current

P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-

L Span between two supporting points in m -r~

J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady

~ - force N=OS

K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)

buses K= 1

( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8

(

Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0

due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically

0

The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl

8 where

g M = Belding moment in kgm

= WL8

bull ~

= resultant force in kgm

L = length of the bus bar in m

Z = section modulus m3

- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2

and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )

Vertical deflection

The vertical deflection is~

00054 X LA X W) =

Ex MI Where

L = unsupportedlengthinm

W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm

E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m

)

Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or

l200

Aeolian vibration

The natural frequency of vibration is

561 ~deflection

which should be more than 275 cycles per second

-

~ Flexible Bus Bar

shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed

)-j

1)

0

0

middotV 0

fl)

0

~ ~

D

D

~l

-

Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment

t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under

IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen

limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near

grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock

-

Grounding can be of one the following two types

Intentional( -0

This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface

0 Accidental

~

g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor

1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility

J CLumstances that lead to a shock

0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system

and its resistance to remote earth

2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential

gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface

3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is

bridging iwo points of high potential difference

4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance

current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances

5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current

through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current

intensity

The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other

kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable

conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141

(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding

calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -

recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above

Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing

j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is

advantageous for two reasons ~

I0I0- gt --

1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time

J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes

) or possible hours

2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief

0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of

primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9

a Effed of Reclosing

Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such

circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~

permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single

~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively

bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus

accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is

reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater

Potential Difference during Shock Situations

Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid

may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of

remote earth

Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0

distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect

)

TCAP

-~

I

shy

- I

f t3

a middot3

D

bull 0

bull ~

)

~ ~

rl

shy

0

)

Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and

lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time

navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure

IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence

oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot

neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed

ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both

lands

Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground

grid

Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS

transferred into or out of the substation

Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE

Std 80 - 1986

Sizing the Conductor

The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression

te a p 10

=

Where

A = T

To = T

=0 0

=a

p =

RMS current in kA

conductor cross section in mm2

maximum allowable temperature in degC

ambient allowable temperature in degC

reference temperature in degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T

resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in

~

1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf

duration of current flow in s

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 9: Alstom Training Manual

Besides direct strokes the substation equipment has also to be protected against

travelling waves due to surge strokes on the lines entering the substation The

equiprlent most commonly used for this purpose is the surge arrestor 01 the line entry

of the __ ostalion The most important and the costliest equipment in a sub_ 1110n is the

trans - -ner and the normal practice is to install surge arrestors as near the

transL cner as possible The fixing up of insulation level for equipment within a

middot ~bstalon requires a detailed insulation co-ordination s1udy with surge arrestor as the shy[ocal ~oint for protecting the equipment from power frequen- -er-voltoge exceeding

) the or- estor rating Besides protecting the transformers the surge arrestors also

(J protee to the equipment located Win their protection zone Additional surge

arresters con be provided depending up on the isocerounic level anticipotedC) overvohoges and the protection requirements

-J

0 ) Insulators

(i)

bull Adequate insulation should be provided in a substation for reliability of supply ond

safety of personnel However the station design should be so evolved that the_

Q quantity of insulators required is the minimum and commensurate with the expected

security of supply An importont consideration in determining the insulation in a 0

bull substotion porticularly if it is located near sea a thermol power generating station or

on industrial place is the level of pollution which can be combated using insulators of

higher creepage distance In case this does not suffice the insulators need to be hot0 line washed periodically and this aspect has to be kept in mind while deciding the

bull 0 loyout of the substation Another method which hos proved to be successful is

-~iying suitable type of greases or compounds on 1he surface of the insulators ofter

cleaning the frequency depending upon ~ degree and the type of pollution

0 FOLLUTION LEVELS AND MINIMUM NOMINAL CREEPAGE DISTANCE TO BE

ADOPTED AS PER ISIEC0

~ Pollution Min Norrinal Creepage Type of Pollution

J Level Distance (mmkV)

0

~gt

Light 16 Non-Industrial Agricultural Mountainous areas beyond 20 Km from sea

~ Medium 20 Industrial Area without polluting

smoke and chemical effl uents and

) not too dose to sea

) Heavy 25 Industrial Area with polluting smoke amp chemical efffuents close

~ to sea and exposed winds from sea

to strong

Very Heavy 31 Industrial Area subjected to conductive dust polluhon smoke very close to sea exposed to sea and very strong winds from sea desert areas etc

The highest line-to-Iine voltage of the system IS used to determine the creepage

distance

The following types of insulators are normally used

a) Bus Support Insulators

(i) Solid core type

b) Strain Insulators

(i) Disc insulators c _

(ii) long Rod Porcelain insulators

) (iii) Polymer insulators

Structures(3

~ The cost of structures also is a major consideration while deciding the layout of a

) substation For instance in the case of flexible bus-bar arrangement cost of

structures is much higher than in the case of rigid bus type Similarly the form of 0

structures also ploys on important port and the choice is usually between using a few

0 heOYy structures or more number of smaller structures

0 Hot-dip galvonized steel is the most commonly used material in Indio for substation

0 structures When galvanizing is not effective particularly in a substation located In

0 coastal or industrial areas paInting becomes essential

Q Power Line Carrier Communication (PLCC)

0

0 The carner equipment required for communication relaying and tele metering is

connected to line through high frequency coble coupling capacitor and wove trap D The wave trap is installed at the line entrance The coupling capacitors are installed

~ - ~_~I on the line side of the wave trap and are normally base mounted The wave traps for -

voltage levels up to 145 kV can be mounted on the gantry structure on which the line -

is terminated at the substation or mounted on top of the capacitor voltage -

transformer Wave traps for voltage level of 245 kV and above generally require

separate supporting insulator stock mounted on structures of appropriate height

however 245 kV wave traps can also be suspended from the line side gantry

The differ-ent types of coupling used are

bull Inter-circuit coupling

Incase of double circuit lines one phose on each circuit need be used

lor communicotion This type of coupling is called inter-circuit

coupling

bull pr~e to Phose coupling

Incose of single circuit lines coupling con between any two pi-Jses of

) tne circuit depending up on the impedance of the phases

bull Phose to Earth coupling

Any one phose only can be use~ for carrier communication where the

earth is used as the return path

o -~--__ ()

tl ~ )i

o cD

~

bull o

It)

bull o

- -

shy v u ) U U J U W ~ () r bull u bull bull 00 ( co 0 0 () 0 c ~ -) ) V 0 t4

shy

-(H-~ i A-Ie 0- L(r -V---middotmiddot~~~Jl I r __ ~~__ ~2~i~tJ

~ I r- ~~~ COUPLING 1 -out-G-I[lt7~PAClTO~ C~PACITOR

COUPLING DEVICE

CARRIER TERMINAL

I COUPliNG i ~-------- j---GI OE ~ I I METER I

READING r-- - bull ~ bull ---- ~~ bT3YSTj

I IPHrEI

-InONE ICARRIiR --- OPTICJL r i[iHtlN-IL I fiBRE PATH fiBRE

l~a CPTIC r gt~IC I Ll-~ 1i()C tI-ltiL LJ II - t - I -j ~____~~~ri~~~~1 ~= ---

bullbull j EPX I =X bull -__1L 1 -I STATIC I I N~iwORO(C L_____ I I jlANAGERIiNERGY

N 1

~[lER

iTtLE PRINTER I~ L~ N~ flINE IL_ __bull__

ivALUAliON UNIT RELAY PANELS

~H~NEj WITH PRINTERRtLAY- PANELS - bull

Substation switching schemes

ti )

~

a t)

0

0

0

~

G

~

a ~

)

-

shy

shy

dela11s the switching sCMmes

Selection of a bus bar scheme for a porticular sub station is on important step in

design The choice of the bus-switching scheme is ~overned by various factors

which aim at a simple ~elioble safe and economic sub-station Some 01 the

important fodors that dictate the choice of the bus-switching scheme are

bull System reliability and ovailat y

bull Operational flexibility

bull Limitation of short circuit level

bull Simplicity of protection arrangements

bull Ease of extension

bull Availability of land

bull Cost

The relative importance of these factors varies from case to case and depending on

the voltage level number of circuits desired level of security etc

Types of schemes

The various bus-switching schemes that are in pradice are

bull Single bus

bull Sectional Single bus

bull Main and Transfer bus

bull Double Main

bull Double Main and Transfer bus

bull One and Half breaker

bull Mesh scheme

Aport from these schemes there are a few which are less frequently used

bull Sectionolized Main and Transfer bus

bull Double Main with bypass isolator

bull Sedionalized Double Main and Transfer bus

bull Double bus and double breaker

i

bull

Criteria for seledion

lhe following criteria are usually followed when selecting a switching scheme for a

sub-station

i __

bull It should be possible to take out any circuit breaker or any other equipment for

1J0intenance without removing the corresponding circuit from service

bull The rrin bus could be isolated for maintenance without loss of any circuit

bull CB failure Bus fault should couse minimum loss of circuits

bull Economy

J

bull The acceptable level of reliability has not been defined by any standard and therefore

jt is extremely difficult to quantify it for a system In such a situation the prevailing

practices and experience gained from system operation are token into consideration J I For instance in 400 kV systems One and Half breaker scheme is preferred over other

0 schemes os a major shut down cousing loss of 2 or more feeders is just improbable

albeit being more expensive than others Furthermore for 220 kV systems the Double ~ Main T ronder scheme is preferred

middot3

0 Single bus bar scheme

This type of arrangement can be used only where interruption to service is relatively ) unimportant But this is a simplest arrangement where each circuit is provided with its

own circuit breaker

The circuit breaker enables the feeder to be removed from service while it is carryingD

bull the loads when there is fault on the feeder The disadvantage with this r-Ongement is

that if the incoming circuit breaker is to be shut down for mainteno ~1e load on

gt that feeder has also to be shut down If the bus is supplied by more t~1i one feeder

the reliability of supply to the feeders using this type of layout is considerablyJ

increased J

_r Sectionalised single bus bar scheme

If adequate number of bus sections are made the single sectionalised bus provides an

economical way of limiting circuit outage is case of fault on a bus sedion as the

section circuit breakers acts as backup to the circuit breakers of the main circuits ThE

arrangement may be considered for intermediate switching stations or smoi

generating stations where mil1imising of circuit outage is important for systern ~

Ii

reliability The sectional ising breaker may also be used at medium sized substations

bull

)

)

)

j

_r

)

)

)

I j I 0 J

0

3

0

-3

I

bull Q)

bull ~

bull 0

1)

J

)

J

~J

-

- gt

)

)

receiving supply from more thon ltme source to synchronise or segregate the supplies

as per the opemting requirements

The interlocking arrangement is simple for both the types of arrangements

Main and Transfer bus bar scheme

In this type of cnongement the main ond transfer bus bors are coupled by means of

a normally open circuit brealcer All the incoming and outgoing circuits are connected

with the main bus bars through thei controlling circuit br~kers keeping the transfer

bus idle Each circuit is also connected to the transfer bus bar through on isolator In

case the circuit breaker of any circuit is shut down for maintenance this circuit is

cannected to the transfer bus bar through its tronsfer bus isolator Under such

circumstances Jhis particular circuit will be controlled by the bus transfer circuit

breaker Since the arrangement to the transfer bus is through the isolators coreful

interlocking is necessary with bus transfer breolcer so that only one circuit transferred

at a time

Double bus bar scheme

In this arrangement each incoming and outgoing circuit has its own controllingdrcuit

breaker and btmiddot means of bus selection isolators can be conneded to either of the

buses Each bus bar is designed to take the station total load and either bus bar

y be token out for moin1enonce Each circuit may in addition be provided with a

bye-pass isol enabling it to be connected directly to one of the bus bars byeshy

passing the controlling circuit breakers of the circuit The circuit can in that case be

energised through the bus bar coupler circuit breaker as in the main and tansfer bus

scheme and the controlling circuit breaker of the circuit token out for mainterance

Use of a bye-pass isolator with double bus necessarily requires adoption of a relatively

costly switchyard arrangement It should therefore be resorted to only in case where

outage of the particular circuit will have undesirable repercussions on the system

operation In case maintenance of the circuit Ix-eakers can be arranged by taking the

relevant circuit out (eg where two or more circuits or alternative routes are available)

the normal double bus arrangement without bye-pass should be favoured as simpler

and cheaper physical layouts can then be used The two buses of a double bus bar

arrangement enn be sectionalised through circuit breokers or isolators as required

from reliability considerations

)

) Double Main and Transfer scheme

In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one

spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )

transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from

) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to

couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3

~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple

() ------~-------

One and a half breakers scheme0

a I

bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two

0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme

described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid

feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)

feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in

0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two

breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit

bull emiddot

Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it

is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often

0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be

bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it

bull Mesh scheme

~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This

) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or

) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station

ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes

) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited

gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS

preferred to mesh scheme )

)

gt

layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS

Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on

the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of

the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0

generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power

network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only

interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond

instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available

generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission

line

a Feeder Oearance

Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty

feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two

breakers to isolate a fault

Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive

loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that

particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to

F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible

In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault

becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths

b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components

The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of

equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any

equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of

failure af these is discussed below

Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable

substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the

continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon

in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a

~--

-

t2

- ~

Q I

0

0

0

0

bull 0

~ ~

J

~

l

--

bull

stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on

which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck

Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service

c Redundancy in Design

The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active

or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are

switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite

advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even

during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of

breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active

redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder

Operational Flexibility

Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different

switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one

arrangement to another

Simplicity of protedion Arrangements

More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions

more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when

automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one

breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to

be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip

circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in

Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus

bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may

complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus

differential protedion is simple

Maintenance - effects on System Security

)

From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J

out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit

breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular

concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit

breaker maintenance

Ease of Extensions

Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af

feeders

InterlocksJ

~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches

) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic

1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes

ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be

~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are

0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated

bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its

associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT

designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull

aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES

The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the

r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance

) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety

I

reasons during the maintenance of equipment -

The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system

400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage

-

LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge

kV 1425 10501 950

6501 550

5501 450

325

SWitching surge withstond voltage

kVp 1050

1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge

kV 630 460 140

Phase to ground Clearance

- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned

overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted

bull gt

0

() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to

J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0

3 Phase to Phase Clearance

()

It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD

bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the

phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system

a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection

variation in equipment geometry

bull ~ I

Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and

9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator

3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a

inm

400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063

) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063

Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)

Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10

i

J

Equipment Spacing

)

I

J

~ shy

a 0

i ~

bull 3

a

bull eshy

bull 0

bull middot3

)

3 )

) bull

)

)

)

)

-

The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering

bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment

bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment

bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches

bull Land availability

bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering

protection reach of LA

Bus Bars

The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors

Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers

The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations

Structure

All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal

conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit

amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in

design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry

structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation

hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15

a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure

sholl be hot dipped golvonised

Equipment Supports

Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type

Road Layout

Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance

Bus Post Insulator

~

~)0

~

0

i)

bull D

bull ~

-

i ~

7

I )

V

J

J

~

-

~ ~

sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor

Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical

requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design

Electrical design

The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for

use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse

withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet

power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio

interference voltage

For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in

the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the

insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance

Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)

Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be

designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to

short-circuit seismic load ond wind load

Short Circuit Force

Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force

N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108

Fs = p

Where

Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current

p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters

l = Span between two supporting points in meters

N = Correction fodor for actual field condition

K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular

buses K= 1

M = Multiplying factor

Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as

(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8

RMS Symmetrical 800

IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs

-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-

~ three phose symmetrical fault

~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the

() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value

for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )

f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally

)

The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)

I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range

of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component

i

FE =S x W

raquo bull ~

F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very

t strong

1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg

D Wind Force

~)

Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the

C J mechanical design of support insulators

--

The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS

802) isI --

p = 06 X Vl

)

f~

~ Where

) v = Vt x k x k

basic wind speed msJ

k = 0 wind force in kg is

1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII

Where 10

L _ length of the insulator

J B = breadth of the insulator

0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force

D

J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for

support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I

projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly

disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8

The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either

due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and

earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of

earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8

under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice

bull ~

i 0

)

0

Bus Hars

-

~~) J )

~

)

lJ

) Busmiddot8ft ~tr

bull

)

)

Sclce n of blls bars

BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used

for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The

bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf

bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and

conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to

large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed

that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus

The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between

supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited

to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting

tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design

of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably

locating the spacers in the conductor bundles

The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum

Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid

bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly

U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not

encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans

expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to

thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus

bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will

alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during

operation

The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the

specific application for which these are chosen

Rigid Bus Bor

Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are

available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on

the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to

consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar

Electrical

The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are

Continuous current rating and

Shof me current rating

Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due

convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be

13 times that of 1 s rating

The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the

specified time is

I x t x (2SAf A =)

0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258

Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =

t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC

T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0

Mechanical 9

The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are

Bending Stress

Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration

Bending stress

Three loads which causes the bending stress are

Wind load

Short circuit Force

Dead load

Wind load

Wind load on bus bar per meter length

WI = pxD

Where

p = wind pressure in kgm1

D = diameter of the rigid bus bar

S~)rt circuit force

10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =

Nnere

Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current

P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-

L Span between two supporting points in m -r~

J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady

~ - force N=OS

K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)

buses K= 1

( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8

(

Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0

due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically

0

The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl

8 where

g M = Belding moment in kgm

= WL8

bull ~

= resultant force in kgm

L = length of the bus bar in m

Z = section modulus m3

- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2

and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )

Vertical deflection

The vertical deflection is~

00054 X LA X W) =

Ex MI Where

L = unsupportedlengthinm

W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm

E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m

)

Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or

l200

Aeolian vibration

The natural frequency of vibration is

561 ~deflection

which should be more than 275 cycles per second

-

~ Flexible Bus Bar

shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed

)-j

1)

0

0

middotV 0

fl)

0

~ ~

D

D

~l

-

Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment

t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under

IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen

limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near

grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock

-

Grounding can be of one the following two types

Intentional( -0

This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface

0 Accidental

~

g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor

1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility

J CLumstances that lead to a shock

0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system

and its resistance to remote earth

2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential

gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface

3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is

bridging iwo points of high potential difference

4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance

current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances

5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current

through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current

intensity

The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other

kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable

conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141

(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding

calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -

recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above

Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing

j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is

advantageous for two reasons ~

I0I0- gt --

1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time

J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes

) or possible hours

2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief

0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of

primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9

a Effed of Reclosing

Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such

circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~

permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single

~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively

bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus

accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is

reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater

Potential Difference during Shock Situations

Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid

may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of

remote earth

Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0

distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect

)

TCAP

-~

I

shy

- I

f t3

a middot3

D

bull 0

bull ~

)

~ ~

rl

shy

0

)

Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and

lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time

navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure

IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence

oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot

neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed

ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both

lands

Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground

grid

Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS

transferred into or out of the substation

Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE

Std 80 - 1986

Sizing the Conductor

The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression

te a p 10

=

Where

A = T

To = T

=0 0

=a

p =

RMS current in kA

conductor cross section in mm2

maximum allowable temperature in degC

ambient allowable temperature in degC

reference temperature in degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T

resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in

~

1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf

duration of current flow in s

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 10: Alstom Training Manual

Very Heavy 31 Industrial Area subjected to conductive dust polluhon smoke very close to sea exposed to sea and very strong winds from sea desert areas etc

The highest line-to-Iine voltage of the system IS used to determine the creepage

distance

The following types of insulators are normally used

a) Bus Support Insulators

(i) Solid core type

b) Strain Insulators

(i) Disc insulators c _

(ii) long Rod Porcelain insulators

) (iii) Polymer insulators

Structures(3

~ The cost of structures also is a major consideration while deciding the layout of a

) substation For instance in the case of flexible bus-bar arrangement cost of

structures is much higher than in the case of rigid bus type Similarly the form of 0

structures also ploys on important port and the choice is usually between using a few

0 heOYy structures or more number of smaller structures

0 Hot-dip galvonized steel is the most commonly used material in Indio for substation

0 structures When galvanizing is not effective particularly in a substation located In

0 coastal or industrial areas paInting becomes essential

Q Power Line Carrier Communication (PLCC)

0

0 The carner equipment required for communication relaying and tele metering is

connected to line through high frequency coble coupling capacitor and wove trap D The wave trap is installed at the line entrance The coupling capacitors are installed

~ - ~_~I on the line side of the wave trap and are normally base mounted The wave traps for -

voltage levels up to 145 kV can be mounted on the gantry structure on which the line -

is terminated at the substation or mounted on top of the capacitor voltage -

transformer Wave traps for voltage level of 245 kV and above generally require

separate supporting insulator stock mounted on structures of appropriate height

however 245 kV wave traps can also be suspended from the line side gantry

The differ-ent types of coupling used are

bull Inter-circuit coupling

Incase of double circuit lines one phose on each circuit need be used

lor communicotion This type of coupling is called inter-circuit

coupling

bull pr~e to Phose coupling

Incose of single circuit lines coupling con between any two pi-Jses of

) tne circuit depending up on the impedance of the phases

bull Phose to Earth coupling

Any one phose only can be use~ for carrier communication where the

earth is used as the return path

o -~--__ ()

tl ~ )i

o cD

~

bull o

It)

bull o

- -

shy v u ) U U J U W ~ () r bull u bull bull 00 ( co 0 0 () 0 c ~ -) ) V 0 t4

shy

-(H-~ i A-Ie 0- L(r -V---middotmiddot~~~Jl I r __ ~~__ ~2~i~tJ

~ I r- ~~~ COUPLING 1 -out-G-I[lt7~PAClTO~ C~PACITOR

COUPLING DEVICE

CARRIER TERMINAL

I COUPliNG i ~-------- j---GI OE ~ I I METER I

READING r-- - bull ~ bull ---- ~~ bT3YSTj

I IPHrEI

-InONE ICARRIiR --- OPTICJL r i[iHtlN-IL I fiBRE PATH fiBRE

l~a CPTIC r gt~IC I Ll-~ 1i()C tI-ltiL LJ II - t - I -j ~____~~~ri~~~~1 ~= ---

bullbull j EPX I =X bull -__1L 1 -I STATIC I I N~iwORO(C L_____ I I jlANAGERIiNERGY

N 1

~[lER

iTtLE PRINTER I~ L~ N~ flINE IL_ __bull__

ivALUAliON UNIT RELAY PANELS

~H~NEj WITH PRINTERRtLAY- PANELS - bull

Substation switching schemes

ti )

~

a t)

0

0

0

~

G

~

a ~

)

-

shy

shy

dela11s the switching sCMmes

Selection of a bus bar scheme for a porticular sub station is on important step in

design The choice of the bus-switching scheme is ~overned by various factors

which aim at a simple ~elioble safe and economic sub-station Some 01 the

important fodors that dictate the choice of the bus-switching scheme are

bull System reliability and ovailat y

bull Operational flexibility

bull Limitation of short circuit level

bull Simplicity of protection arrangements

bull Ease of extension

bull Availability of land

bull Cost

The relative importance of these factors varies from case to case and depending on

the voltage level number of circuits desired level of security etc

Types of schemes

The various bus-switching schemes that are in pradice are

bull Single bus

bull Sectional Single bus

bull Main and Transfer bus

bull Double Main

bull Double Main and Transfer bus

bull One and Half breaker

bull Mesh scheme

Aport from these schemes there are a few which are less frequently used

bull Sectionolized Main and Transfer bus

bull Double Main with bypass isolator

bull Sedionalized Double Main and Transfer bus

bull Double bus and double breaker

i

bull

Criteria for seledion

lhe following criteria are usually followed when selecting a switching scheme for a

sub-station

i __

bull It should be possible to take out any circuit breaker or any other equipment for

1J0intenance without removing the corresponding circuit from service

bull The rrin bus could be isolated for maintenance without loss of any circuit

bull CB failure Bus fault should couse minimum loss of circuits

bull Economy

J

bull The acceptable level of reliability has not been defined by any standard and therefore

jt is extremely difficult to quantify it for a system In such a situation the prevailing

practices and experience gained from system operation are token into consideration J I For instance in 400 kV systems One and Half breaker scheme is preferred over other

0 schemes os a major shut down cousing loss of 2 or more feeders is just improbable

albeit being more expensive than others Furthermore for 220 kV systems the Double ~ Main T ronder scheme is preferred

middot3

0 Single bus bar scheme

This type of arrangement can be used only where interruption to service is relatively ) unimportant But this is a simplest arrangement where each circuit is provided with its

own circuit breaker

The circuit breaker enables the feeder to be removed from service while it is carryingD

bull the loads when there is fault on the feeder The disadvantage with this r-Ongement is

that if the incoming circuit breaker is to be shut down for mainteno ~1e load on

gt that feeder has also to be shut down If the bus is supplied by more t~1i one feeder

the reliability of supply to the feeders using this type of layout is considerablyJ

increased J

_r Sectionalised single bus bar scheme

If adequate number of bus sections are made the single sectionalised bus provides an

economical way of limiting circuit outage is case of fault on a bus sedion as the

section circuit breakers acts as backup to the circuit breakers of the main circuits ThE

arrangement may be considered for intermediate switching stations or smoi

generating stations where mil1imising of circuit outage is important for systern ~

Ii

reliability The sectional ising breaker may also be used at medium sized substations

bull

)

)

)

j

_r

)

)

)

I j I 0 J

0

3

0

-3

I

bull Q)

bull ~

bull 0

1)

J

)

J

~J

-

- gt

)

)

receiving supply from more thon ltme source to synchronise or segregate the supplies

as per the opemting requirements

The interlocking arrangement is simple for both the types of arrangements

Main and Transfer bus bar scheme

In this type of cnongement the main ond transfer bus bors are coupled by means of

a normally open circuit brealcer All the incoming and outgoing circuits are connected

with the main bus bars through thei controlling circuit br~kers keeping the transfer

bus idle Each circuit is also connected to the transfer bus bar through on isolator In

case the circuit breaker of any circuit is shut down for maintenance this circuit is

cannected to the transfer bus bar through its tronsfer bus isolator Under such

circumstances Jhis particular circuit will be controlled by the bus transfer circuit

breaker Since the arrangement to the transfer bus is through the isolators coreful

interlocking is necessary with bus transfer breolcer so that only one circuit transferred

at a time

Double bus bar scheme

In this arrangement each incoming and outgoing circuit has its own controllingdrcuit

breaker and btmiddot means of bus selection isolators can be conneded to either of the

buses Each bus bar is designed to take the station total load and either bus bar

y be token out for moin1enonce Each circuit may in addition be provided with a

bye-pass isol enabling it to be connected directly to one of the bus bars byeshy

passing the controlling circuit breakers of the circuit The circuit can in that case be

energised through the bus bar coupler circuit breaker as in the main and tansfer bus

scheme and the controlling circuit breaker of the circuit token out for mainterance

Use of a bye-pass isolator with double bus necessarily requires adoption of a relatively

costly switchyard arrangement It should therefore be resorted to only in case where

outage of the particular circuit will have undesirable repercussions on the system

operation In case maintenance of the circuit Ix-eakers can be arranged by taking the

relevant circuit out (eg where two or more circuits or alternative routes are available)

the normal double bus arrangement without bye-pass should be favoured as simpler

and cheaper physical layouts can then be used The two buses of a double bus bar

arrangement enn be sectionalised through circuit breokers or isolators as required

from reliability considerations

)

) Double Main and Transfer scheme

In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one

spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )

transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from

) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to

couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3

~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple

() ------~-------

One and a half breakers scheme0

a I

bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two

0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme

described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid

feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)

feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in

0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two

breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit

bull emiddot

Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it

is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often

0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be

bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it

bull Mesh scheme

~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This

) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or

) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station

ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes

) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited

gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS

preferred to mesh scheme )

)

gt

layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS

Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on

the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of

the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0

generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power

network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only

interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond

instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available

generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission

line

a Feeder Oearance

Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty

feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two

breakers to isolate a fault

Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive

loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that

particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to

F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible

In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault

becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths

b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components

The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of

equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any

equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of

failure af these is discussed below

Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable

substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the

continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon

in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a

~--

-

t2

- ~

Q I

0

0

0

0

bull 0

~ ~

J

~

l

--

bull

stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on

which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck

Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service

c Redundancy in Design

The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active

or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are

switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite

advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even

during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of

breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active

redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder

Operational Flexibility

Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different

switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one

arrangement to another

Simplicity of protedion Arrangements

More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions

more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when

automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one

breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to

be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip

circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in

Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus

bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may

complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus

differential protedion is simple

Maintenance - effects on System Security

)

From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J

out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit

breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular

concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit

breaker maintenance

Ease of Extensions

Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af

feeders

InterlocksJ

~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches

) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic

1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes

ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be

~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are

0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated

bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its

associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT

designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull

aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES

The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the

r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance

) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety

I

reasons during the maintenance of equipment -

The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system

400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage

-

LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge

kV 1425 10501 950

6501 550

5501 450

325

SWitching surge withstond voltage

kVp 1050

1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge

kV 630 460 140

Phase to ground Clearance

- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned

overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted

bull gt

0

() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to

J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0

3 Phase to Phase Clearance

()

It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD

bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the

phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system

a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection

variation in equipment geometry

bull ~ I

Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and

9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator

3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a

inm

400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063

) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063

Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)

Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10

i

J

Equipment Spacing

)

I

J

~ shy

a 0

i ~

bull 3

a

bull eshy

bull 0

bull middot3

)

3 )

) bull

)

)

)

)

-

The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering

bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment

bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment

bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches

bull Land availability

bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering

protection reach of LA

Bus Bars

The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors

Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers

The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations

Structure

All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal

conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit

amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in

design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry

structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation

hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15

a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure

sholl be hot dipped golvonised

Equipment Supports

Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type

Road Layout

Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance

Bus Post Insulator

~

~)0

~

0

i)

bull D

bull ~

-

i ~

7

I )

V

J

J

~

-

~ ~

sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor

Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical

requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design

Electrical design

The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for

use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse

withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet

power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio

interference voltage

For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in

the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the

insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance

Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)

Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be

designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to

short-circuit seismic load ond wind load

Short Circuit Force

Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force

N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108

Fs = p

Where

Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current

p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters

l = Span between two supporting points in meters

N = Correction fodor for actual field condition

K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular

buses K= 1

M = Multiplying factor

Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as

(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8

RMS Symmetrical 800

IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs

-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-

~ three phose symmetrical fault

~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the

() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value

for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )

f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally

)

The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)

I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range

of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component

i

FE =S x W

raquo bull ~

F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very

t strong

1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg

D Wind Force

~)

Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the

C J mechanical design of support insulators

--

The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS

802) isI --

p = 06 X Vl

)

f~

~ Where

) v = Vt x k x k

basic wind speed msJ

k = 0 wind force in kg is

1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII

Where 10

L _ length of the insulator

J B = breadth of the insulator

0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force

D

J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for

support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I

projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly

disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8

The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either

due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and

earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of

earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8

under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice

bull ~

i 0

)

0

Bus Hars

-

~~) J )

~

)

lJ

) Busmiddot8ft ~tr

bull

)

)

Sclce n of blls bars

BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used

for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The

bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf

bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and

conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to

large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed

that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus

The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between

supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited

to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting

tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design

of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably

locating the spacers in the conductor bundles

The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum

Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid

bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly

U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not

encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans

expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to

thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus

bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will

alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during

operation

The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the

specific application for which these are chosen

Rigid Bus Bor

Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are

available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on

the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to

consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar

Electrical

The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are

Continuous current rating and

Shof me current rating

Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due

convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be

13 times that of 1 s rating

The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the

specified time is

I x t x (2SAf A =)

0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258

Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =

t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC

T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0

Mechanical 9

The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are

Bending Stress

Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration

Bending stress

Three loads which causes the bending stress are

Wind load

Short circuit Force

Dead load

Wind load

Wind load on bus bar per meter length

WI = pxD

Where

p = wind pressure in kgm1

D = diameter of the rigid bus bar

S~)rt circuit force

10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =

Nnere

Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current

P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-

L Span between two supporting points in m -r~

J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady

~ - force N=OS

K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)

buses K= 1

( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8

(

Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0

due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically

0

The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl

8 where

g M = Belding moment in kgm

= WL8

bull ~

= resultant force in kgm

L = length of the bus bar in m

Z = section modulus m3

- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2

and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )

Vertical deflection

The vertical deflection is~

00054 X LA X W) =

Ex MI Where

L = unsupportedlengthinm

W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm

E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m

)

Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or

l200

Aeolian vibration

The natural frequency of vibration is

561 ~deflection

which should be more than 275 cycles per second

-

~ Flexible Bus Bar

shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed

)-j

1)

0

0

middotV 0

fl)

0

~ ~

D

D

~l

-

Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment

t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under

IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen

limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near

grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock

-

Grounding can be of one the following two types

Intentional( -0

This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface

0 Accidental

~

g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor

1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility

J CLumstances that lead to a shock

0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system

and its resistance to remote earth

2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential

gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface

3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is

bridging iwo points of high potential difference

4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance

current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances

5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current

through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current

intensity

The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other

kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable

conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141

(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding

calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -

recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above

Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing

j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is

advantageous for two reasons ~

I0I0- gt --

1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time

J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes

) or possible hours

2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief

0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of

primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9

a Effed of Reclosing

Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such

circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~

permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single

~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively

bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus

accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is

reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater

Potential Difference during Shock Situations

Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid

may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of

remote earth

Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0

distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect

)

TCAP

-~

I

shy

- I

f t3

a middot3

D

bull 0

bull ~

)

~ ~

rl

shy

0

)

Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and

lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time

navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure

IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence

oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot

neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed

ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both

lands

Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground

grid

Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS

transferred into or out of the substation

Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE

Std 80 - 1986

Sizing the Conductor

The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression

te a p 10

=

Where

A = T

To = T

=0 0

=a

p =

RMS current in kA

conductor cross section in mm2

maximum allowable temperature in degC

ambient allowable temperature in degC

reference temperature in degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T

resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in

~

1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf

duration of current flow in s

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 11: Alstom Training Manual

Incase of double circuit lines one phose on each circuit need be used

lor communicotion This type of coupling is called inter-circuit

coupling

bull pr~e to Phose coupling

Incose of single circuit lines coupling con between any two pi-Jses of

) tne circuit depending up on the impedance of the phases

bull Phose to Earth coupling

Any one phose only can be use~ for carrier communication where the

earth is used as the return path

o -~--__ ()

tl ~ )i

o cD

~

bull o

It)

bull o

- -

shy v u ) U U J U W ~ () r bull u bull bull 00 ( co 0 0 () 0 c ~ -) ) V 0 t4

shy

-(H-~ i A-Ie 0- L(r -V---middotmiddot~~~Jl I r __ ~~__ ~2~i~tJ

~ I r- ~~~ COUPLING 1 -out-G-I[lt7~PAClTO~ C~PACITOR

COUPLING DEVICE

CARRIER TERMINAL

I COUPliNG i ~-------- j---GI OE ~ I I METER I

READING r-- - bull ~ bull ---- ~~ bT3YSTj

I IPHrEI

-InONE ICARRIiR --- OPTICJL r i[iHtlN-IL I fiBRE PATH fiBRE

l~a CPTIC r gt~IC I Ll-~ 1i()C tI-ltiL LJ II - t - I -j ~____~~~ri~~~~1 ~= ---

bullbull j EPX I =X bull -__1L 1 -I STATIC I I N~iwORO(C L_____ I I jlANAGERIiNERGY

N 1

~[lER

iTtLE PRINTER I~ L~ N~ flINE IL_ __bull__

ivALUAliON UNIT RELAY PANELS

~H~NEj WITH PRINTERRtLAY- PANELS - bull

Substation switching schemes

ti )

~

a t)

0

0

0

~

G

~

a ~

)

-

shy

shy

dela11s the switching sCMmes

Selection of a bus bar scheme for a porticular sub station is on important step in

design The choice of the bus-switching scheme is ~overned by various factors

which aim at a simple ~elioble safe and economic sub-station Some 01 the

important fodors that dictate the choice of the bus-switching scheme are

bull System reliability and ovailat y

bull Operational flexibility

bull Limitation of short circuit level

bull Simplicity of protection arrangements

bull Ease of extension

bull Availability of land

bull Cost

The relative importance of these factors varies from case to case and depending on

the voltage level number of circuits desired level of security etc

Types of schemes

The various bus-switching schemes that are in pradice are

bull Single bus

bull Sectional Single bus

bull Main and Transfer bus

bull Double Main

bull Double Main and Transfer bus

bull One and Half breaker

bull Mesh scheme

Aport from these schemes there are a few which are less frequently used

bull Sectionolized Main and Transfer bus

bull Double Main with bypass isolator

bull Sedionalized Double Main and Transfer bus

bull Double bus and double breaker

i

bull

Criteria for seledion

lhe following criteria are usually followed when selecting a switching scheme for a

sub-station

i __

bull It should be possible to take out any circuit breaker or any other equipment for

1J0intenance without removing the corresponding circuit from service

bull The rrin bus could be isolated for maintenance without loss of any circuit

bull CB failure Bus fault should couse minimum loss of circuits

bull Economy

J

bull The acceptable level of reliability has not been defined by any standard and therefore

jt is extremely difficult to quantify it for a system In such a situation the prevailing

practices and experience gained from system operation are token into consideration J I For instance in 400 kV systems One and Half breaker scheme is preferred over other

0 schemes os a major shut down cousing loss of 2 or more feeders is just improbable

albeit being more expensive than others Furthermore for 220 kV systems the Double ~ Main T ronder scheme is preferred

middot3

0 Single bus bar scheme

This type of arrangement can be used only where interruption to service is relatively ) unimportant But this is a simplest arrangement where each circuit is provided with its

own circuit breaker

The circuit breaker enables the feeder to be removed from service while it is carryingD

bull the loads when there is fault on the feeder The disadvantage with this r-Ongement is

that if the incoming circuit breaker is to be shut down for mainteno ~1e load on

gt that feeder has also to be shut down If the bus is supplied by more t~1i one feeder

the reliability of supply to the feeders using this type of layout is considerablyJ

increased J

_r Sectionalised single bus bar scheme

If adequate number of bus sections are made the single sectionalised bus provides an

economical way of limiting circuit outage is case of fault on a bus sedion as the

section circuit breakers acts as backup to the circuit breakers of the main circuits ThE

arrangement may be considered for intermediate switching stations or smoi

generating stations where mil1imising of circuit outage is important for systern ~

Ii

reliability The sectional ising breaker may also be used at medium sized substations

bull

)

)

)

j

_r

)

)

)

I j I 0 J

0

3

0

-3

I

bull Q)

bull ~

bull 0

1)

J

)

J

~J

-

- gt

)

)

receiving supply from more thon ltme source to synchronise or segregate the supplies

as per the opemting requirements

The interlocking arrangement is simple for both the types of arrangements

Main and Transfer bus bar scheme

In this type of cnongement the main ond transfer bus bors are coupled by means of

a normally open circuit brealcer All the incoming and outgoing circuits are connected

with the main bus bars through thei controlling circuit br~kers keeping the transfer

bus idle Each circuit is also connected to the transfer bus bar through on isolator In

case the circuit breaker of any circuit is shut down for maintenance this circuit is

cannected to the transfer bus bar through its tronsfer bus isolator Under such

circumstances Jhis particular circuit will be controlled by the bus transfer circuit

breaker Since the arrangement to the transfer bus is through the isolators coreful

interlocking is necessary with bus transfer breolcer so that only one circuit transferred

at a time

Double bus bar scheme

In this arrangement each incoming and outgoing circuit has its own controllingdrcuit

breaker and btmiddot means of bus selection isolators can be conneded to either of the

buses Each bus bar is designed to take the station total load and either bus bar

y be token out for moin1enonce Each circuit may in addition be provided with a

bye-pass isol enabling it to be connected directly to one of the bus bars byeshy

passing the controlling circuit breakers of the circuit The circuit can in that case be

energised through the bus bar coupler circuit breaker as in the main and tansfer bus

scheme and the controlling circuit breaker of the circuit token out for mainterance

Use of a bye-pass isolator with double bus necessarily requires adoption of a relatively

costly switchyard arrangement It should therefore be resorted to only in case where

outage of the particular circuit will have undesirable repercussions on the system

operation In case maintenance of the circuit Ix-eakers can be arranged by taking the

relevant circuit out (eg where two or more circuits or alternative routes are available)

the normal double bus arrangement without bye-pass should be favoured as simpler

and cheaper physical layouts can then be used The two buses of a double bus bar

arrangement enn be sectionalised through circuit breokers or isolators as required

from reliability considerations

)

) Double Main and Transfer scheme

In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one

spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )

transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from

) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to

couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3

~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple

() ------~-------

One and a half breakers scheme0

a I

bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two

0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme

described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid

feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)

feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in

0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two

breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit

bull emiddot

Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it

is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often

0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be

bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it

bull Mesh scheme

~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This

) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or

) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station

ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes

) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited

gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS

preferred to mesh scheme )

)

gt

layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS

Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on

the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of

the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0

generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power

network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only

interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond

instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available

generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission

line

a Feeder Oearance

Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty

feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two

breakers to isolate a fault

Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive

loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that

particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to

F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible

In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault

becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths

b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components

The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of

equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any

equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of

failure af these is discussed below

Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable

substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the

continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon

in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a

~--

-

t2

- ~

Q I

0

0

0

0

bull 0

~ ~

J

~

l

--

bull

stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on

which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck

Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service

c Redundancy in Design

The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active

or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are

switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite

advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even

during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of

breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active

redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder

Operational Flexibility

Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different

switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one

arrangement to another

Simplicity of protedion Arrangements

More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions

more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when

automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one

breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to

be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip

circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in

Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus

bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may

complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus

differential protedion is simple

Maintenance - effects on System Security

)

From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J

out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit

breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular

concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit

breaker maintenance

Ease of Extensions

Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af

feeders

InterlocksJ

~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches

) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic

1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes

ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be

~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are

0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated

bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its

associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT

designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull

aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES

The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the

r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance

) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety

I

reasons during the maintenance of equipment -

The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system

400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage

-

LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge

kV 1425 10501 950

6501 550

5501 450

325

SWitching surge withstond voltage

kVp 1050

1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge

kV 630 460 140

Phase to ground Clearance

- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned

overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted

bull gt

0

() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to

J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0

3 Phase to Phase Clearance

()

It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD

bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the

phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system

a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection

variation in equipment geometry

bull ~ I

Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and

9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator

3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a

inm

400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063

) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063

Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)

Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10

i

J

Equipment Spacing

)

I

J

~ shy

a 0

i ~

bull 3

a

bull eshy

bull 0

bull middot3

)

3 )

) bull

)

)

)

)

-

The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering

bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment

bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment

bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches

bull Land availability

bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering

protection reach of LA

Bus Bars

The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors

Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers

The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations

Structure

All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal

conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit

amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in

design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry

structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation

hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15

a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure

sholl be hot dipped golvonised

Equipment Supports

Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type

Road Layout

Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance

Bus Post Insulator

~

~)0

~

0

i)

bull D

bull ~

-

i ~

7

I )

V

J

J

~

-

~ ~

sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor

Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical

requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design

Electrical design

The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for

use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse

withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet

power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio

interference voltage

For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in

the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the

insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance

Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)

Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be

designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to

short-circuit seismic load ond wind load

Short Circuit Force

Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force

N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108

Fs = p

Where

Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current

p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters

l = Span between two supporting points in meters

N = Correction fodor for actual field condition

K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular

buses K= 1

M = Multiplying factor

Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as

(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8

RMS Symmetrical 800

IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs

-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-

~ three phose symmetrical fault

~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the

() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value

for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )

f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally

)

The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)

I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range

of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component

i

FE =S x W

raquo bull ~

F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very

t strong

1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg

D Wind Force

~)

Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the

C J mechanical design of support insulators

--

The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS

802) isI --

p = 06 X Vl

)

f~

~ Where

) v = Vt x k x k

basic wind speed msJ

k = 0 wind force in kg is

1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII

Where 10

L _ length of the insulator

J B = breadth of the insulator

0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force

D

J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for

support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I

projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly

disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8

The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either

due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and

earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of

earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8

under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice

bull ~

i 0

)

0

Bus Hars

-

~~) J )

~

)

lJ

) Busmiddot8ft ~tr

bull

)

)

Sclce n of blls bars

BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used

for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The

bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf

bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and

conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to

large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed

that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus

The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between

supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited

to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting

tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design

of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably

locating the spacers in the conductor bundles

The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum

Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid

bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly

U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not

encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans

expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to

thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus

bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will

alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during

operation

The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the

specific application for which these are chosen

Rigid Bus Bor

Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are

available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on

the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to

consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar

Electrical

The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are

Continuous current rating and

Shof me current rating

Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due

convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be

13 times that of 1 s rating

The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the

specified time is

I x t x (2SAf A =)

0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258

Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =

t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC

T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0

Mechanical 9

The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are

Bending Stress

Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration

Bending stress

Three loads which causes the bending stress are

Wind load

Short circuit Force

Dead load

Wind load

Wind load on bus bar per meter length

WI = pxD

Where

p = wind pressure in kgm1

D = diameter of the rigid bus bar

S~)rt circuit force

10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =

Nnere

Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current

P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-

L Span between two supporting points in m -r~

J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady

~ - force N=OS

K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)

buses K= 1

( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8

(

Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0

due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically

0

The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl

8 where

g M = Belding moment in kgm

= WL8

bull ~

= resultant force in kgm

L = length of the bus bar in m

Z = section modulus m3

- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2

and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )

Vertical deflection

The vertical deflection is~

00054 X LA X W) =

Ex MI Where

L = unsupportedlengthinm

W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm

E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m

)

Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or

l200

Aeolian vibration

The natural frequency of vibration is

561 ~deflection

which should be more than 275 cycles per second

-

~ Flexible Bus Bar

shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed

)-j

1)

0

0

middotV 0

fl)

0

~ ~

D

D

~l

-

Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment

t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under

IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen

limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near

grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock

-

Grounding can be of one the following two types

Intentional( -0

This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface

0 Accidental

~

g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor

1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility

J CLumstances that lead to a shock

0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system

and its resistance to remote earth

2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential

gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface

3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is

bridging iwo points of high potential difference

4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance

current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances

5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current

through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current

intensity

The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other

kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable

conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141

(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding

calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -

recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above

Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing

j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is

advantageous for two reasons ~

I0I0- gt --

1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time

J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes

) or possible hours

2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief

0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of

primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9

a Effed of Reclosing

Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such

circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~

permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single

~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively

bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus

accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is

reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater

Potential Difference during Shock Situations

Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid

may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of

remote earth

Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0

distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect

)

TCAP

-~

I

shy

- I

f t3

a middot3

D

bull 0

bull ~

)

~ ~

rl

shy

0

)

Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and

lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time

navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure

IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence

oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot

neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed

ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both

lands

Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground

grid

Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS

transferred into or out of the substation

Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE

Std 80 - 1986

Sizing the Conductor

The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression

te a p 10

=

Where

A = T

To = T

=0 0

=a

p =

RMS current in kA

conductor cross section in mm2

maximum allowable temperature in degC

ambient allowable temperature in degC

reference temperature in degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T

resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in

~

1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf

duration of current flow in s

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 12: Alstom Training Manual

shy v u ) U U J U W ~ () r bull u bull bull 00 ( co 0 0 () 0 c ~ -) ) V 0 t4

shy

-(H-~ i A-Ie 0- L(r -V---middotmiddot~~~Jl I r __ ~~__ ~2~i~tJ

~ I r- ~~~ COUPLING 1 -out-G-I[lt7~PAClTO~ C~PACITOR

COUPLING DEVICE

CARRIER TERMINAL

I COUPliNG i ~-------- j---GI OE ~ I I METER I

READING r-- - bull ~ bull ---- ~~ bT3YSTj

I IPHrEI

-InONE ICARRIiR --- OPTICJL r i[iHtlN-IL I fiBRE PATH fiBRE

l~a CPTIC r gt~IC I Ll-~ 1i()C tI-ltiL LJ II - t - I -j ~____~~~ri~~~~1 ~= ---

bullbull j EPX I =X bull -__1L 1 -I STATIC I I N~iwORO(C L_____ I I jlANAGERIiNERGY

N 1

~[lER

iTtLE PRINTER I~ L~ N~ flINE IL_ __bull__

ivALUAliON UNIT RELAY PANELS

~H~NEj WITH PRINTERRtLAY- PANELS - bull

Substation switching schemes

ti )

~

a t)

0

0

0

~

G

~

a ~

)

-

shy

shy

dela11s the switching sCMmes

Selection of a bus bar scheme for a porticular sub station is on important step in

design The choice of the bus-switching scheme is ~overned by various factors

which aim at a simple ~elioble safe and economic sub-station Some 01 the

important fodors that dictate the choice of the bus-switching scheme are

bull System reliability and ovailat y

bull Operational flexibility

bull Limitation of short circuit level

bull Simplicity of protection arrangements

bull Ease of extension

bull Availability of land

bull Cost

The relative importance of these factors varies from case to case and depending on

the voltage level number of circuits desired level of security etc

Types of schemes

The various bus-switching schemes that are in pradice are

bull Single bus

bull Sectional Single bus

bull Main and Transfer bus

bull Double Main

bull Double Main and Transfer bus

bull One and Half breaker

bull Mesh scheme

Aport from these schemes there are a few which are less frequently used

bull Sectionolized Main and Transfer bus

bull Double Main with bypass isolator

bull Sedionalized Double Main and Transfer bus

bull Double bus and double breaker

i

bull

Criteria for seledion

lhe following criteria are usually followed when selecting a switching scheme for a

sub-station

i __

bull It should be possible to take out any circuit breaker or any other equipment for

1J0intenance without removing the corresponding circuit from service

bull The rrin bus could be isolated for maintenance without loss of any circuit

bull CB failure Bus fault should couse minimum loss of circuits

bull Economy

J

bull The acceptable level of reliability has not been defined by any standard and therefore

jt is extremely difficult to quantify it for a system In such a situation the prevailing

practices and experience gained from system operation are token into consideration J I For instance in 400 kV systems One and Half breaker scheme is preferred over other

0 schemes os a major shut down cousing loss of 2 or more feeders is just improbable

albeit being more expensive than others Furthermore for 220 kV systems the Double ~ Main T ronder scheme is preferred

middot3

0 Single bus bar scheme

This type of arrangement can be used only where interruption to service is relatively ) unimportant But this is a simplest arrangement where each circuit is provided with its

own circuit breaker

The circuit breaker enables the feeder to be removed from service while it is carryingD

bull the loads when there is fault on the feeder The disadvantage with this r-Ongement is

that if the incoming circuit breaker is to be shut down for mainteno ~1e load on

gt that feeder has also to be shut down If the bus is supplied by more t~1i one feeder

the reliability of supply to the feeders using this type of layout is considerablyJ

increased J

_r Sectionalised single bus bar scheme

If adequate number of bus sections are made the single sectionalised bus provides an

economical way of limiting circuit outage is case of fault on a bus sedion as the

section circuit breakers acts as backup to the circuit breakers of the main circuits ThE

arrangement may be considered for intermediate switching stations or smoi

generating stations where mil1imising of circuit outage is important for systern ~

Ii

reliability The sectional ising breaker may also be used at medium sized substations

bull

)

)

)

j

_r

)

)

)

I j I 0 J

0

3

0

-3

I

bull Q)

bull ~

bull 0

1)

J

)

J

~J

-

- gt

)

)

receiving supply from more thon ltme source to synchronise or segregate the supplies

as per the opemting requirements

The interlocking arrangement is simple for both the types of arrangements

Main and Transfer bus bar scheme

In this type of cnongement the main ond transfer bus bors are coupled by means of

a normally open circuit brealcer All the incoming and outgoing circuits are connected

with the main bus bars through thei controlling circuit br~kers keeping the transfer

bus idle Each circuit is also connected to the transfer bus bar through on isolator In

case the circuit breaker of any circuit is shut down for maintenance this circuit is

cannected to the transfer bus bar through its tronsfer bus isolator Under such

circumstances Jhis particular circuit will be controlled by the bus transfer circuit

breaker Since the arrangement to the transfer bus is through the isolators coreful

interlocking is necessary with bus transfer breolcer so that only one circuit transferred

at a time

Double bus bar scheme

In this arrangement each incoming and outgoing circuit has its own controllingdrcuit

breaker and btmiddot means of bus selection isolators can be conneded to either of the

buses Each bus bar is designed to take the station total load and either bus bar

y be token out for moin1enonce Each circuit may in addition be provided with a

bye-pass isol enabling it to be connected directly to one of the bus bars byeshy

passing the controlling circuit breakers of the circuit The circuit can in that case be

energised through the bus bar coupler circuit breaker as in the main and tansfer bus

scheme and the controlling circuit breaker of the circuit token out for mainterance

Use of a bye-pass isolator with double bus necessarily requires adoption of a relatively

costly switchyard arrangement It should therefore be resorted to only in case where

outage of the particular circuit will have undesirable repercussions on the system

operation In case maintenance of the circuit Ix-eakers can be arranged by taking the

relevant circuit out (eg where two or more circuits or alternative routes are available)

the normal double bus arrangement without bye-pass should be favoured as simpler

and cheaper physical layouts can then be used The two buses of a double bus bar

arrangement enn be sectionalised through circuit breokers or isolators as required

from reliability considerations

)

) Double Main and Transfer scheme

In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one

spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )

transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from

) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to

couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3

~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple

() ------~-------

One and a half breakers scheme0

a I

bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two

0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme

described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid

feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)

feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in

0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two

breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit

bull emiddot

Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it

is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often

0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be

bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it

bull Mesh scheme

~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This

) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or

) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station

ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes

) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited

gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS

preferred to mesh scheme )

)

gt

layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS

Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on

the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of

the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0

generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power

network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only

interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond

instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available

generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission

line

a Feeder Oearance

Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty

feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two

breakers to isolate a fault

Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive

loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that

particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to

F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible

In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault

becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths

b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components

The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of

equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any

equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of

failure af these is discussed below

Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable

substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the

continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon

in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a

~--

-

t2

- ~

Q I

0

0

0

0

bull 0

~ ~

J

~

l

--

bull

stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on

which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck

Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service

c Redundancy in Design

The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active

or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are

switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite

advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even

during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of

breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active

redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder

Operational Flexibility

Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different

switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one

arrangement to another

Simplicity of protedion Arrangements

More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions

more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when

automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one

breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to

be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip

circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in

Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus

bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may

complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus

differential protedion is simple

Maintenance - effects on System Security

)

From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J

out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit

breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular

concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit

breaker maintenance

Ease of Extensions

Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af

feeders

InterlocksJ

~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches

) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic

1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes

ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be

~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are

0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated

bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its

associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT

designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull

aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES

The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the

r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance

) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety

I

reasons during the maintenance of equipment -

The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system

400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage

-

LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge

kV 1425 10501 950

6501 550

5501 450

325

SWitching surge withstond voltage

kVp 1050

1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge

kV 630 460 140

Phase to ground Clearance

- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned

overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted

bull gt

0

() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to

J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0

3 Phase to Phase Clearance

()

It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD

bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the

phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system

a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection

variation in equipment geometry

bull ~ I

Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and

9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator

3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a

inm

400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063

) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063

Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)

Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10

i

J

Equipment Spacing

)

I

J

~ shy

a 0

i ~

bull 3

a

bull eshy

bull 0

bull middot3

)

3 )

) bull

)

)

)

)

-

The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering

bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment

bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment

bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches

bull Land availability

bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering

protection reach of LA

Bus Bars

The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors

Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers

The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations

Structure

All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal

conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit

amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in

design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry

structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation

hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15

a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure

sholl be hot dipped golvonised

Equipment Supports

Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type

Road Layout

Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance

Bus Post Insulator

~

~)0

~

0

i)

bull D

bull ~

-

i ~

7

I )

V

J

J

~

-

~ ~

sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor

Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical

requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design

Electrical design

The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for

use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse

withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet

power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio

interference voltage

For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in

the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the

insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance

Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)

Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be

designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to

short-circuit seismic load ond wind load

Short Circuit Force

Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force

N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108

Fs = p

Where

Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current

p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters

l = Span between two supporting points in meters

N = Correction fodor for actual field condition

K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular

buses K= 1

M = Multiplying factor

Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as

(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8

RMS Symmetrical 800

IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs

-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-

~ three phose symmetrical fault

~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the

() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value

for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )

f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally

)

The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)

I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range

of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component

i

FE =S x W

raquo bull ~

F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very

t strong

1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg

D Wind Force

~)

Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the

C J mechanical design of support insulators

--

The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS

802) isI --

p = 06 X Vl

)

f~

~ Where

) v = Vt x k x k

basic wind speed msJ

k = 0 wind force in kg is

1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII

Where 10

L _ length of the insulator

J B = breadth of the insulator

0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force

D

J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for

support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I

projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly

disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8

The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either

due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and

earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of

earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8

under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice

bull ~

i 0

)

0

Bus Hars

-

~~) J )

~

)

lJ

) Busmiddot8ft ~tr

bull

)

)

Sclce n of blls bars

BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used

for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The

bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf

bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and

conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to

large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed

that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus

The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between

supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited

to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting

tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design

of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably

locating the spacers in the conductor bundles

The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum

Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid

bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly

U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not

encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans

expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to

thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus

bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will

alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during

operation

The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the

specific application for which these are chosen

Rigid Bus Bor

Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are

available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on

the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to

consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar

Electrical

The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are

Continuous current rating and

Shof me current rating

Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due

convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be

13 times that of 1 s rating

The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the

specified time is

I x t x (2SAf A =)

0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258

Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =

t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC

T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0

Mechanical 9

The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are

Bending Stress

Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration

Bending stress

Three loads which causes the bending stress are

Wind load

Short circuit Force

Dead load

Wind load

Wind load on bus bar per meter length

WI = pxD

Where

p = wind pressure in kgm1

D = diameter of the rigid bus bar

S~)rt circuit force

10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =

Nnere

Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current

P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-

L Span between two supporting points in m -r~

J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady

~ - force N=OS

K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)

buses K= 1

( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8

(

Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0

due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically

0

The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl

8 where

g M = Belding moment in kgm

= WL8

bull ~

= resultant force in kgm

L = length of the bus bar in m

Z = section modulus m3

- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2

and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )

Vertical deflection

The vertical deflection is~

00054 X LA X W) =

Ex MI Where

L = unsupportedlengthinm

W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm

E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m

)

Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or

l200

Aeolian vibration

The natural frequency of vibration is

561 ~deflection

which should be more than 275 cycles per second

-

~ Flexible Bus Bar

shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed

)-j

1)

0

0

middotV 0

fl)

0

~ ~

D

D

~l

-

Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment

t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under

IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen

limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near

grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock

-

Grounding can be of one the following two types

Intentional( -0

This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface

0 Accidental

~

g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor

1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility

J CLumstances that lead to a shock

0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system

and its resistance to remote earth

2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential

gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface

3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is

bridging iwo points of high potential difference

4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance

current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances

5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current

through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current

intensity

The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other

kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable

conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141

(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding

calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -

recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above

Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing

j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is

advantageous for two reasons ~

I0I0- gt --

1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time

J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes

) or possible hours

2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief

0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of

primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9

a Effed of Reclosing

Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such

circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~

permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single

~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively

bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus

accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is

reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater

Potential Difference during Shock Situations

Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid

may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of

remote earth

Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0

distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect

)

TCAP

-~

I

shy

- I

f t3

a middot3

D

bull 0

bull ~

)

~ ~

rl

shy

0

)

Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and

lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time

navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure

IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence

oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot

neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed

ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both

lands

Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground

grid

Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS

transferred into or out of the substation

Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE

Std 80 - 1986

Sizing the Conductor

The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression

te a p 10

=

Where

A = T

To = T

=0 0

=a

p =

RMS current in kA

conductor cross section in mm2

maximum allowable temperature in degC

ambient allowable temperature in degC

reference temperature in degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T

resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in

~

1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf

duration of current flow in s

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 13: Alstom Training Manual

Substation switching schemes

ti )

~

a t)

0

0

0

~

G

~

a ~

)

-

shy

shy

dela11s the switching sCMmes

Selection of a bus bar scheme for a porticular sub station is on important step in

design The choice of the bus-switching scheme is ~overned by various factors

which aim at a simple ~elioble safe and economic sub-station Some 01 the

important fodors that dictate the choice of the bus-switching scheme are

bull System reliability and ovailat y

bull Operational flexibility

bull Limitation of short circuit level

bull Simplicity of protection arrangements

bull Ease of extension

bull Availability of land

bull Cost

The relative importance of these factors varies from case to case and depending on

the voltage level number of circuits desired level of security etc

Types of schemes

The various bus-switching schemes that are in pradice are

bull Single bus

bull Sectional Single bus

bull Main and Transfer bus

bull Double Main

bull Double Main and Transfer bus

bull One and Half breaker

bull Mesh scheme

Aport from these schemes there are a few which are less frequently used

bull Sectionolized Main and Transfer bus

bull Double Main with bypass isolator

bull Sedionalized Double Main and Transfer bus

bull Double bus and double breaker

i

bull

Criteria for seledion

lhe following criteria are usually followed when selecting a switching scheme for a

sub-station

i __

bull It should be possible to take out any circuit breaker or any other equipment for

1J0intenance without removing the corresponding circuit from service

bull The rrin bus could be isolated for maintenance without loss of any circuit

bull CB failure Bus fault should couse minimum loss of circuits

bull Economy

J

bull The acceptable level of reliability has not been defined by any standard and therefore

jt is extremely difficult to quantify it for a system In such a situation the prevailing

practices and experience gained from system operation are token into consideration J I For instance in 400 kV systems One and Half breaker scheme is preferred over other

0 schemes os a major shut down cousing loss of 2 or more feeders is just improbable

albeit being more expensive than others Furthermore for 220 kV systems the Double ~ Main T ronder scheme is preferred

middot3

0 Single bus bar scheme

This type of arrangement can be used only where interruption to service is relatively ) unimportant But this is a simplest arrangement where each circuit is provided with its

own circuit breaker

The circuit breaker enables the feeder to be removed from service while it is carryingD

bull the loads when there is fault on the feeder The disadvantage with this r-Ongement is

that if the incoming circuit breaker is to be shut down for mainteno ~1e load on

gt that feeder has also to be shut down If the bus is supplied by more t~1i one feeder

the reliability of supply to the feeders using this type of layout is considerablyJ

increased J

_r Sectionalised single bus bar scheme

If adequate number of bus sections are made the single sectionalised bus provides an

economical way of limiting circuit outage is case of fault on a bus sedion as the

section circuit breakers acts as backup to the circuit breakers of the main circuits ThE

arrangement may be considered for intermediate switching stations or smoi

generating stations where mil1imising of circuit outage is important for systern ~

Ii

reliability The sectional ising breaker may also be used at medium sized substations

bull

)

)

)

j

_r

)

)

)

I j I 0 J

0

3

0

-3

I

bull Q)

bull ~

bull 0

1)

J

)

J

~J

-

- gt

)

)

receiving supply from more thon ltme source to synchronise or segregate the supplies

as per the opemting requirements

The interlocking arrangement is simple for both the types of arrangements

Main and Transfer bus bar scheme

In this type of cnongement the main ond transfer bus bors are coupled by means of

a normally open circuit brealcer All the incoming and outgoing circuits are connected

with the main bus bars through thei controlling circuit br~kers keeping the transfer

bus idle Each circuit is also connected to the transfer bus bar through on isolator In

case the circuit breaker of any circuit is shut down for maintenance this circuit is

cannected to the transfer bus bar through its tronsfer bus isolator Under such

circumstances Jhis particular circuit will be controlled by the bus transfer circuit

breaker Since the arrangement to the transfer bus is through the isolators coreful

interlocking is necessary with bus transfer breolcer so that only one circuit transferred

at a time

Double bus bar scheme

In this arrangement each incoming and outgoing circuit has its own controllingdrcuit

breaker and btmiddot means of bus selection isolators can be conneded to either of the

buses Each bus bar is designed to take the station total load and either bus bar

y be token out for moin1enonce Each circuit may in addition be provided with a

bye-pass isol enabling it to be connected directly to one of the bus bars byeshy

passing the controlling circuit breakers of the circuit The circuit can in that case be

energised through the bus bar coupler circuit breaker as in the main and tansfer bus

scheme and the controlling circuit breaker of the circuit token out for mainterance

Use of a bye-pass isolator with double bus necessarily requires adoption of a relatively

costly switchyard arrangement It should therefore be resorted to only in case where

outage of the particular circuit will have undesirable repercussions on the system

operation In case maintenance of the circuit Ix-eakers can be arranged by taking the

relevant circuit out (eg where two or more circuits or alternative routes are available)

the normal double bus arrangement without bye-pass should be favoured as simpler

and cheaper physical layouts can then be used The two buses of a double bus bar

arrangement enn be sectionalised through circuit breokers or isolators as required

from reliability considerations

)

) Double Main and Transfer scheme

In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one

spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )

transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from

) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to

couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3

~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple

() ------~-------

One and a half breakers scheme0

a I

bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two

0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme

described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid

feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)

feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in

0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two

breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit

bull emiddot

Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it

is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often

0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be

bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it

bull Mesh scheme

~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This

) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or

) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station

ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes

) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited

gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS

preferred to mesh scheme )

)

gt

layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS

Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on

the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of

the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0

generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power

network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only

interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond

instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available

generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission

line

a Feeder Oearance

Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty

feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two

breakers to isolate a fault

Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive

loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that

particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to

F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible

In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault

becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths

b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components

The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of

equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any

equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of

failure af these is discussed below

Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable

substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the

continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon

in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a

~--

-

t2

- ~

Q I

0

0

0

0

bull 0

~ ~

J

~

l

--

bull

stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on

which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck

Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service

c Redundancy in Design

The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active

or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are

switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite

advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even

during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of

breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active

redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder

Operational Flexibility

Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different

switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one

arrangement to another

Simplicity of protedion Arrangements

More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions

more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when

automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one

breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to

be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip

circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in

Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus

bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may

complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus

differential protedion is simple

Maintenance - effects on System Security

)

From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J

out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit

breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular

concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit

breaker maintenance

Ease of Extensions

Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af

feeders

InterlocksJ

~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches

) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic

1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes

ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be

~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are

0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated

bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its

associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT

designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull

aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES

The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the

r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance

) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety

I

reasons during the maintenance of equipment -

The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system

400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage

-

LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge

kV 1425 10501 950

6501 550

5501 450

325

SWitching surge withstond voltage

kVp 1050

1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge

kV 630 460 140

Phase to ground Clearance

- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned

overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted

bull gt

0

() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to

J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0

3 Phase to Phase Clearance

()

It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD

bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the

phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system

a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection

variation in equipment geometry

bull ~ I

Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and

9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator

3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a

inm

400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063

) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063

Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)

Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10

i

J

Equipment Spacing

)

I

J

~ shy

a 0

i ~

bull 3

a

bull eshy

bull 0

bull middot3

)

3 )

) bull

)

)

)

)

-

The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering

bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment

bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment

bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches

bull Land availability

bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering

protection reach of LA

Bus Bars

The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors

Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers

The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations

Structure

All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal

conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit

amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in

design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry

structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation

hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15

a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure

sholl be hot dipped golvonised

Equipment Supports

Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type

Road Layout

Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance

Bus Post Insulator

~

~)0

~

0

i)

bull D

bull ~

-

i ~

7

I )

V

J

J

~

-

~ ~

sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor

Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical

requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design

Electrical design

The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for

use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse

withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet

power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio

interference voltage

For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in

the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the

insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance

Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)

Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be

designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to

short-circuit seismic load ond wind load

Short Circuit Force

Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force

N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108

Fs = p

Where

Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current

p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters

l = Span between two supporting points in meters

N = Correction fodor for actual field condition

K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular

buses K= 1

M = Multiplying factor

Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as

(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8

RMS Symmetrical 800

IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs

-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-

~ three phose symmetrical fault

~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the

() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value

for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )

f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally

)

The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)

I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range

of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component

i

FE =S x W

raquo bull ~

F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very

t strong

1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg

D Wind Force

~)

Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the

C J mechanical design of support insulators

--

The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS

802) isI --

p = 06 X Vl

)

f~

~ Where

) v = Vt x k x k

basic wind speed msJ

k = 0 wind force in kg is

1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII

Where 10

L _ length of the insulator

J B = breadth of the insulator

0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force

D

J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for

support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I

projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly

disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8

The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either

due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and

earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of

earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8

under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice

bull ~

i 0

)

0

Bus Hars

-

~~) J )

~

)

lJ

) Busmiddot8ft ~tr

bull

)

)

Sclce n of blls bars

BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used

for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The

bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf

bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and

conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to

large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed

that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus

The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between

supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited

to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting

tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design

of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably

locating the spacers in the conductor bundles

The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum

Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid

bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly

U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not

encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans

expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to

thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus

bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will

alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during

operation

The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the

specific application for which these are chosen

Rigid Bus Bor

Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are

available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on

the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to

consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar

Electrical

The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are

Continuous current rating and

Shof me current rating

Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due

convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be

13 times that of 1 s rating

The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the

specified time is

I x t x (2SAf A =)

0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258

Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =

t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC

T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0

Mechanical 9

The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are

Bending Stress

Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration

Bending stress

Three loads which causes the bending stress are

Wind load

Short circuit Force

Dead load

Wind load

Wind load on bus bar per meter length

WI = pxD

Where

p = wind pressure in kgm1

D = diameter of the rigid bus bar

S~)rt circuit force

10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =

Nnere

Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current

P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-

L Span between two supporting points in m -r~

J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady

~ - force N=OS

K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)

buses K= 1

( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8

(

Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0

due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically

0

The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl

8 where

g M = Belding moment in kgm

= WL8

bull ~

= resultant force in kgm

L = length of the bus bar in m

Z = section modulus m3

- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2

and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )

Vertical deflection

The vertical deflection is~

00054 X LA X W) =

Ex MI Where

L = unsupportedlengthinm

W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm

E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m

)

Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or

l200

Aeolian vibration

The natural frequency of vibration is

561 ~deflection

which should be more than 275 cycles per second

-

~ Flexible Bus Bar

shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed

)-j

1)

0

0

middotV 0

fl)

0

~ ~

D

D

~l

-

Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment

t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under

IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen

limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near

grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock

-

Grounding can be of one the following two types

Intentional( -0

This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface

0 Accidental

~

g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor

1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility

J CLumstances that lead to a shock

0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system

and its resistance to remote earth

2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential

gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface

3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is

bridging iwo points of high potential difference

4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance

current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances

5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current

through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current

intensity

The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other

kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable

conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141

(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding

calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -

recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above

Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing

j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is

advantageous for two reasons ~

I0I0- gt --

1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time

J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes

) or possible hours

2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief

0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of

primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9

a Effed of Reclosing

Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such

circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~

permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single

~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively

bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus

accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is

reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater

Potential Difference during Shock Situations

Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid

may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of

remote earth

Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0

distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect

)

TCAP

-~

I

shy

- I

f t3

a middot3

D

bull 0

bull ~

)

~ ~

rl

shy

0

)

Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and

lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time

navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure

IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence

oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot

neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed

ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both

lands

Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground

grid

Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS

transferred into or out of the substation

Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE

Std 80 - 1986

Sizing the Conductor

The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression

te a p 10

=

Where

A = T

To = T

=0 0

=a

p =

RMS current in kA

conductor cross section in mm2

maximum allowable temperature in degC

ambient allowable temperature in degC

reference temperature in degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T

resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in

~

1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf

duration of current flow in s

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 14: Alstom Training Manual

i

bull

Criteria for seledion

lhe following criteria are usually followed when selecting a switching scheme for a

sub-station

i __

bull It should be possible to take out any circuit breaker or any other equipment for

1J0intenance without removing the corresponding circuit from service

bull The rrin bus could be isolated for maintenance without loss of any circuit

bull CB failure Bus fault should couse minimum loss of circuits

bull Economy

J

bull The acceptable level of reliability has not been defined by any standard and therefore

jt is extremely difficult to quantify it for a system In such a situation the prevailing

practices and experience gained from system operation are token into consideration J I For instance in 400 kV systems One and Half breaker scheme is preferred over other

0 schemes os a major shut down cousing loss of 2 or more feeders is just improbable

albeit being more expensive than others Furthermore for 220 kV systems the Double ~ Main T ronder scheme is preferred

middot3

0 Single bus bar scheme

This type of arrangement can be used only where interruption to service is relatively ) unimportant But this is a simplest arrangement where each circuit is provided with its

own circuit breaker

The circuit breaker enables the feeder to be removed from service while it is carryingD

bull the loads when there is fault on the feeder The disadvantage with this r-Ongement is

that if the incoming circuit breaker is to be shut down for mainteno ~1e load on

gt that feeder has also to be shut down If the bus is supplied by more t~1i one feeder

the reliability of supply to the feeders using this type of layout is considerablyJ

increased J

_r Sectionalised single bus bar scheme

If adequate number of bus sections are made the single sectionalised bus provides an

economical way of limiting circuit outage is case of fault on a bus sedion as the

section circuit breakers acts as backup to the circuit breakers of the main circuits ThE

arrangement may be considered for intermediate switching stations or smoi

generating stations where mil1imising of circuit outage is important for systern ~

Ii

reliability The sectional ising breaker may also be used at medium sized substations

bull

)

)

)

j

_r

)

)

)

I j I 0 J

0

3

0

-3

I

bull Q)

bull ~

bull 0

1)

J

)

J

~J

-

- gt

)

)

receiving supply from more thon ltme source to synchronise or segregate the supplies

as per the opemting requirements

The interlocking arrangement is simple for both the types of arrangements

Main and Transfer bus bar scheme

In this type of cnongement the main ond transfer bus bors are coupled by means of

a normally open circuit brealcer All the incoming and outgoing circuits are connected

with the main bus bars through thei controlling circuit br~kers keeping the transfer

bus idle Each circuit is also connected to the transfer bus bar through on isolator In

case the circuit breaker of any circuit is shut down for maintenance this circuit is

cannected to the transfer bus bar through its tronsfer bus isolator Under such

circumstances Jhis particular circuit will be controlled by the bus transfer circuit

breaker Since the arrangement to the transfer bus is through the isolators coreful

interlocking is necessary with bus transfer breolcer so that only one circuit transferred

at a time

Double bus bar scheme

In this arrangement each incoming and outgoing circuit has its own controllingdrcuit

breaker and btmiddot means of bus selection isolators can be conneded to either of the

buses Each bus bar is designed to take the station total load and either bus bar

y be token out for moin1enonce Each circuit may in addition be provided with a

bye-pass isol enabling it to be connected directly to one of the bus bars byeshy

passing the controlling circuit breakers of the circuit The circuit can in that case be

energised through the bus bar coupler circuit breaker as in the main and tansfer bus

scheme and the controlling circuit breaker of the circuit token out for mainterance

Use of a bye-pass isolator with double bus necessarily requires adoption of a relatively

costly switchyard arrangement It should therefore be resorted to only in case where

outage of the particular circuit will have undesirable repercussions on the system

operation In case maintenance of the circuit Ix-eakers can be arranged by taking the

relevant circuit out (eg where two or more circuits or alternative routes are available)

the normal double bus arrangement without bye-pass should be favoured as simpler

and cheaper physical layouts can then be used The two buses of a double bus bar

arrangement enn be sectionalised through circuit breokers or isolators as required

from reliability considerations

)

) Double Main and Transfer scheme

In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one

spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )

transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from

) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to

couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3

~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple

() ------~-------

One and a half breakers scheme0

a I

bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two

0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme

described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid

feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)

feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in

0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two

breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit

bull emiddot

Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it

is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often

0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be

bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it

bull Mesh scheme

~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This

) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or

) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station

ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes

) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited

gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS

preferred to mesh scheme )

)

gt

layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS

Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on

the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of

the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0

generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power

network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only

interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond

instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available

generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission

line

a Feeder Oearance

Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty

feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two

breakers to isolate a fault

Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive

loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that

particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to

F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible

In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault

becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths

b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components

The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of

equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any

equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of

failure af these is discussed below

Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable

substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the

continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon

in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a

~--

-

t2

- ~

Q I

0

0

0

0

bull 0

~ ~

J

~

l

--

bull

stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on

which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck

Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service

c Redundancy in Design

The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active

or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are

switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite

advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even

during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of

breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active

redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder

Operational Flexibility

Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different

switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one

arrangement to another

Simplicity of protedion Arrangements

More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions

more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when

automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one

breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to

be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip

circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in

Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus

bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may

complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus

differential protedion is simple

Maintenance - effects on System Security

)

From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J

out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit

breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular

concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit

breaker maintenance

Ease of Extensions

Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af

feeders

InterlocksJ

~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches

) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic

1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes

ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be

~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are

0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated

bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its

associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT

designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull

aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES

The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the

r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance

) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety

I

reasons during the maintenance of equipment -

The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system

400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage

-

LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge

kV 1425 10501 950

6501 550

5501 450

325

SWitching surge withstond voltage

kVp 1050

1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge

kV 630 460 140

Phase to ground Clearance

- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned

overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted

bull gt

0

() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to

J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0

3 Phase to Phase Clearance

()

It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD

bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the

phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system

a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection

variation in equipment geometry

bull ~ I

Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and

9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator

3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a

inm

400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063

) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063

Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)

Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10

i

J

Equipment Spacing

)

I

J

~ shy

a 0

i ~

bull 3

a

bull eshy

bull 0

bull middot3

)

3 )

) bull

)

)

)

)

-

The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering

bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment

bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment

bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches

bull Land availability

bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering

protection reach of LA

Bus Bars

The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors

Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers

The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations

Structure

All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal

conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit

amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in

design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry

structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation

hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15

a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure

sholl be hot dipped golvonised

Equipment Supports

Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type

Road Layout

Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance

Bus Post Insulator

~

~)0

~

0

i)

bull D

bull ~

-

i ~

7

I )

V

J

J

~

-

~ ~

sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor

Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical

requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design

Electrical design

The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for

use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse

withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet

power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio

interference voltage

For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in

the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the

insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance

Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)

Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be

designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to

short-circuit seismic load ond wind load

Short Circuit Force

Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force

N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108

Fs = p

Where

Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current

p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters

l = Span between two supporting points in meters

N = Correction fodor for actual field condition

K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular

buses K= 1

M = Multiplying factor

Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as

(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8

RMS Symmetrical 800

IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs

-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-

~ three phose symmetrical fault

~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the

() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value

for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )

f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally

)

The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)

I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range

of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component

i

FE =S x W

raquo bull ~

F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very

t strong

1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg

D Wind Force

~)

Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the

C J mechanical design of support insulators

--

The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS

802) isI --

p = 06 X Vl

)

f~

~ Where

) v = Vt x k x k

basic wind speed msJ

k = 0 wind force in kg is

1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII

Where 10

L _ length of the insulator

J B = breadth of the insulator

0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force

D

J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for

support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I

projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly

disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8

The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either

due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and

earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of

earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8

under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice

bull ~

i 0

)

0

Bus Hars

-

~~) J )

~

)

lJ

) Busmiddot8ft ~tr

bull

)

)

Sclce n of blls bars

BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used

for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The

bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf

bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and

conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to

large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed

that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus

The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between

supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited

to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting

tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design

of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably

locating the spacers in the conductor bundles

The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum

Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid

bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly

U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not

encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans

expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to

thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus

bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will

alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during

operation

The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the

specific application for which these are chosen

Rigid Bus Bor

Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are

available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on

the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to

consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar

Electrical

The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are

Continuous current rating and

Shof me current rating

Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due

convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be

13 times that of 1 s rating

The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the

specified time is

I x t x (2SAf A =)

0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258

Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =

t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC

T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0

Mechanical 9

The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are

Bending Stress

Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration

Bending stress

Three loads which causes the bending stress are

Wind load

Short circuit Force

Dead load

Wind load

Wind load on bus bar per meter length

WI = pxD

Where

p = wind pressure in kgm1

D = diameter of the rigid bus bar

S~)rt circuit force

10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =

Nnere

Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current

P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-

L Span between two supporting points in m -r~

J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady

~ - force N=OS

K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)

buses K= 1

( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8

(

Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0

due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically

0

The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl

8 where

g M = Belding moment in kgm

= WL8

bull ~

= resultant force in kgm

L = length of the bus bar in m

Z = section modulus m3

- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2

and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )

Vertical deflection

The vertical deflection is~

00054 X LA X W) =

Ex MI Where

L = unsupportedlengthinm

W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm

E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m

)

Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or

l200

Aeolian vibration

The natural frequency of vibration is

561 ~deflection

which should be more than 275 cycles per second

-

~ Flexible Bus Bar

shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed

)-j

1)

0

0

middotV 0

fl)

0

~ ~

D

D

~l

-

Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment

t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under

IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen

limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near

grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock

-

Grounding can be of one the following two types

Intentional( -0

This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface

0 Accidental

~

g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor

1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility

J CLumstances that lead to a shock

0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system

and its resistance to remote earth

2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential

gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface

3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is

bridging iwo points of high potential difference

4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance

current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances

5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current

through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current

intensity

The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other

kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable

conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141

(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding

calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -

recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above

Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing

j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is

advantageous for two reasons ~

I0I0- gt --

1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time

J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes

) or possible hours

2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief

0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of

primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9

a Effed of Reclosing

Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such

circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~

permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single

~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively

bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus

accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is

reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater

Potential Difference during Shock Situations

Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid

may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of

remote earth

Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0

distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect

)

TCAP

-~

I

shy

- I

f t3

a middot3

D

bull 0

bull ~

)

~ ~

rl

shy

0

)

Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and

lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time

navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure

IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence

oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot

neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed

ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both

lands

Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground

grid

Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS

transferred into or out of the substation

Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE

Std 80 - 1986

Sizing the Conductor

The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression

te a p 10

=

Where

A = T

To = T

=0 0

=a

p =

RMS current in kA

conductor cross section in mm2

maximum allowable temperature in degC

ambient allowable temperature in degC

reference temperature in degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T

resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in

~

1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf

duration of current flow in s

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 15: Alstom Training Manual

bull

)

)

)

j

_r

)

)

)

I j I 0 J

0

3

0

-3

I

bull Q)

bull ~

bull 0

1)

J

)

J

~J

-

- gt

)

)

receiving supply from more thon ltme source to synchronise or segregate the supplies

as per the opemting requirements

The interlocking arrangement is simple for both the types of arrangements

Main and Transfer bus bar scheme

In this type of cnongement the main ond transfer bus bors are coupled by means of

a normally open circuit brealcer All the incoming and outgoing circuits are connected

with the main bus bars through thei controlling circuit br~kers keeping the transfer

bus idle Each circuit is also connected to the transfer bus bar through on isolator In

case the circuit breaker of any circuit is shut down for maintenance this circuit is

cannected to the transfer bus bar through its tronsfer bus isolator Under such

circumstances Jhis particular circuit will be controlled by the bus transfer circuit

breaker Since the arrangement to the transfer bus is through the isolators coreful

interlocking is necessary with bus transfer breolcer so that only one circuit transferred

at a time

Double bus bar scheme

In this arrangement each incoming and outgoing circuit has its own controllingdrcuit

breaker and btmiddot means of bus selection isolators can be conneded to either of the

buses Each bus bar is designed to take the station total load and either bus bar

y be token out for moin1enonce Each circuit may in addition be provided with a

bye-pass isol enabling it to be connected directly to one of the bus bars byeshy

passing the controlling circuit breakers of the circuit The circuit can in that case be

energised through the bus bar coupler circuit breaker as in the main and tansfer bus

scheme and the controlling circuit breaker of the circuit token out for mainterance

Use of a bye-pass isolator with double bus necessarily requires adoption of a relatively

costly switchyard arrangement It should therefore be resorted to only in case where

outage of the particular circuit will have undesirable repercussions on the system

operation In case maintenance of the circuit Ix-eakers can be arranged by taking the

relevant circuit out (eg where two or more circuits or alternative routes are available)

the normal double bus arrangement without bye-pass should be favoured as simpler

and cheaper physical layouts can then be used The two buses of a double bus bar

arrangement enn be sectionalised through circuit breokers or isolators as required

from reliability considerations

)

) Double Main and Transfer scheme

In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one

spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )

transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from

) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to

couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3

~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple

() ------~-------

One and a half breakers scheme0

a I

bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two

0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme

described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid

feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)

feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in

0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two

breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit

bull emiddot

Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it

is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often

0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be

bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it

bull Mesh scheme

~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This

) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or

) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station

ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes

) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited

gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS

preferred to mesh scheme )

)

gt

layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS

Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on

the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of

the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0

generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power

network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only

interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond

instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available

generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission

line

a Feeder Oearance

Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty

feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two

breakers to isolate a fault

Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive

loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that

particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to

F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible

In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault

becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths

b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components

The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of

equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any

equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of

failure af these is discussed below

Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable

substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the

continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon

in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a

~--

-

t2

- ~

Q I

0

0

0

0

bull 0

~ ~

J

~

l

--

bull

stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on

which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck

Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service

c Redundancy in Design

The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active

or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are

switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite

advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even

during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of

breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active

redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder

Operational Flexibility

Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different

switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one

arrangement to another

Simplicity of protedion Arrangements

More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions

more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when

automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one

breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to

be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip

circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in

Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus

bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may

complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus

differential protedion is simple

Maintenance - effects on System Security

)

From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J

out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit

breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular

concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit

breaker maintenance

Ease of Extensions

Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af

feeders

InterlocksJ

~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches

) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic

1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes

ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be

~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are

0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated

bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its

associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT

designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull

aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES

The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the

r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance

) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety

I

reasons during the maintenance of equipment -

The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system

400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage

-

LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge

kV 1425 10501 950

6501 550

5501 450

325

SWitching surge withstond voltage

kVp 1050

1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge

kV 630 460 140

Phase to ground Clearance

- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned

overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted

bull gt

0

() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to

J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0

3 Phase to Phase Clearance

()

It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD

bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the

phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system

a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection

variation in equipment geometry

bull ~ I

Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and

9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator

3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a

inm

400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063

) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063

Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)

Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10

i

J

Equipment Spacing

)

I

J

~ shy

a 0

i ~

bull 3

a

bull eshy

bull 0

bull middot3

)

3 )

) bull

)

)

)

)

-

The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering

bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment

bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment

bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches

bull Land availability

bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering

protection reach of LA

Bus Bars

The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors

Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers

The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations

Structure

All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal

conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit

amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in

design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry

structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation

hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15

a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure

sholl be hot dipped golvonised

Equipment Supports

Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type

Road Layout

Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance

Bus Post Insulator

~

~)0

~

0

i)

bull D

bull ~

-

i ~

7

I )

V

J

J

~

-

~ ~

sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor

Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical

requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design

Electrical design

The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for

use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse

withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet

power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio

interference voltage

For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in

the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the

insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance

Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)

Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be

designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to

short-circuit seismic load ond wind load

Short Circuit Force

Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force

N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108

Fs = p

Where

Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current

p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters

l = Span between two supporting points in meters

N = Correction fodor for actual field condition

K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular

buses K= 1

M = Multiplying factor

Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as

(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8

RMS Symmetrical 800

IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs

-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-

~ three phose symmetrical fault

~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the

() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value

for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )

f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally

)

The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)

I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range

of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component

i

FE =S x W

raquo bull ~

F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very

t strong

1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg

D Wind Force

~)

Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the

C J mechanical design of support insulators

--

The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS

802) isI --

p = 06 X Vl

)

f~

~ Where

) v = Vt x k x k

basic wind speed msJ

k = 0 wind force in kg is

1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII

Where 10

L _ length of the insulator

J B = breadth of the insulator

0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force

D

J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for

support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I

projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly

disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8

The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either

due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and

earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of

earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8

under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice

bull ~

i 0

)

0

Bus Hars

-

~~) J )

~

)

lJ

) Busmiddot8ft ~tr

bull

)

)

Sclce n of blls bars

BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used

for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The

bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf

bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and

conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to

large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed

that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus

The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between

supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited

to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting

tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design

of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably

locating the spacers in the conductor bundles

The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum

Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid

bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly

U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not

encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans

expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to

thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus

bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will

alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during

operation

The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the

specific application for which these are chosen

Rigid Bus Bor

Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are

available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on

the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to

consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar

Electrical

The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are

Continuous current rating and

Shof me current rating

Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due

convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be

13 times that of 1 s rating

The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the

specified time is

I x t x (2SAf A =)

0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258

Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =

t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC

T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0

Mechanical 9

The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are

Bending Stress

Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration

Bending stress

Three loads which causes the bending stress are

Wind load

Short circuit Force

Dead load

Wind load

Wind load on bus bar per meter length

WI = pxD

Where

p = wind pressure in kgm1

D = diameter of the rigid bus bar

S~)rt circuit force

10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =

Nnere

Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current

P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-

L Span between two supporting points in m -r~

J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady

~ - force N=OS

K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)

buses K= 1

( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8

(

Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0

due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically

0

The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl

8 where

g M = Belding moment in kgm

= WL8

bull ~

= resultant force in kgm

L = length of the bus bar in m

Z = section modulus m3

- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2

and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )

Vertical deflection

The vertical deflection is~

00054 X LA X W) =

Ex MI Where

L = unsupportedlengthinm

W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm

E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m

)

Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or

l200

Aeolian vibration

The natural frequency of vibration is

561 ~deflection

which should be more than 275 cycles per second

-

~ Flexible Bus Bar

shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed

)-j

1)

0

0

middotV 0

fl)

0

~ ~

D

D

~l

-

Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment

t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under

IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen

limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near

grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock

-

Grounding can be of one the following two types

Intentional( -0

This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface

0 Accidental

~

g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor

1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility

J CLumstances that lead to a shock

0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system

and its resistance to remote earth

2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential

gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface

3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is

bridging iwo points of high potential difference

4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance

current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances

5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current

through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current

intensity

The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other

kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable

conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141

(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding

calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -

recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above

Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing

j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is

advantageous for two reasons ~

I0I0- gt --

1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time

J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes

) or possible hours

2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief

0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of

primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9

a Effed of Reclosing

Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such

circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~

permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single

~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively

bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus

accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is

reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater

Potential Difference during Shock Situations

Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid

may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of

remote earth

Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0

distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect

)

TCAP

-~

I

shy

- I

f t3

a middot3

D

bull 0

bull ~

)

~ ~

rl

shy

0

)

Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and

lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time

navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure

IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence

oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot

neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed

ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both

lands

Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground

grid

Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS

transferred into or out of the substation

Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE

Std 80 - 1986

Sizing the Conductor

The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression

te a p 10

=

Where

A = T

To = T

=0 0

=a

p =

RMS current in kA

conductor cross section in mm2

maximum allowable temperature in degC

ambient allowable temperature in degC

reference temperature in degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T

resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in

~

1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf

duration of current flow in s

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 16: Alstom Training Manual

)

) Double Main and Transfer scheme

In this scheme ther are two bus bars which can carry the total ~tation load and one

spore bus bar which can carry the load far anly one bay As in single main and )

transfer bus bar scheme the transfer bus bar is jle and the feeders are fed from

) either of the buses which can be selected through isolators There is a bus coupler to

couple the bus bars and a bus transfer bay to couple the main buses ond the transfer) bus Careful interlacking is required to transfer anly one bay at a time Interlockin3

~ s~erne is complicated whereas the protectian scheme is simple

() ------~-------

One and a half breakers scheme0

a I

bull In one ant l holf breaker scheme three circuit breakers are used for connecting two

0 feeders ond hence the name This scheme is more flexible than any other scheme

described previously and the continuity of supply is assured Interconnection of grid

feeders in each boy can be maintained even without energising the bus bars The t)

feeders con be energised without energising the bus bars If one of the breakers in

0 one boy requiresmiddot any maintenance it can be attended to by keeping the other two

breoken in circuit This scheme ovoids the necessity of bus coupler circuit

bull emiddot

Interlocking scheme is simple with this arrangement The only disadvantage is that it

is a costlier orrangement and the protection scheme is complicated It is often

0 questionable whether the expense of such an arrangement is justified and it should be

bull used only where the importance of the continuity of service warrants it

bull Mesh scheme

~ Mesh scheme contains a ring with circuit breakers as many as the number of feeders a with associated isolators Each feeder is connected between two circuit breakers This

) provides a double feed to each circuit opening one breaker for maintenance or

) otherwise does not affect supply to any circuit AI sections of conductor in the station

ore covered by the Feeder differential protection and no separate bus protedion is) needed Though it is cheaper than the double bus or main and transfer bus schemes

) it would be advisable to use mesh arrangement only at substations where a limited

gt number of circuits are to be conneded However in Indio 1112 breaker scheme IS

preferred to mesh scheme )

)

gt

layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS

Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on

the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of

the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0

generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power

network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only

interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond

instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available

generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission

line

a Feeder Oearance

Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty

feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two

breakers to isolate a fault

Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive

loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that

particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to

F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible

In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault

becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths

b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components

The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of

equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any

equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of

failure af these is discussed below

Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable

substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the

continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon

in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a

~--

-

t2

- ~

Q I

0

0

0

0

bull 0

~ ~

J

~

l

--

bull

stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on

which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck

Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service

c Redundancy in Design

The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active

or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are

switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite

advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even

during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of

breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active

redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder

Operational Flexibility

Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different

switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one

arrangement to another

Simplicity of protedion Arrangements

More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions

more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when

automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one

breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to

be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip

circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in

Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus

bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may

complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus

differential protedion is simple

Maintenance - effects on System Security

)

From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J

out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit

breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular

concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit

breaker maintenance

Ease of Extensions

Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af

feeders

InterlocksJ

~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches

) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic

1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes

ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be

~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are

0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated

bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its

associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT

designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull

aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES

The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the

r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance

) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety

I

reasons during the maintenance of equipment -

The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system

400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage

-

LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge

kV 1425 10501 950

6501 550

5501 450

325

SWitching surge withstond voltage

kVp 1050

1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge

kV 630 460 140

Phase to ground Clearance

- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned

overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted

bull gt

0

() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to

J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0

3 Phase to Phase Clearance

()

It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD

bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the

phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system

a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection

variation in equipment geometry

bull ~ I

Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and

9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator

3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a

inm

400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063

) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063

Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)

Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10

i

J

Equipment Spacing

)

I

J

~ shy

a 0

i ~

bull 3

a

bull eshy

bull 0

bull middot3

)

3 )

) bull

)

)

)

)

-

The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering

bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment

bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment

bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches

bull Land availability

bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering

protection reach of LA

Bus Bars

The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors

Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers

The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations

Structure

All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal

conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit

amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in

design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry

structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation

hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15

a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure

sholl be hot dipped golvonised

Equipment Supports

Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type

Road Layout

Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance

Bus Post Insulator

~

~)0

~

0

i)

bull D

bull ~

-

i ~

7

I )

V

J

J

~

-

~ ~

sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor

Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical

requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design

Electrical design

The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for

use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse

withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet

power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio

interference voltage

For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in

the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the

insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance

Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)

Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be

designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to

short-circuit seismic load ond wind load

Short Circuit Force

Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force

N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108

Fs = p

Where

Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current

p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters

l = Span between two supporting points in meters

N = Correction fodor for actual field condition

K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular

buses K= 1

M = Multiplying factor

Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as

(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8

RMS Symmetrical 800

IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs

-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-

~ three phose symmetrical fault

~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the

() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value

for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )

f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally

)

The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)

I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range

of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component

i

FE =S x W

raquo bull ~

F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very

t strong

1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg

D Wind Force

~)

Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the

C J mechanical design of support insulators

--

The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS

802) isI --

p = 06 X Vl

)

f~

~ Where

) v = Vt x k x k

basic wind speed msJ

k = 0 wind force in kg is

1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII

Where 10

L _ length of the insulator

J B = breadth of the insulator

0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force

D

J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for

support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I

projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly

disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8

The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either

due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and

earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of

earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8

under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice

bull ~

i 0

)

0

Bus Hars

-

~~) J )

~

)

lJ

) Busmiddot8ft ~tr

bull

)

)

Sclce n of blls bars

BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used

for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The

bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf

bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and

conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to

large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed

that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus

The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between

supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited

to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting

tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design

of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably

locating the spacers in the conductor bundles

The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum

Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid

bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly

U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not

encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans

expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to

thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus

bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will

alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during

operation

The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the

specific application for which these are chosen

Rigid Bus Bor

Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are

available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on

the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to

consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar

Electrical

The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are

Continuous current rating and

Shof me current rating

Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due

convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be

13 times that of 1 s rating

The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the

specified time is

I x t x (2SAf A =)

0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258

Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =

t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC

T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0

Mechanical 9

The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are

Bending Stress

Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration

Bending stress

Three loads which causes the bending stress are

Wind load

Short circuit Force

Dead load

Wind load

Wind load on bus bar per meter length

WI = pxD

Where

p = wind pressure in kgm1

D = diameter of the rigid bus bar

S~)rt circuit force

10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =

Nnere

Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current

P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-

L Span between two supporting points in m -r~

J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady

~ - force N=OS

K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)

buses K= 1

( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8

(

Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0

due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically

0

The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl

8 where

g M = Belding moment in kgm

= WL8

bull ~

= resultant force in kgm

L = length of the bus bar in m

Z = section modulus m3

- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2

and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )

Vertical deflection

The vertical deflection is~

00054 X LA X W) =

Ex MI Where

L = unsupportedlengthinm

W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm

E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m

)

Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or

l200

Aeolian vibration

The natural frequency of vibration is

561 ~deflection

which should be more than 275 cycles per second

-

~ Flexible Bus Bar

shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed

)-j

1)

0

0

middotV 0

fl)

0

~ ~

D

D

~l

-

Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment

t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under

IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen

limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near

grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock

-

Grounding can be of one the following two types

Intentional( -0

This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface

0 Accidental

~

g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor

1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility

J CLumstances that lead to a shock

0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system

and its resistance to remote earth

2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential

gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface

3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is

bridging iwo points of high potential difference

4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance

current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances

5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current

through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current

intensity

The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other

kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable

conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141

(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding

calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -

recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above

Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing

j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is

advantageous for two reasons ~

I0I0- gt --

1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time

J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes

) or possible hours

2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief

0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of

primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9

a Effed of Reclosing

Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such

circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~

permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single

~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively

bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus

accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is

reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater

Potential Difference during Shock Situations

Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid

may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of

remote earth

Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0

distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect

)

TCAP

-~

I

shy

- I

f t3

a middot3

D

bull 0

bull ~

)

~ ~

rl

shy

0

)

Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and

lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time

navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure

IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence

oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot

neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed

ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both

lands

Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground

grid

Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS

transferred into or out of the substation

Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE

Std 80 - 1986

Sizing the Conductor

The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression

te a p 10

=

Where

A = T

To = T

=0 0

=a

p =

RMS current in kA

conductor cross section in mm2

maximum allowable temperature in degC

ambient allowable temperature in degC

reference temperature in degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T

resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in

~

1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf

duration of current flow in s

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 17: Alstom Training Manual

layout consideraUons and clearance deloils Ihtf swilching sdurmlaquoS

Overall system security and reliability of supply to consumers is dependent on

the cumulative effect of the reliability of individual systems and components of

the power system For instance the reliability of the step-up switchyord of 0

generoting station is of utmost importance for the overC ~Iiability of a power

network since loss of 0 generator or group of generators may result in not only

interruption of supply to loads but a~) sequential tripping of other generotors ond

instability The main planning philosophy of a grid is to ensure that available

generation is transmitted reliably even under conditions of outage of a transmission

line

a Feeder Oearance

Feeder Faultmiddot Ideally only one circuit breaker has to operate to isolate a faulty

feeder However certain schemes like Breaker and Half requires operation of two

breakers to isolate a fault

Bus Fault -Though the bus faults are rare in switchyards these may lead to extensive

loss of generation or circuit outage occur because all breakers connected to that

particular bus have to be opened to isolate the faulty bus The aim of the design is to

F It the loss of generation or circuit outage to the maximum extent possible

In two bus bar schemes continuity of supply is maintained even in case of a bus fault

becalJse each circuit is feed through two paths

b Failure of main equipment and bus bar components

The reliability of a switchyard is directly related to the total number of

equipmentcomponents and failure rate of each of these Ideally when any

equipment or component fails out~Clge of feeders should be minimum The effect of

failure af these is discussed below

Equipment Failure - Though experience says that main equipment are quite reliable

substation design has to cater to failure of main equipment without disturbing the

continuity of supply as for as possible Albeit stuck breaker condition is uncommon

in a substation designers cater to this eventuality In schemes like breaker and half a

~--

-

t2

- ~

Q I

0

0

0

0

bull 0

~ ~

J

~

l

--

bull

stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on

which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck

Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service

c Redundancy in Design

The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active

or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are

switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite

advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even

during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of

breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active

redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder

Operational Flexibility

Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different

switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one

arrangement to another

Simplicity of protedion Arrangements

More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions

more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when

automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one

breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to

be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip

circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in

Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus

bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may

complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus

differential protedion is simple

Maintenance - effects on System Security

)

From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J

out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit

breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular

concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit

breaker maintenance

Ease of Extensions

Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af

feeders

InterlocksJ

~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches

) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic

1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes

ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be

~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are

0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated

bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its

associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT

designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull

aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES

The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the

r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance

) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety

I

reasons during the maintenance of equipment -

The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system

400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage

-

LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge

kV 1425 10501 950

6501 550

5501 450

325

SWitching surge withstond voltage

kVp 1050

1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge

kV 630 460 140

Phase to ground Clearance

- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned

overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted

bull gt

0

() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to

J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0

3 Phase to Phase Clearance

()

It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD

bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the

phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system

a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection

variation in equipment geometry

bull ~ I

Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and

9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator

3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a

inm

400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063

) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063

Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)

Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10

i

J

Equipment Spacing

)

I

J

~ shy

a 0

i ~

bull 3

a

bull eshy

bull 0

bull middot3

)

3 )

) bull

)

)

)

)

-

The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering

bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment

bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment

bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches

bull Land availability

bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering

protection reach of LA

Bus Bars

The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors

Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers

The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations

Structure

All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal

conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit

amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in

design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry

structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation

hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15

a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure

sholl be hot dipped golvonised

Equipment Supports

Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type

Road Layout

Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance

Bus Post Insulator

~

~)0

~

0

i)

bull D

bull ~

-

i ~

7

I )

V

J

J

~

-

~ ~

sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor

Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical

requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design

Electrical design

The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for

use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse

withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet

power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio

interference voltage

For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in

the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the

insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance

Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)

Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be

designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to

short-circuit seismic load ond wind load

Short Circuit Force

Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force

N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108

Fs = p

Where

Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current

p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters

l = Span between two supporting points in meters

N = Correction fodor for actual field condition

K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular

buses K= 1

M = Multiplying factor

Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as

(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8

RMS Symmetrical 800

IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs

-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-

~ three phose symmetrical fault

~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the

() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value

for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )

f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally

)

The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)

I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range

of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component

i

FE =S x W

raquo bull ~

F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very

t strong

1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg

D Wind Force

~)

Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the

C J mechanical design of support insulators

--

The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS

802) isI --

p = 06 X Vl

)

f~

~ Where

) v = Vt x k x k

basic wind speed msJ

k = 0 wind force in kg is

1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII

Where 10

L _ length of the insulator

J B = breadth of the insulator

0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force

D

J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for

support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I

projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly

disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8

The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either

due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and

earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of

earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8

under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice

bull ~

i 0

)

0

Bus Hars

-

~~) J )

~

)

lJ

) Busmiddot8ft ~tr

bull

)

)

Sclce n of blls bars

BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used

for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The

bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf

bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and

conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to

large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed

that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus

The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between

supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited

to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting

tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design

of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably

locating the spacers in the conductor bundles

The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum

Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid

bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly

U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not

encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans

expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to

thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus

bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will

alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during

operation

The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the

specific application for which these are chosen

Rigid Bus Bor

Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are

available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on

the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to

consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar

Electrical

The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are

Continuous current rating and

Shof me current rating

Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due

convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be

13 times that of 1 s rating

The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the

specified time is

I x t x (2SAf A =)

0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258

Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =

t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC

T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0

Mechanical 9

The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are

Bending Stress

Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration

Bending stress

Three loads which causes the bending stress are

Wind load

Short circuit Force

Dead load

Wind load

Wind load on bus bar per meter length

WI = pxD

Where

p = wind pressure in kgm1

D = diameter of the rigid bus bar

S~)rt circuit force

10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =

Nnere

Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current

P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-

L Span between two supporting points in m -r~

J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady

~ - force N=OS

K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)

buses K= 1

( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8

(

Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0

due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically

0

The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl

8 where

g M = Belding moment in kgm

= WL8

bull ~

= resultant force in kgm

L = length of the bus bar in m

Z = section modulus m3

- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2

and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )

Vertical deflection

The vertical deflection is~

00054 X LA X W) =

Ex MI Where

L = unsupportedlengthinm

W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm

E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m

)

Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or

l200

Aeolian vibration

The natural frequency of vibration is

561 ~deflection

which should be more than 275 cycles per second

-

~ Flexible Bus Bar

shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed

)-j

1)

0

0

middotV 0

fl)

0

~ ~

D

D

~l

-

Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment

t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under

IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen

limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near

grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock

-

Grounding can be of one the following two types

Intentional( -0

This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface

0 Accidental

~

g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor

1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility

J CLumstances that lead to a shock

0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system

and its resistance to remote earth

2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential

gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface

3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is

bridging iwo points of high potential difference

4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance

current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances

5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current

through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current

intensity

The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other

kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable

conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141

(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding

calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -

recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above

Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing

j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is

advantageous for two reasons ~

I0I0- gt --

1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time

J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes

) or possible hours

2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief

0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of

primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9

a Effed of Reclosing

Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such

circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~

permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single

~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively

bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus

accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is

reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater

Potential Difference during Shock Situations

Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid

may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of

remote earth

Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0

distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect

)

TCAP

-~

I

shy

- I

f t3

a middot3

D

bull 0

bull ~

)

~ ~

rl

shy

0

)

Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and

lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time

navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure

IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence

oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot

neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed

ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both

lands

Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground

grid

Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS

transferred into or out of the substation

Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE

Std 80 - 1986

Sizing the Conductor

The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression

te a p 10

=

Where

A = T

To = T

=0 0

=a

p =

RMS current in kA

conductor cross section in mm2

maximum allowable temperature in degC

ambient allowable temperature in degC

reference temperature in degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T

resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in

~

1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf

duration of current flow in s

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 18: Alstom Training Manual

~--

-

t2

- ~

Q I

0

0

0

0

bull 0

~ ~

J

~

l

--

bull

stuck breaker would result in loss of either one or two feeders only depending on

which (bus side or tie) breaker is stuck

Component Failure - Failure of bus bar components like clamps etc is more common than equipment failure Component failure would result in conditions identical to those in bus fault It is pertinent to recognise that for any failure of components or faults in the feeder boys there shall be no or minimum inte~ruption of service

c Redundancy in Design

The reliability of a feeder con be increased by providing redundant paths either active

or standby dePending on whether these are permanently connected in service or are

switched on when required Each feeder is fed from two paths and has definite

advantage during bus fault or stuck breaker because alternate poth is available Even

during breaker maintenance because of this active redundancy only less number of

breaker and disconnector operations are required The only drawback with active

redundancy is the requirement of interrupting bath feeds during isolation of a feeder

Operational Flexibility

Operational flexibility in a sub-station is th~ possibility of achieving the different

switching arrangements which may be required and the ease of changing from one

arrangement to another

Simplicity of protedion Arrangements

More the number of circuit breoers required to be tripped during fau ditions

more complicated will be the protection arrangement This is porticula) 0 when

automatic operanon or redosing is used Some schemes require operation of one

breaker while others two However the situation is different when a breaker has to

be taken out for maintenance In some schemes like Double Main Transfer the trip

circuits have to be transferred to the bus couplerbus transfer breakers While in

Breaker and Half scheme no such transfer is necessary Further multiplicity of bus

bars and the provision of connecting a feeder to either of the two buses may

complicate the bus differential protection but in Breaker and Half scheme bus

differential protedion is simple

Maintenance - effects on System Security

)

From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J

out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit

breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular

concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit

breaker maintenance

Ease of Extensions

Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af

feeders

InterlocksJ

~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches

) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic

1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes

ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be

~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are

0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated

bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its

associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT

designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull

aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES

The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the

r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance

) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety

I

reasons during the maintenance of equipment -

The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system

400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage

-

LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge

kV 1425 10501 950

6501 550

5501 450

325

SWitching surge withstond voltage

kVp 1050

1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge

kV 630 460 140

Phase to ground Clearance

- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned

overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted

bull gt

0

() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to

J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0

3 Phase to Phase Clearance

()

It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD

bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the

phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system

a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection

variation in equipment geometry

bull ~ I

Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and

9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator

3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a

inm

400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063

) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063

Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)

Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10

i

J

Equipment Spacing

)

I

J

~ shy

a 0

i ~

bull 3

a

bull eshy

bull 0

bull middot3

)

3 )

) bull

)

)

)

)

-

The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering

bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment

bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment

bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches

bull Land availability

bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering

protection reach of LA

Bus Bars

The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors

Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers

The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations

Structure

All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal

conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit

amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in

design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry

structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation

hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15

a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure

sholl be hot dipped golvonised

Equipment Supports

Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type

Road Layout

Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance

Bus Post Insulator

~

~)0

~

0

i)

bull D

bull ~

-

i ~

7

I )

V

J

J

~

-

~ ~

sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor

Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical

requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design

Electrical design

The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for

use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse

withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet

power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio

interference voltage

For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in

the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the

insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance

Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)

Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be

designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to

short-circuit seismic load ond wind load

Short Circuit Force

Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force

N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108

Fs = p

Where

Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current

p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters

l = Span between two supporting points in meters

N = Correction fodor for actual field condition

K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular

buses K= 1

M = Multiplying factor

Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as

(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8

RMS Symmetrical 800

IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs

-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-

~ three phose symmetrical fault

~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the

() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value

for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )

f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally

)

The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)

I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range

of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component

i

FE =S x W

raquo bull ~

F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very

t strong

1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg

D Wind Force

~)

Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the

C J mechanical design of support insulators

--

The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS

802) isI --

p = 06 X Vl

)

f~

~ Where

) v = Vt x k x k

basic wind speed msJ

k = 0 wind force in kg is

1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII

Where 10

L _ length of the insulator

J B = breadth of the insulator

0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force

D

J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for

support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I

projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly

disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8

The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either

due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and

earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of

earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8

under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice

bull ~

i 0

)

0

Bus Hars

-

~~) J )

~

)

lJ

) Busmiddot8ft ~tr

bull

)

)

Sclce n of blls bars

BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used

for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The

bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf

bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and

conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to

large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed

that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus

The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between

supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited

to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting

tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design

of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably

locating the spacers in the conductor bundles

The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum

Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid

bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly

U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not

encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans

expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to

thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus

bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will

alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during

operation

The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the

specific application for which these are chosen

Rigid Bus Bor

Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are

available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on

the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to

consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar

Electrical

The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are

Continuous current rating and

Shof me current rating

Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due

convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be

13 times that of 1 s rating

The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the

specified time is

I x t x (2SAf A =)

0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258

Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =

t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC

T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0

Mechanical 9

The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are

Bending Stress

Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration

Bending stress

Three loads which causes the bending stress are

Wind load

Short circuit Force

Dead load

Wind load

Wind load on bus bar per meter length

WI = pxD

Where

p = wind pressure in kgm1

D = diameter of the rigid bus bar

S~)rt circuit force

10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =

Nnere

Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current

P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-

L Span between two supporting points in m -r~

J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady

~ - force N=OS

K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)

buses K= 1

( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8

(

Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0

due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically

0

The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl

8 where

g M = Belding moment in kgm

= WL8

bull ~

= resultant force in kgm

L = length of the bus bar in m

Z = section modulus m3

- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2

and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )

Vertical deflection

The vertical deflection is~

00054 X LA X W) =

Ex MI Where

L = unsupportedlengthinm

W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm

E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m

)

Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or

l200

Aeolian vibration

The natural frequency of vibration is

561 ~deflection

which should be more than 275 cycles per second

-

~ Flexible Bus Bar

shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed

)-j

1)

0

0

middotV 0

fl)

0

~ ~

D

D

~l

-

Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment

t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under

IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen

limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near

grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock

-

Grounding can be of one the following two types

Intentional( -0

This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface

0 Accidental

~

g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor

1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility

J CLumstances that lead to a shock

0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system

and its resistance to remote earth

2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential

gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface

3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is

bridging iwo points of high potential difference

4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance

current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances

5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current

through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current

intensity

The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other

kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable

conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141

(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding

calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -

recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above

Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing

j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is

advantageous for two reasons ~

I0I0- gt --

1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time

J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes

) or possible hours

2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief

0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of

primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9

a Effed of Reclosing

Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such

circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~

permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single

~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively

bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus

accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is

reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater

Potential Difference during Shock Situations

Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid

may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of

remote earth

Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0

distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect

)

TCAP

-~

I

shy

- I

f t3

a middot3

D

bull 0

bull ~

)

~ ~

rl

shy

0

)

Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and

lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time

navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure

IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence

oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot

neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed

ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both

lands

Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground

grid

Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS

transferred into or out of the substation

Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE

Std 80 - 1986

Sizing the Conductor

The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression

te a p 10

=

Where

A = T

To = T

=0 0

=a

p =

RMS current in kA

conductor cross section in mm2

maximum allowable temperature in degC

ambient allowable temperature in degC

reference temperature in degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T

resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in

~

1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf

duration of current flow in s

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 19: Alstom Training Manual

)

From maintenance the best scheme is one in which each component can be taken J

out for maintenance without any loss of feeder and with ease of changeover Circuit

breaker manufacturers hOYe bas~ the design of EHV circuit breakers on modular

concept The maintenance period is dependent on mean annual duration of circuit

breaker maintenance

Ease of Extensions

Substation arrangement should be suitable far further extension without loss af

feeders

InterlocksJ

~ interlocking arrangement between circuit breakers disconnectors and earth switches

) should be suitably designed to provide security in operation and avoid catastrophic

1) consequences arising out af operators mistakes

ltJ Disconnectors are interlocked electrically or mechanically such that they cannot be

~ operated unless the associated circuit breakers are opened Earth switches are

0 electrically interlocked such that they cannot be aperated unless the associated

bull disconnedars are opened Circuit breaker cannot be operated locally unless its

associated earth switches are in the dosed position0 () USYOUT

designing a switchyard layout various aspeCts are considered which arebull

aescribed hereunderbull ~ CLEARANCES

The position of equipment in an EHV switchyard is greatly influenced by the air Z) clearances to be adopted Two types of air dearances are calculated for the

r) purpose which are phase to ground clearance and phose to phase clearance

) Sedional clearance in Q swilchyard is derived from these which is used for safety

I

reasons during the maintenance of equipment -

The clearances are calculated considering the insulation levels adopted for a system

400kV 220 kV 132 kV 110 kV 66 kV Highest System kV 420 245 145 123 725 Voltage

-

LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge

kV 1425 10501 950

6501 550

5501 450

325

SWitching surge withstond voltage

kVp 1050

1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge

kV 630 460 140

Phase to ground Clearance

- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned

overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted

bull gt

0

() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to

J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0

3 Phase to Phase Clearance

()

It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD

bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the

phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system

a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection

variation in equipment geometry

bull ~ I

Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and

9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator

3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a

inm

400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063

) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063

Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)

Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10

i

J

Equipment Spacing

)

I

J

~ shy

a 0

i ~

bull 3

a

bull eshy

bull 0

bull middot3

)

3 )

) bull

)

)

)

)

-

The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering

bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment

bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment

bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches

bull Land availability

bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering

protection reach of LA

Bus Bars

The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors

Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers

The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations

Structure

All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal

conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit

amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in

design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry

structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation

hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15

a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure

sholl be hot dipped golvonised

Equipment Supports

Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type

Road Layout

Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance

Bus Post Insulator

~

~)0

~

0

i)

bull D

bull ~

-

i ~

7

I )

V

J

J

~

-

~ ~

sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor

Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical

requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design

Electrical design

The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for

use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse

withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet

power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio

interference voltage

For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in

the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the

insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance

Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)

Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be

designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to

short-circuit seismic load ond wind load

Short Circuit Force

Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force

N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108

Fs = p

Where

Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current

p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters

l = Span between two supporting points in meters

N = Correction fodor for actual field condition

K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular

buses K= 1

M = Multiplying factor

Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as

(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8

RMS Symmetrical 800

IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs

-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-

~ three phose symmetrical fault

~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the

() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value

for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )

f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally

)

The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)

I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range

of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component

i

FE =S x W

raquo bull ~

F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very

t strong

1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg

D Wind Force

~)

Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the

C J mechanical design of support insulators

--

The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS

802) isI --

p = 06 X Vl

)

f~

~ Where

) v = Vt x k x k

basic wind speed msJ

k = 0 wind force in kg is

1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII

Where 10

L _ length of the insulator

J B = breadth of the insulator

0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force

D

J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for

support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I

projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly

disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8

The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either

due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and

earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of

earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8

under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice

bull ~

i 0

)

0

Bus Hars

-

~~) J )

~

)

lJ

) Busmiddot8ft ~tr

bull

)

)

Sclce n of blls bars

BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used

for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The

bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf

bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and

conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to

large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed

that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus

The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between

supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited

to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting

tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design

of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably

locating the spacers in the conductor bundles

The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum

Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid

bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly

U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not

encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans

expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to

thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus

bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will

alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during

operation

The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the

specific application for which these are chosen

Rigid Bus Bor

Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are

available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on

the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to

consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar

Electrical

The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are

Continuous current rating and

Shof me current rating

Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due

convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be

13 times that of 1 s rating

The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the

specified time is

I x t x (2SAf A =)

0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258

Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =

t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC

T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0

Mechanical 9

The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are

Bending Stress

Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration

Bending stress

Three loads which causes the bending stress are

Wind load

Short circuit Force

Dead load

Wind load

Wind load on bus bar per meter length

WI = pxD

Where

p = wind pressure in kgm1

D = diameter of the rigid bus bar

S~)rt circuit force

10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =

Nnere

Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current

P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-

L Span between two supporting points in m -r~

J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady

~ - force N=OS

K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)

buses K= 1

( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8

(

Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0

due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically

0

The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl

8 where

g M = Belding moment in kgm

= WL8

bull ~

= resultant force in kgm

L = length of the bus bar in m

Z = section modulus m3

- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2

and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )

Vertical deflection

The vertical deflection is~

00054 X LA X W) =

Ex MI Where

L = unsupportedlengthinm

W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm

E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m

)

Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or

l200

Aeolian vibration

The natural frequency of vibration is

561 ~deflection

which should be more than 275 cycles per second

-

~ Flexible Bus Bar

shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed

)-j

1)

0

0

middotV 0

fl)

0

~ ~

D

D

~l

-

Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment

t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under

IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen

limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near

grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock

-

Grounding can be of one the following two types

Intentional( -0

This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface

0 Accidental

~

g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor

1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility

J CLumstances that lead to a shock

0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system

and its resistance to remote earth

2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential

gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface

3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is

bridging iwo points of high potential difference

4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance

current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances

5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current

through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current

intensity

The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other

kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable

conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141

(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding

calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -

recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above

Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing

j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is

advantageous for two reasons ~

I0I0- gt --

1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time

J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes

) or possible hours

2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief

0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of

primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9

a Effed of Reclosing

Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such

circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~

permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single

~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively

bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus

accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is

reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater

Potential Difference during Shock Situations

Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid

may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of

remote earth

Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0

distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect

)

TCAP

-~

I

shy

- I

f t3

a middot3

D

bull 0

bull ~

)

~ ~

rl

shy

0

)

Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and

lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time

navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure

IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence

oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot

neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed

ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both

lands

Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground

grid

Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS

transferred into or out of the substation

Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE

Std 80 - 1986

Sizing the Conductor

The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression

te a p 10

=

Where

A = T

To = T

=0 0

=a

p =

RMS current in kA

conductor cross section in mm2

maximum allowable temperature in degC

ambient allowable temperature in degC

reference temperature in degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T

resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in

~

1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf

duration of current flow in s

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 20: Alstom Training Manual

-

LIghtning impulse with standvoltoge

kV 1425 10501 950

6501 550

5501 450

325

SWitching surge withstond voltage

kVp 1050

1 min Power freq Withstand voltoge

kV 630 460 140

Phase to ground Clearance

- The phase to ground cleorances for a substation is calculated considering various - electrode configurations and their eJedrical response to the above mentioned

overvoltoges and the highest of the values is adopted

bull gt

0

() This he middotr does not apply to the length of post insulator where the phose to

J ground orance can be adopted based on tests conduded on them and margin forJ inaccuracy in erection ampvariations in equipment geometry is provided0

3 Phase to Phase Clearance

()

It is well known that lightning surge stresses between phases will not be normallyD

bull higher than phase to ground lightning surge stress Considering this asped the

phase to phase clearance is calculated hosed on switching surge stresses for system

a voltages above ~45 kY A design margin is provided for the inaccuracy in erection

variation in equipment geometry

bull ~ I

Sectional clearance is obtained by rounding off the sum of PIE clearance and

9 clearance to the ground from the lowest port of insulator

3 Minimum Cearances Based on CSIP Manual on Substation Equipment Illumination amp layout Dec 1996-a

inm

400 leV 220kV 132kV 110 kV 66 kVf Phose - Phose 42 2119 1311 1109 063

) Phose - Earth 34 2119 1311 1109 063

Sedion 65 545 4 435 3)

Ground 8 55 46 46 4 ~ Boy Width 27 1817 12 10

i

J

Equipment Spacing

)

I

J

~ shy

a 0

i ~

bull 3

a

bull eshy

bull 0

bull middot3

)

3 )

) bull

)

)

)

)

-

The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering

bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment

bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment

bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches

bull Land availability

bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering

protection reach of LA

Bus Bars

The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors

Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers

The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations

Structure

All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal

conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit

amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in

design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry

structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation

hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15

a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure

sholl be hot dipped golvonised

Equipment Supports

Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type

Road Layout

Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance

Bus Post Insulator

~

~)0

~

0

i)

bull D

bull ~

-

i ~

7

I )

V

J

J

~

-

~ ~

sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor

Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical

requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design

Electrical design

The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for

use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse

withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet

power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio

interference voltage

For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in

the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the

insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance

Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)

Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be

designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to

short-circuit seismic load ond wind load

Short Circuit Force

Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force

N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108

Fs = p

Where

Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current

p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters

l = Span between two supporting points in meters

N = Correction fodor for actual field condition

K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular

buses K= 1

M = Multiplying factor

Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as

(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8

RMS Symmetrical 800

IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs

-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-

~ three phose symmetrical fault

~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the

() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value

for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )

f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally

)

The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)

I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range

of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component

i

FE =S x W

raquo bull ~

F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very

t strong

1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg

D Wind Force

~)

Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the

C J mechanical design of support insulators

--

The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS

802) isI --

p = 06 X Vl

)

f~

~ Where

) v = Vt x k x k

basic wind speed msJ

k = 0 wind force in kg is

1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII

Where 10

L _ length of the insulator

J B = breadth of the insulator

0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force

D

J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for

support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I

projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly

disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8

The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either

due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and

earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of

earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8

under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice

bull ~

i 0

)

0

Bus Hars

-

~~) J )

~

)

lJ

) Busmiddot8ft ~tr

bull

)

)

Sclce n of blls bars

BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used

for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The

bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf

bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and

conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to

large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed

that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus

The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between

supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited

to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting

tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design

of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably

locating the spacers in the conductor bundles

The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum

Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid

bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly

U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not

encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans

expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to

thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus

bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will

alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during

operation

The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the

specific application for which these are chosen

Rigid Bus Bor

Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are

available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on

the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to

consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar

Electrical

The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are

Continuous current rating and

Shof me current rating

Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due

convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be

13 times that of 1 s rating

The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the

specified time is

I x t x (2SAf A =)

0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258

Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =

t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC

T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0

Mechanical 9

The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are

Bending Stress

Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration

Bending stress

Three loads which causes the bending stress are

Wind load

Short circuit Force

Dead load

Wind load

Wind load on bus bar per meter length

WI = pxD

Where

p = wind pressure in kgm1

D = diameter of the rigid bus bar

S~)rt circuit force

10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =

Nnere

Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current

P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-

L Span between two supporting points in m -r~

J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady

~ - force N=OS

K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)

buses K= 1

( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8

(

Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0

due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically

0

The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl

8 where

g M = Belding moment in kgm

= WL8

bull ~

= resultant force in kgm

L = length of the bus bar in m

Z = section modulus m3

- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2

and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )

Vertical deflection

The vertical deflection is~

00054 X LA X W) =

Ex MI Where

L = unsupportedlengthinm

W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm

E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m

)

Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or

l200

Aeolian vibration

The natural frequency of vibration is

561 ~deflection

which should be more than 275 cycles per second

-

~ Flexible Bus Bar

shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed

)-j

1)

0

0

middotV 0

fl)

0

~ ~

D

D

~l

-

Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment

t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under

IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen

limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near

grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock

-

Grounding can be of one the following two types

Intentional( -0

This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface

0 Accidental

~

g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor

1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility

J CLumstances that lead to a shock

0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system

and its resistance to remote earth

2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential

gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface

3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is

bridging iwo points of high potential difference

4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance

current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances

5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current

through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current

intensity

The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other

kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable

conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141

(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding

calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -

recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above

Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing

j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is

advantageous for two reasons ~

I0I0- gt --

1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time

J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes

) or possible hours

2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief

0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of

primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9

a Effed of Reclosing

Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such

circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~

permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single

~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively

bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus

accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is

reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater

Potential Difference during Shock Situations

Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid

may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of

remote earth

Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0

distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect

)

TCAP

-~

I

shy

- I

f t3

a middot3

D

bull 0

bull ~

)

~ ~

rl

shy

0

)

Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and

lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time

navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure

IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence

oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot

neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed

ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both

lands

Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground

grid

Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS

transferred into or out of the substation

Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE

Std 80 - 1986

Sizing the Conductor

The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression

te a p 10

=

Where

A = T

To = T

=0 0

=a

p =

RMS current in kA

conductor cross section in mm2

maximum allowable temperature in degC

ambient allowable temperature in degC

reference temperature in degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T

resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in

~

1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf

duration of current flow in s

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 21: Alstom Training Manual

I

J

~ shy

a 0

i ~

bull 3

a

bull eshy

bull 0

bull middot3

)

3 )

) bull

)

)

)

)

-

The spacing for the placement of equipment between them is decided by considering

bull Terminal clamps of adjacent equipment

bull Ease of maintenanceremoval of equipment

bull Equipment foundation amp their coble trenches

bull Land availability

bull Distance between LA and protected equipment has been decided considering

protection reach of LA

Bus Bars

The bus bars of 400 kV Switchyard middot1 consist of flexible and rigid conductors conductors

Sequence of installation of wave traps lightning arresters and capacitive vo~tage transformers

The sequence of installation of line traps lightning arresters and capacitive voltage transformers is decided based on insulation co-ordination considerations

Structure

All switchyard structure will be designed for a factor of safety of 2 under normal

conditions and 15 under broken wire conditions amp 11 under combined short circuit

amp broken wire conditions A slightly higher vertical load sholl be considered in

design to toke care any future increase in load during replacement The gantry

structures are designed to terminate the conductor at 30 degree angular deviation

hOWFVer considering design safety the allowable maximum angular deviation is 15

a~middotlees The maximum wind loading will be taken os per IS 802 The structure

sholl be hot dipped golvonised

Equipment Supports

Support design sholl be done by considering the most severe conditions of wind and short circuit forces Support structures are foreseen to be lattice type

Road Layout

Proper road facilities sholl be provided so as to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment and machinery Roods are provided throughout the periphery for security amp patrolling and also across the switchyard as well as ease of maintenance

Bus Post Insulator

~

~)0

~

0

i)

bull D

bull ~

-

i ~

7

I )

V

J

J

~

-

~ ~

sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor

Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical

requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design

Electrical design

The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for

use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse

withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet

power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio

interference voltage

For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in

the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the

insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance

Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)

Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be

designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to

short-circuit seismic load ond wind load

Short Circuit Force

Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force

N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108

Fs = p

Where

Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current

p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters

l = Span between two supporting points in meters

N = Correction fodor for actual field condition

K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular

buses K= 1

M = Multiplying factor

Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as

(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8

RMS Symmetrical 800

IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs

-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-

~ three phose symmetrical fault

~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the

() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value

for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )

f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally

)

The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)

I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range

of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component

i

FE =S x W

raquo bull ~

F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very

t strong

1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg

D Wind Force

~)

Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the

C J mechanical design of support insulators

--

The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS

802) isI --

p = 06 X Vl

)

f~

~ Where

) v = Vt x k x k

basic wind speed msJ

k = 0 wind force in kg is

1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII

Where 10

L _ length of the insulator

J B = breadth of the insulator

0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force

D

J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for

support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I

projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly

disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8

The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either

due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and

earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of

earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8

under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice

bull ~

i 0

)

0

Bus Hars

-

~~) J )

~

)

lJ

) Busmiddot8ft ~tr

bull

)

)

Sclce n of blls bars

BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used

for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The

bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf

bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and

conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to

large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed

that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus

The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between

supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited

to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting

tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design

of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably

locating the spacers in the conductor bundles

The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum

Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid

bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly

U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not

encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans

expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to

thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus

bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will

alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during

operation

The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the

specific application for which these are chosen

Rigid Bus Bor

Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are

available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on

the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to

consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar

Electrical

The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are

Continuous current rating and

Shof me current rating

Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due

convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be

13 times that of 1 s rating

The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the

specified time is

I x t x (2SAf A =)

0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258

Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =

t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC

T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0

Mechanical 9

The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are

Bending Stress

Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration

Bending stress

Three loads which causes the bending stress are

Wind load

Short circuit Force

Dead load

Wind load

Wind load on bus bar per meter length

WI = pxD

Where

p = wind pressure in kgm1

D = diameter of the rigid bus bar

S~)rt circuit force

10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =

Nnere

Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current

P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-

L Span between two supporting points in m -r~

J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady

~ - force N=OS

K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)

buses K= 1

( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8

(

Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0

due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically

0

The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl

8 where

g M = Belding moment in kgm

= WL8

bull ~

= resultant force in kgm

L = length of the bus bar in m

Z = section modulus m3

- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2

and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )

Vertical deflection

The vertical deflection is~

00054 X LA X W) =

Ex MI Where

L = unsupportedlengthinm

W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm

E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m

)

Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or

l200

Aeolian vibration

The natural frequency of vibration is

561 ~deflection

which should be more than 275 cycles per second

-

~ Flexible Bus Bar

shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed

)-j

1)

0

0

middotV 0

fl)

0

~ ~

D

D

~l

-

Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment

t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under

IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen

limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near

grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock

-

Grounding can be of one the following two types

Intentional( -0

This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface

0 Accidental

~

g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor

1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility

J CLumstances that lead to a shock

0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system

and its resistance to remote earth

2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential

gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface

3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is

bridging iwo points of high potential difference

4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance

current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances

5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current

through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current

intensity

The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other

kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable

conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141

(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding

calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -

recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above

Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing

j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is

advantageous for two reasons ~

I0I0- gt --

1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time

J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes

) or possible hours

2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief

0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of

primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9

a Effed of Reclosing

Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such

circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~

permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single

~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively

bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus

accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is

reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater

Potential Difference during Shock Situations

Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid

may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of

remote earth

Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0

distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect

)

TCAP

-~

I

shy

- I

f t3

a middot3

D

bull 0

bull ~

)

~ ~

rl

shy

0

)

Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and

lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time

navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure

IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence

oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot

neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed

ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both

lands

Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground

grid

Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS

transferred into or out of the substation

Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE

Std 80 - 1986

Sizing the Conductor

The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression

te a p 10

=

Where

A = T

To = T

=0 0

=a

p =

RMS current in kA

conductor cross section in mm2

maximum allowable temperature in degC

ambient allowable temperature in degC

reference temperature in degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T

resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in

~

1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf

duration of current flow in s

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 22: Alstom Training Manual

Bus Post Insulator

~

~)0

~

0

i)

bull D

bull ~

-

i ~

7

I )

V

J

J

~

-

~ ~

sltKfIDn ofa bus pos insulaor

Selection of a bus post insulator is based on both electrical and mechanical

requirements This chapter deals with both el~ctrical and mechanical design

Electrical design

The important parameter which are to be considered in post insulators designs for

use in outdoor and indoor substations are the basic insulation level (impulse

withstand voltage) temporary over voltage switching surge dry and wet

power frequency voltage creepage distance corona and radio

interference voltage

For s~stem voltages up to 300 kV the Basic Insulation Level assumes importance in

the design whereas for higher system voltages the bosic characteristics of the

insulators are determined by Switching Surge Level and Creepage Distance

Mechanical design (Ref Electrical Enginetlfs Handbook by Knowlton)

Post insulators for supporting bus bars and disconnecting switches have to be

designed to withstand abnormal operating loads viz electromagnetic force due to

short-circuit seismic load ond wind load

Short Circuit Force

Short circuit due to electro -mognetic force

N X M x K x 205 2 x Lx 108

Fs = p

Where

Fs = Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak valve of maximum short-circuit current

p = Center to center spacing between phases in meters

l = Span between two supporting points in meters

N = Correction fodor for actual field condition

K Correction fador for shope and arrangement of buses for tubular

buses K= 1

M = Multiplying factor

Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as

(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8

RMS Symmetrical 800

IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs

-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-

~ three phose symmetrical fault

~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the

() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value

for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )

f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally

)

The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)

I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range

of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component

i

FE =S x W

raquo bull ~

F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very

t strong

1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg

D Wind Force

~)

Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the

C J mechanical design of support insulators

--

The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS

802) isI --

p = 06 X Vl

)

f~

~ Where

) v = Vt x k x k

basic wind speed msJ

k = 0 wind force in kg is

1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII

Where 10

L _ length of the insulator

J B = breadth of the insulator

0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force

D

J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for

support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I

projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly

disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8

The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either

due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and

earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of

earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8

under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice

bull ~

i 0

)

0

Bus Hars

-

~~) J )

~

)

lJ

) Busmiddot8ft ~tr

bull

)

)

Sclce n of blls bars

BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used

for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The

bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf

bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and

conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to

large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed

that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus

The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between

supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited

to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting

tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design

of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably

locating the spacers in the conductor bundles

The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum

Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid

bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly

U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not

encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans

expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to

thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus

bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will

alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during

operation

The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the

specific application for which these are chosen

Rigid Bus Bor

Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are

available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on

the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to

consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar

Electrical

The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are

Continuous current rating and

Shof me current rating

Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due

convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be

13 times that of 1 s rating

The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the

specified time is

I x t x (2SAf A =)

0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258

Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =

t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC

T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0

Mechanical 9

The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are

Bending Stress

Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration

Bending stress

Three loads which causes the bending stress are

Wind load

Short circuit Force

Dead load

Wind load

Wind load on bus bar per meter length

WI = pxD

Where

p = wind pressure in kgm1

D = diameter of the rigid bus bar

S~)rt circuit force

10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =

Nnere

Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current

P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-

L Span between two supporting points in m -r~

J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady

~ - force N=OS

K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)

buses K= 1

( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8

(

Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0

due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically

0

The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl

8 where

g M = Belding moment in kgm

= WL8

bull ~

= resultant force in kgm

L = length of the bus bar in m

Z = section modulus m3

- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2

and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )

Vertical deflection

The vertical deflection is~

00054 X LA X W) =

Ex MI Where

L = unsupportedlengthinm

W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm

E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m

)

Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or

l200

Aeolian vibration

The natural frequency of vibration is

561 ~deflection

which should be more than 275 cycles per second

-

~ Flexible Bus Bar

shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed

)-j

1)

0

0

middotV 0

fl)

0

~ ~

D

D

~l

-

Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment

t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under

IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen

limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near

grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock

-

Grounding can be of one the following two types

Intentional( -0

This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface

0 Accidental

~

g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor

1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility

J CLumstances that lead to a shock

0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system

and its resistance to remote earth

2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential

gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface

3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is

bridging iwo points of high potential difference

4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance

current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances

5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current

through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current

intensity

The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other

kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable

conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141

(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding

calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -

recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above

Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing

j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is

advantageous for two reasons ~

I0I0- gt --

1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time

J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes

) or possible hours

2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief

0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of

primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9

a Effed of Reclosing

Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such

circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~

permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single

~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively

bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus

accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is

reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater

Potential Difference during Shock Situations

Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid

may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of

remote earth

Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0

distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect

)

TCAP

-~

I

shy

- I

f t3

a middot3

D

bull 0

bull ~

)

~ ~

rl

shy

0

)

Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and

lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time

navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure

IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence

oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot

neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed

ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both

lands

Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground

grid

Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS

transferred into or out of the substation

Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE

Std 80 - 1986

Sizing the Conductor

The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression

te a p 10

=

Where

A = T

To = T

=0 0

=a

p =

RMS current in kA

conductor cross section in mm2

maximum allowable temperature in degC

ambient allowable temperature in degC

reference temperature in degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T

resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in

~

1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf

duration of current flow in s

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 23: Alstom Training Manual

M = Multiplying factor

Short Short-circuit current(l) M Force on eonductor Circuiting expressed as

(AI middotIS1 Max peak 100 A)-(B)middotq RMS Asymmetrical 266 j or 8

RMS Symmetrical 800

IAI (B)IC- represent phase conductors middot1 H) - represent short-circuits between phose conducIOrs

-~ Generally multiplying fodor M is token to be 8 considering the worst condition of a-

~ three phose symmetrical fault

~ The fadar N is generally used for calculating the steady short circuit force to which the

() support insulators are to be designed for field conditions Analysis show that the value

for N can be 04 to 045 for three phose and phose to phose faults for most of the J )

f field conditions Although strudure could be safely designed assuming even smaller middot5 values for N a value of 05 is token generally

)

The fador N X M is called as Stress factorit)

I Seismic Force The predominant frequency range of seismic vibration is considered to be in the range

of 3 Cps to 15 Cps which is dose to the frequency spectrum for electrical switchgear amp and ther insulator iUPPOrts The horizontal earthquake fprce component

i

FE =S x W

raquo bull ~

F = Horizontal earthquake force component in Kgf S = Seismic intensity A fador of 025 is considered to be in the very

t strong

1) W = Weight of insulator in Kg

D Wind Force

~)

Force due to wind pressure is one of the important criteria to be considered in the

C J mechanical design of support insulators

--

The wind pressure is calculated based on measured wind velocities called Basic wind speed in different regions The wind pressure in kgm2s given by the relation (in IS

802) isI --

p = 06 X Vl

)

f~

~ Where

) v = Vt x k x k

basic wind speed msJ

k = 0 wind force in kg is

1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII

Where 10

L _ length of the insulator

J B = breadth of the insulator

0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force

D

J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for

support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I

projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly

disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8

The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either

due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and

earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of

earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8

under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice

bull ~

i 0

)

0

Bus Hars

-

~~) J )

~

)

lJ

) Busmiddot8ft ~tr

bull

)

)

Sclce n of blls bars

BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used

for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The

bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf

bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and

conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to

large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed

that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus

The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between

supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited

to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting

tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design

of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably

locating the spacers in the conductor bundles

The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum

Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid

bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly

U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not

encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans

expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to

thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus

bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will

alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during

operation

The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the

specific application for which these are chosen

Rigid Bus Bor

Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are

available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on

the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to

consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar

Electrical

The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are

Continuous current rating and

Shof me current rating

Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due

convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be

13 times that of 1 s rating

The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the

specified time is

I x t x (2SAf A =)

0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258

Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =

t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC

T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0

Mechanical 9

The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are

Bending Stress

Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration

Bending stress

Three loads which causes the bending stress are

Wind load

Short circuit Force

Dead load

Wind load

Wind load on bus bar per meter length

WI = pxD

Where

p = wind pressure in kgm1

D = diameter of the rigid bus bar

S~)rt circuit force

10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =

Nnere

Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current

P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-

L Span between two supporting points in m -r~

J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady

~ - force N=OS

K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)

buses K= 1

( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8

(

Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0

due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically

0

The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl

8 where

g M = Belding moment in kgm

= WL8

bull ~

= resultant force in kgm

L = length of the bus bar in m

Z = section modulus m3

- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2

and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )

Vertical deflection

The vertical deflection is~

00054 X LA X W) =

Ex MI Where

L = unsupportedlengthinm

W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm

E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m

)

Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or

l200

Aeolian vibration

The natural frequency of vibration is

561 ~deflection

which should be more than 275 cycles per second

-

~ Flexible Bus Bar

shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed

)-j

1)

0

0

middotV 0

fl)

0

~ ~

D

D

~l

-

Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment

t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under

IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen

limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near

grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock

-

Grounding can be of one the following two types

Intentional( -0

This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface

0 Accidental

~

g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor

1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility

J CLumstances that lead to a shock

0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system

and its resistance to remote earth

2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential

gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface

3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is

bridging iwo points of high potential difference

4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance

current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances

5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current

through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current

intensity

The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other

kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable

conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141

(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding

calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -

recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above

Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing

j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is

advantageous for two reasons ~

I0I0- gt --

1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time

J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes

) or possible hours

2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief

0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of

primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9

a Effed of Reclosing

Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such

circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~

permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single

~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively

bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus

accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is

reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater

Potential Difference during Shock Situations

Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid

may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of

remote earth

Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0

distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect

)

TCAP

-~

I

shy

- I

f t3

a middot3

D

bull 0

bull ~

)

~ ~

rl

shy

0

)

Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and

lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time

navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure

IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence

oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot

neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed

ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both

lands

Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground

grid

Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS

transferred into or out of the substation

Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE

Std 80 - 1986

Sizing the Conductor

The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression

te a p 10

=

Where

A = T

To = T

=0 0

=a

p =

RMS current in kA

conductor cross section in mm2

maximum allowable temperature in degC

ambient allowable temperature in degC

reference temperature in degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T

resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in

~

1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf

duration of current flow in s

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 24: Alstom Training Manual

f~

~ Where

) v = Vt x k x k

basic wind speed msJ

k = 0 wind force in kg is

1middot- F = p x Lx B x 12 x 192 -ltII

Where 10

L _ length of the insulator

J B = breadth of the insulator

0 Generally 5 design margin is added to Ihe calculated wind force

D

J For bus crs wind pressure is assumed acting on full projected area whereas for

support insulator the effective projected area of the insulalor is assumed 50 of Ihe bull I

projected area Tha wind pressure acting on a column is considered uniformly

disturbed load for bending moment calculationbull 8

The cantilever load at the support insulators is calculated considering lotal load either

due to short-circuit force and wind force or short-circuit force and

earthquake force whichever is higher This is due to the fact thallhe occurrence of

earthquake and maximum wind pressure together with the Electro-magnetic force bull 8

under short-circuit condition is most unlikely in actual serVice

bull ~

i 0

)

0

Bus Hars

-

~~) J )

~

)

lJ

) Busmiddot8ft ~tr

bull

)

)

Sclce n of blls bars

BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used

for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The

bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf

bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and

conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to

large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed

that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus

The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between

supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited

to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting

tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design

of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably

locating the spacers in the conductor bundles

The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum

Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid

bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly

U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not

encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans

expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to

thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus

bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will

alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during

operation

The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the

specific application for which these are chosen

Rigid Bus Bor

Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are

available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on

the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to

consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar

Electrical

The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are

Continuous current rating and

Shof me current rating

Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due

convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be

13 times that of 1 s rating

The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the

specified time is

I x t x (2SAf A =)

0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258

Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =

t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC

T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0

Mechanical 9

The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are

Bending Stress

Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration

Bending stress

Three loads which causes the bending stress are

Wind load

Short circuit Force

Dead load

Wind load

Wind load on bus bar per meter length

WI = pxD

Where

p = wind pressure in kgm1

D = diameter of the rigid bus bar

S~)rt circuit force

10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =

Nnere

Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current

P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-

L Span between two supporting points in m -r~

J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady

~ - force N=OS

K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)

buses K= 1

( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8

(

Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0

due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically

0

The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl

8 where

g M = Belding moment in kgm

= WL8

bull ~

= resultant force in kgm

L = length of the bus bar in m

Z = section modulus m3

- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2

and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )

Vertical deflection

The vertical deflection is~

00054 X LA X W) =

Ex MI Where

L = unsupportedlengthinm

W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm

E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m

)

Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or

l200

Aeolian vibration

The natural frequency of vibration is

561 ~deflection

which should be more than 275 cycles per second

-

~ Flexible Bus Bar

shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed

)-j

1)

0

0

middotV 0

fl)

0

~ ~

D

D

~l

-

Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment

t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under

IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen

limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near

grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock

-

Grounding can be of one the following two types

Intentional( -0

This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface

0 Accidental

~

g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor

1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility

J CLumstances that lead to a shock

0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system

and its resistance to remote earth

2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential

gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface

3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is

bridging iwo points of high potential difference

4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance

current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances

5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current

through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current

intensity

The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other

kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable

conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141

(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding

calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -

recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above

Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing

j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is

advantageous for two reasons ~

I0I0- gt --

1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time

J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes

) or possible hours

2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief

0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of

primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9

a Effed of Reclosing

Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such

circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~

permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single

~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively

bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus

accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is

reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater

Potential Difference during Shock Situations

Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid

may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of

remote earth

Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0

distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect

)

TCAP

-~

I

shy

- I

f t3

a middot3

D

bull 0

bull ~

)

~ ~

rl

shy

0

)

Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and

lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time

navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure

IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence

oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot

neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed

ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both

lands

Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground

grid

Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS

transferred into or out of the substation

Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE

Std 80 - 1986

Sizing the Conductor

The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression

te a p 10

=

Where

A = T

To = T

=0 0

=a

p =

RMS current in kA

conductor cross section in mm2

maximum allowable temperature in degC

ambient allowable temperature in degC

reference temperature in degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T

resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in

~

1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf

duration of current flow in s

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 25: Alstom Training Manual

0

Bus Hars

-

~~) J )

~

)

lJ

) Busmiddot8ft ~tr

bull

)

)

Sclce n of blls bars

BUS bars are either rigid or flexible type In the rigid type PIPestubes are used

for bus bars for making connections to the equipment wherever required The

bus bars and the connections are supported on pe insulators Since thf

bu bars are rigid the clearances remain constant ana as the bus bars and

conn~ctjons are not very high from middotd ground their maintenance is easy Due to

large diameter of the pipes the corona loss is substantially reduced It is also claimed

that lhe system is more reliable with the rigid bus than thm with the flexible bus

The flexible type of bus bars is on overhead system of conductors strung between

supporting structures and flexible type insulators The stringing tension may be limited

to 5middot 9 kN for installations up to 132 kV For 220 kV and 400 kV installations limiting

tension for a sub-conductor (of a bundle condudor) may be as high as 20kN Design

of structures for 245 kV and higher voltage substations can economized by suitably

locating the spacers in the conductor bundles

The materials in common use for flexible bus bars and connections are Aluminum

Conductor Steel ~einforced (ACSR) or Ali A1umioom Conductors (MC) For the rigid

bus bar aluminum pipes of Grode 63401 WP conforming to IS 5082 is commonly

U$~j Copper rigid bus bars can also be used however their use in Indio is not

encouraged due to reasons of economy and pilferage In case of fong spans

expansion joints should be provided to avoid strain on the supporting insulators due to

thermQI expansion or contraction of pipes In adcition to this at I~ast one end of bus

bar WIll be provided with expansion damps and circuit breakers and transformers will

alwoys be provided with expansion clamps to toke core of the vibrations during

operation

The bus-bar sizes should meet the electrical and mechanical requirements of the

specific application for which these are chosen

Rigid Bus Bor

Rigid bus bars Can be mode of copper or aluminium Aluminum bus bars are

available as IPS (Iron Pipe Size) type and ExIra Heavy IPS type depending on

the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to

consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar

Electrical

The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are

Continuous current rating and

Shof me current rating

Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due

convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be

13 times that of 1 s rating

The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the

specified time is

I x t x (2SAf A =)

0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258

Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =

t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC

T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0

Mechanical 9

The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are

Bending Stress

Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration

Bending stress

Three loads which causes the bending stress are

Wind load

Short circuit Force

Dead load

Wind load

Wind load on bus bar per meter length

WI = pxD

Where

p = wind pressure in kgm1

D = diameter of the rigid bus bar

S~)rt circuit force

10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =

Nnere

Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current

P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-

L Span between two supporting points in m -r~

J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady

~ - force N=OS

K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)

buses K= 1

( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8

(

Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0

due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically

0

The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl

8 where

g M = Belding moment in kgm

= WL8

bull ~

= resultant force in kgm

L = length of the bus bar in m

Z = section modulus m3

- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2

and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )

Vertical deflection

The vertical deflection is~

00054 X LA X W) =

Ex MI Where

L = unsupportedlengthinm

W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm

E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m

)

Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or

l200

Aeolian vibration

The natural frequency of vibration is

561 ~deflection

which should be more than 275 cycles per second

-

~ Flexible Bus Bar

shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed

)-j

1)

0

0

middotV 0

fl)

0

~ ~

D

D

~l

-

Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment

t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under

IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen

limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near

grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock

-

Grounding can be of one the following two types

Intentional( -0

This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface

0 Accidental

~

g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor

1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility

J CLumstances that lead to a shock

0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system

and its resistance to remote earth

2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential

gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface

3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is

bridging iwo points of high potential difference

4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance

current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances

5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current

through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current

intensity

The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other

kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable

conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141

(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding

calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -

recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above

Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing

j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is

advantageous for two reasons ~

I0I0- gt --

1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time

J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes

) or possible hours

2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief

0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of

primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9

a Effed of Reclosing

Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such

circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~

permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single

~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively

bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus

accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is

reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater

Potential Difference during Shock Situations

Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid

may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of

remote earth

Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0

distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect

)

TCAP

-~

I

shy

- I

f t3

a middot3

D

bull 0

bull ~

)

~ ~

rl

shy

0

)

Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and

lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time

navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure

IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence

oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot

neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed

ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both

lands

Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground

grid

Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS

transferred into or out of the substation

Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE

Std 80 - 1986

Sizing the Conductor

The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression

te a p 10

=

Where

A = T

To = T

=0 0

=a

p =

RMS current in kA

conductor cross section in mm2

maximum allowable temperature in degC

ambient allowable temperature in degC

reference temperature in degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T

resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in

~

1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf

duration of current flow in s

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 26: Alstom Training Manual

the weight of the tube Electncol and mechamcal characteristIcs nove to be token in to

consideraton while deciding on a rigid bus bar

Electrical

The electrical parameters that have to be considered for deciding on a bus btlr are

Continuous current rating and

Shof me current rating

Continuous current ratings n indoor and outdoor conditions will be different due

convection of heat produced due to f1R effect Short circuit current rating for 3s will be

13 times that of 1 s rating

The area of cross section In mm1 required to corry the short circuit current for the

specified time is

I x t x (2SAf A =)

0 14 X104 X[Og [T + 258 ]]05 9 To + 258

Where ~ symmetrical short circuit current in A I =

t = duration of fault in seconds 8 To = initial temperature of the condudor before short circuit in degC

T = final temperature of the condudor after short circuit in PC 0

Mechanical 9

The mechanical characteristics thot has to be considered for seledion of a rigid bus F bar are

Bending Stress

Vertical Deflection Aeolian Vibration

Bending stress

Three loads which causes the bending stress are

Wind load

Short circuit Force

Dead load

Wind load

Wind load on bus bar per meter length

WI = pxD

Where

p = wind pressure in kgm1

D = diameter of the rigid bus bar

S~)rt circuit force

10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =

Nnere

Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current

P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-

L Span between two supporting points in m -r~

J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady

~ - force N=OS

K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)

buses K= 1

( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8

(

Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0

due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically

0

The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl

8 where

g M = Belding moment in kgm

= WL8

bull ~

= resultant force in kgm

L = length of the bus bar in m

Z = section modulus m3

- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2

and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )

Vertical deflection

The vertical deflection is~

00054 X LA X W) =

Ex MI Where

L = unsupportedlengthinm

W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm

E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m

)

Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or

l200

Aeolian vibration

The natural frequency of vibration is

561 ~deflection

which should be more than 275 cycles per second

-

~ Flexible Bus Bar

shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed

)-j

1)

0

0

middotV 0

fl)

0

~ ~

D

D

~l

-

Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment

t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under

IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen

limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near

grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock

-

Grounding can be of one the following two types

Intentional( -0

This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface

0 Accidental

~

g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor

1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility

J CLumstances that lead to a shock

0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system

and its resistance to remote earth

2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential

gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface

3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is

bridging iwo points of high potential difference

4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance

current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances

5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current

through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current

intensity

The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other

kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable

conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141

(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding

calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -

recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above

Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing

j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is

advantageous for two reasons ~

I0I0- gt --

1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time

J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes

) or possible hours

2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief

0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of

primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9

a Effed of Reclosing

Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such

circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~

permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single

~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively

bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus

accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is

reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater

Potential Difference during Shock Situations

Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid

may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of

remote earth

Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0

distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect

)

TCAP

-~

I

shy

- I

f t3

a middot3

D

bull 0

bull ~

)

~ ~

rl

shy

0

)

Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and

lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time

navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure

IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence

oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot

neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed

ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both

lands

Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground

grid

Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS

transferred into or out of the substation

Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE

Std 80 - 1986

Sizing the Conductor

The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression

te a p 10

=

Where

A = T

To = T

=0 0

=a

p =

RMS current in kA

conductor cross section in mm2

maximum allowable temperature in degC

ambient allowable temperature in degC

reference temperature in degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T

resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in

~

1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf

duration of current flow in s

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 27: Alstom Training Manual

S~)rt circuit force

10 8N x M x K x 205 x I x Snort ciruit force per meter length =

Nnere

Fs Electro-magnetic force in Kgf

= Peak value of maximum short-circuit current

P = Center to center spacing between phases in m -c-

L Span between two supporting points in m -r~

J N = Correction factar for actual field condition for calculating steady

~ - force N=OS

K = Carrection factor for shape and arrangement of buses for tubular ~)

buses K= 1

( M = Multiplying factor for 3 phase symmetrical faults M=8

(

Both wind load and short circuit force act in the horizontal direction whereas the force 0

due to the weight of the bus bar acts vertically

0

The bending stress on the rigid bus bar ismiddot0 = MIl

8 where

g M = Belding moment in kgm

= WL8

bull ~

= resultant force in kgm

L = length of the bus bar in m

Z = section modulus m3

- The maximum allowable bending stress in aluminium alloy is 21098 x 107 kgm2

and the factor of safety specified by IE rules is 15a )

Vertical deflection

The vertical deflection is~

00054 X LA X W) =

Ex MI Where

L = unsupportedlengthinm

W weight of the tubular bus bar in kgm

E == Youngs modulus in kgm ) AMI == moment of inertia m

)

Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or

l200

Aeolian vibration

The natural frequency of vibration is

561 ~deflection

which should be more than 275 cycles per second

-

~ Flexible Bus Bar

shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed

)-j

1)

0

0

middotV 0

fl)

0

~ ~

D

D

~l

-

Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment

t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under

IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen

limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near

grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock

-

Grounding can be of one the following two types

Intentional( -0

This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface

0 Accidental

~

g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor

1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility

J CLumstances that lead to a shock

0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system

and its resistance to remote earth

2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential

gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface

3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is

bridging iwo points of high potential difference

4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance

current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances

5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current

through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current

intensity

The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other

kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable

conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141

(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding

calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -

recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above

Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing

j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is

advantageous for two reasons ~

I0I0- gt --

1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time

J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes

) or possible hours

2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief

0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of

primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9

a Effed of Reclosing

Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such

circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~

permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single

~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively

bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus

accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is

reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater

Potential Difference during Shock Situations

Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid

may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of

remote earth

Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0

distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect

)

TCAP

-~

I

shy

- I

f t3

a middot3

D

bull 0

bull ~

)

~ ~

rl

shy

0

)

Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and

lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time

navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure

IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence

oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot

neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed

ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both

lands

Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground

grid

Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS

transferred into or out of the substation

Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE

Std 80 - 1986

Sizing the Conductor

The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression

te a p 10

=

Where

A = T

To = T

=0 0

=a

p =

RMS current in kA

conductor cross section in mm2

maximum allowable temperature in degC

ambient allowable temperature in degC

reference temperature in degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T

resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in

~

1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf

duration of current flow in s

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 28: Alstom Training Manual

Tne verlical ceflecllon should be less than half the diameter of the tube or

l200

Aeolian vibration

The natural frequency of vibration is

561 ~deflection

which should be more than 275 cycles per second

-

~ Flexible Bus Bar

shy for flexible bus bar Sag tension and spacer spon calculations are performed

)-j

1)

0

0

middotV 0

fl)

0

~ ~

D

D

~l

-

Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment

t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under

IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen

limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near

grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock

-

Grounding can be of one the following two types

Intentional( -0

This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface

0 Accidental

~

g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor

1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility

J CLumstances that lead to a shock

0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system

and its resistance to remote earth

2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential

gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface

3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is

bridging iwo points of high potential difference

4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance

current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances

5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current

through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current

intensity

The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other

kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable

conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141

(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding

calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -

recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above

Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing

j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is

advantageous for two reasons ~

I0I0- gt --

1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time

J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes

) or possible hours

2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief

0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of

primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9

a Effed of Reclosing

Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such

circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~

permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single

~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively

bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus

accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is

reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater

Potential Difference during Shock Situations

Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid

may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of

remote earth

Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0

distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect

)

TCAP

-~

I

shy

- I

f t3

a middot3

D

bull 0

bull ~

)

~ ~

rl

shy

0

)

Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and

lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time

navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure

IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence

oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot

neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed

ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both

lands

Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground

grid

Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS

transferred into or out of the substation

Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE

Std 80 - 1986

Sizing the Conductor

The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression

te a p 10

=

Where

A = T

To = T

=0 0

=a

p =

RMS current in kA

conductor cross section in mm2

maximum allowable temperature in degC

ambient allowable temperature in degC

reference temperature in degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T

resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in

~

1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf

duration of current flow in s

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 29: Alstom Training Manual

-

Grounding IEanhingl Grounding is very essential for ensuring saltily for personnel ~d equipment

t rounding is done to provide means to carry electric currents into the earth under

IJ normal and fault conditions without exceeding any aling and equipmen

limits or cdversely affecting continuity of service and to assu~e that a person near

grounded facilities is not exposed to tl- danger of critical electrical shock

-

Grounding can be of one the following two types

Intentional( -0

This consists of ground electrodes buried to about 25 to 3 m below the earth Q surface

0 Accidental

~

g This is temporarily established by a person or a thing (good or poor

1) conductor) exposed to a potential gradient near a grounded facility

J CLumstances that lead to a shock

0 1 Relatively high fault current to ground in relation to the area of ground system

and its resistance to remote earth

2 Soil resistivity and distribution of ground currents such that high potential

gradients may occur at some points on the earth surface

3 Presence of on individual at such a point times and positions that the body is

bridging iwo points of high potential difference

4 Absence of sufficient contact resistance other series to limitor resistance

current through the body to a safe value under the above circumstances

5 Duration of the fault and body contact and hence of the flow of current

through a human body for a sufficient time to couse harm at the given current

intensity

The relative infrequency of accidents of this type os compared to accidents of other

kinds is due largely to the lo probability of coincidence of all the unfavorable

conditions menDoned above For instance German Grounding Standard DIN 57141

(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding

calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -

recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above

Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing

j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is

advantageous for two reasons ~

I0I0- gt --

1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time

J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes

) or possible hours

2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief

0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of

primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9

a Effed of Reclosing

Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such

circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~

permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single

~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively

bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus

accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is

reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater

Potential Difference during Shock Situations

Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid

may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of

remote earth

Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0

distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect

)

TCAP

-~

I

shy

- I

f t3

a middot3

D

bull 0

bull ~

)

~ ~

rl

shy

0

)

Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and

lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time

navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure

IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence

oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot

neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed

ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both

lands

Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground

grid

Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS

transferred into or out of the substation

Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE

Std 80 - 1986

Sizing the Conductor

The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression

te a p 10

=

Where

A = T

To = T

=0 0

=a

p =

RMS current in kA

conductor cross section in mm2

maximum allowable temperature in degC

ambient allowable temperature in degC

reference temperature in degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T

resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in

~

1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf

duration of current flow in s

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 30: Alstom Training Manual

(1977 edition) recognizes this lOW probability and allows reduction for grounding

calculations of a given fault current magnitude by a certain foetal A 07 value is -

recommended for stalions of 110 kV closs ond above

Importance of High-Speed Fault Clearing

j Considering the significance of fault duration high-speed clearing of ground faults is

advantageous for two reasons ~

I0I0- gt --

1 The probability of electric shock is greatly reduced by fast fault clearing time

J in contrast to situations in which fault currents could persist for several minutes

) or possible hours

2 Both tests and experience show that the chance of servere injury or death is J I greotly reduced if the duration of a c~rrent flow through the body is very brief

0 the allowed current value moy therefore be based on the clearing time of

primary protective devices or that of the back-up protection 9

a Effed of Reclosing

Redosure ofter a ground fault is common in modern operating practice In such

circumstances a person might be subiected to the first shock which would notbull ~

permanently injure him but would upset and disturb hiJl temporarily Next a single

~ fast automatic redosure could result in a second shock occurring after a relatively

bull short interval af time bek9 the person has rlKOVered thot might cause a tfJaus

accident With manual redosure the possibility of exposure to a second gt k is

reduced since the redosing time interval may be substantially greater

Potential Difference during Shock Situations

Ground Potential Rise (GPR) The maximum voltage that a station grounding grid

may attain relative to a distance grounding point assumed to be at the potential of

remote earth

Step Voltage The difference in surface potential experience by a person bridging 0

distance of 1 m with his feet without contacting any other grounded obiect

)

TCAP

-~

I

shy

- I

f t3

a middot3

D

bull 0

bull ~

)

~ ~

rl

shy

0

)

Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and

lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time

navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure

IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence

oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot

neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed

ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both

lands

Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground

grid

Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS

transferred into or out of the substation

Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE

Std 80 - 1986

Sizing the Conductor

The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression

te a p 10

=

Where

A = T

To = T

=0 0

=a

p =

RMS current in kA

conductor cross section in mm2

maximum allowable temperature in degC

ambient allowable temperature in degC

reference temperature in degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T

resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in

~

1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf

duration of current flow in s

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 31: Alstom Training Manual

TCAP

-~

I

shy

- I

f t3

a middot3

D

bull 0

bull ~

)

~ ~

rl

shy

0

)

Touch Voltage The potential difference between the ground potential rise (GPR) and

lne surfcce potential at the point where a person is standing while at the some time

navinfl ~5 hands in contact with a grounded structure

IIOTE 1 convenhonol subJolion the wont ouch voltoge is usuolly found the potenhol dlHerence

oetwee IOnd and the feel 01 a point of nlOIIimum each distance However n the ~a ofo metol-tomiddot

neol c Jct from hand-to-hand or from hand-to-leel which is of concern in the gosmiddotinsuloed

ubstohc both sIIuaIions should be inveJigoted for lhe possible worsl reach condition ncludlng both

lands

Mesh Voltage The maximum touch voltage to be found within a mesh of a ground

grid

Transferred Voltage A special case of the touch voltage where a voltage IS

transferred into or out of the substation

Calculations based on IEEE Guide for safety in AC substations - ANSIIEEE

Std 80 - 1986

Sizing the Conductor

The area of cross section for the conductor is given by the expression

te a p 10

=

Where

A = T

To = T

=0 0

=a

p =

RMS current in kA

conductor cross section in mm2

maximum allowable temperature in degC

ambient allowable temperature in degC

reference temperature in degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity at 0 degC

thermal coefficient of resistivity ot reference temperature T

resistivity of the ground conductor at reference temperature T r in

~

1 I ao or ( 1 ex ) - Tf

duration of current flow in s

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 32: Alstom Training Manual

)

)

TCAP = thermal capacity fador in Jcm3 C)

= 4184middot SHmiddot SW )

SH = specific heat capacity in Colgram C ~) SW = specific weight in gramcmJ

middot ~ Material Constants

If -J

0 Conductivity a r leo Fusing p leAP

Description 20middotC omiddotc Temp 20C Jcm3rc(

Standard Annealed Cu wire 1000 000393 234 1083 17241 3422

J - Commercial hard drown Cu Ware 970 000381 242 1084 17774 3422

~j Cu clod steel care wire 400 000378 245 1084 4397 3846

1300)J

Cu clod steel core wire 400 000378 245 1084 5862 3846

0 1300

Commercial EC AI wire 610 000403 228 657 2862 25569 AI allay wire 5005 535 000353 263 660 32226 2598

AI alloy wire 6201 525 000347 268 660 32840 2598

0 AI clod steel care wire 203 000360 258 660 84805 2670

bull 1300

Zinc coated steel core wire 85 000320 293 419 201 3931bull 1300

~ Stainless steel 304 24 000130 749 1400 720 4032

bull

Step and Touch Voltage Criteria The safety of a person depends on preventing

the critical amount of shock energy from being absorbed before ~ the fault is cleared

and the system de-energized The maximum driving voltage of any accidental circuit

should not exceed the limits defined below For step voltage the limit is

Eso = (1000 + 6C p)0116 J t or E step70 = (1000 + 6C p0157 J t

The actual step voltage E should be less than the maximum allowable step voltage

ESItIp to ensure safety Similarly the touch voltage limit is

E tovdgt50 = (1000 + 1 5C P)O 116 t

E sfap50 = 1000 + 15C p01571 t

Where

C = 1 for no protedive surface layer

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 33: Alstom Training Manual

f

)

~

0

J

I 0

0

Q

0

bull 0 Z)

bull

1 [ a= - 1+2 L --==K=--J otherwise 096 n_1 J 1+(2nhjO08f )

Simple c ernative approaches based on the equivalent hemisphere such as

= 1-0 [l-PP I approximately a= 0106 m which avoids

2h+a) infinite summation series olso possible

p = the resistivity of the surface material in Om t = duration of shock cu ent in seconds The actual touch voltage mesh valtagt or transferred voltage should be less than the

maximum allowable touch voltage Eloudv to ensure safety

However ElINp50 amp ~ are taken into consideration os these would give lesser

limiting volues

Grounding System Elements

1 Ground electrode A condudor imbedded in the earth and used for collecting

ground current from or dissipating ground current into the earth

2 Grounding grid A system of horizontal ground electrodes that consists of a

number of interconnected bare condudors buried in the earth providing a common

ground for eledrical devices or metallic structures usually in one specific location

NOTE Grids buried horizontally near the earths surfac or alS effective in controlling the svrfoce

potential gradients A typical grid usually is supplemented by a number of ground rods and may be

f ltr connected to ouxiIiory ground electrodes to lower its resiAance with respect to remote earth

3 Ground mat A solid metallic plate or a system of closely spaced bore condudors

that are connected to and often placed in shallow depths above a ground grid or

elsewhere at the earth surface in order to obtain an extra protective measure

minimizing the danger of the exposure to high step or touch voltages in a critical

operating area or places that are frequently used by people Grounded metal

gratings placed on or above the soil surface or wire mesh placed directly under the

crushed rock are common forms of a ground mat

4 Grounding System Comprises all interconnected grounding facilities In a

specific area

Basic Aspects of Grid Design

Conceptual analysis of a grid system usually starts with inspedion of the station layout

plan showing all mojor equipment and strudures In order to establish the basic ideas

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 34: Alstom Training Manual

and concepts the following points may serve as guidelines for starting a typICal

grounding grid design

L A continuous conductorloop should surround the perimeter to enclose as

much area as pradical This measure helps to ovoid high current

concentrotion and hence high grodients both in the grid area and near the

projecting coble ends Enclosing more area also reduces the resistance of the

grounomg grid

2 Within the loop conductors should be laid in paralleled lines and where

practical along the structures or rows of equipment to provide for short

ground connections

3 A typical grid system for a substation may include 40 bare copper conductors

buried 13-05 m below grade spaced 3-7 m aport in a grid pattern At

cross-connedions the condudors would be securely bonded together

Ground rods may be at the grid comers and at each second junction point

bull o along the perimeter Ground rods may also be installed at major equipment

In multi layer or very resistive soils it might be useful to use longer rod~

(lengths exceeding 100 ft have been used by some utilities) o 4 This grid system would be extended over the entire substation switchyard and

bullbull o often beyond the fence line Multiple ground leads or larger sized conductors

would be used where high concentrations of current may occur such as at a

neutral-to-ground connection of generators capacitor bonks or transformers

5 The ratio of the sides of the mesh usually is fro 1 1 to 1 3 unless a precise 1)

(computer-aided) analysis warrants more extreme values Frequent crossshy

e cannections hove ( relatively small effed on lowering the resistance of grid

Their primary role is to assure adequate control of the sUrMee potel The

cross-connections are also useful in securing multiple paths for Ine fault

current minimizing the voltage drop in the grid itself and providing a certain

measure of redundancy in the case of a condudor failure

Design In Difficult Conditions

In areas where the soil resistivity is rother high or the subslcrtion spoce is at 0

Q premium it may not be possible to obtain a low impedance grounding system by

spreading the grid electrodes over a large area as is done in more favorableD conditions Such a si1uation is tygticol of many GIS installations occupying only 0

fraction of the land area normally used for conventional equipment This often makes

) the control of surface gradients difficult Some of the solutions include

gt ~

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 35: Alstom Training Manual

J (1) Connection(s) of remote ground grid(s) and adjacent grounding facilities a

combined system utilizing separate installations in buildings underground vaults etc A predominant use of remote ground electrodes requires careful

consideration of transferred potentials surge arrester locations and other

CI itical paints A significant voltage drop may develop between the local and

remote grounding facilities

12) Use of deep-driven ground rads and drilled ground wells in combination with

a chemical treatment af sails ar use af bentonite days for backfilling

(3J Use af caunterpoise wire mats In exposed areas it is feasible ta combine

both an insulating material and fabricated mats made of wire mesh I ) expanded metal ar gratings first ta equalize the gradient field near the

surface and then ta reduce canductance from the surface to the underlying ~J

metal strudures A typical counterpoise mesh might consist of copper dad J

steel wires of AWG No6 size arranged in a 06 bull 06 m (24-24 m) grid

paHern installed 005bull 015 m (2-6 m) below the earths surface and

overlaying the main grounding grid which is installed in greater depth usually between 03 - 05 m (12 bull 18 mI

(4) Where feasible controlled use of other available means to lower the overall

resistance of a graund system such as connecting static wires and neutrals ta

the ground (see 133)~ Typical is the use af metallic objects an the site that

qualify for and can serve os auxiliary graund electrades ar as ground ties to

other systems Cansequences of such applica~ons of course have to be

carefully evaluated

bull Wherever prodicol a nearby deposit of low resistivity material af sufficient

volume can be used to install on extra (satellite) grid This satellite grid when

sufficiently connected to the main grid will lower the overall resistance and

thus the ground potential rise of the grounding grid The nearby low

resistivity material may be a day deposit or it may be a part of some large

structure such as the concrete mass af hydroelectric dam

Connections to Grid

Candudors of adequate ampacity and mechanical strength should be used for the

cannections between

[l) All ground electrodes such as graunding grids rodbeds ground wells and

where applicable metal water or gas pipes water well casings etc

(2) All fault current sources such as surge arresters capacitor banks or coupling gt capacitors fransformers and where appropriate machine neutrals

) secondory lighting and power circuits

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 36: Alstom Training Manual

-

bull bull

9

Design Criteria

There are two main design goals 10 be achieved by any slbtation ground system

lnder normal as well as fault conditions These are

bull to provide means ta dissipate eleclc currents into the earth without

exceeding any operating and equipment limits

bull to assure that a person near grounded facilities is not exposed to the

danger of critical eledric shock

Critical parameters which hove impad on grid design are

1 Moximum Grid Current(IG)

The magnitude of the grid current is didated by system requirements

2 1_ middottt Duration (tf) and Shock Duration (t) The fault duration and shock

Jtion is normally assumed equal unless the fault duration is the sum of

successive shocks such as from redosures The selection of t should reflect o fast dearing time for transmission substations and slow dearing times for

D distribution and industrial substations The choices t and t should result ~n

the most pessimistic combination of fault current decrement factor andtJ allowable body current Typical values for tf and t range from 025 - 10 s

t) 3 Soil Resistivity (p) The grid resistance and the voltage gradients with In a

substation are diredly dependent on the soil resistivity

4 Resistivity of Surface loyer (pJ A thin surface layer of crushed rock helps in

limiting the body current by adding resistarye to the equivalent bodyt)

resistance Values from 1000 to 5000 12m have been used for p

Designing a Ground Grid

The following step should be followed to design a ground grid

(i) Coiled field data

) (ii) Choose the condudor

) (iii) Assume Spacing

(iv) Calculate lirliting ElOlgtp and ~

(v) Calculate Em and E L Rc ) (vi) Check Emlt E Eslt Eep Lgtlq amp Rs lt Req

(vii) If yes increase the spacing and check until the conditions foil

(viii) If no decrease the spacing and check until the conditions are passed

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh Voltage

Em = pKKHl and

E = pKKHl

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 37: Alstom Training Manual

bullbull

_

Mesh Voltage (E)

shymiddot J

s

~

~ I

bullbull

~

bullbull bull 0

J

0 I

~

fl

J

Jshy

~

j-shy)

)

~

~e spcclng fador Em for mesh voltage by simplified method is

deg1 (O+2h)1 h J K 8 J

-v In -+ -- + -Inshy

2j[ 16hd BOd 4d K p(2nl)[ tmiddotmiddot ere

K = 1 for grids with ground rods along the perimeter or for grids

with ground rods 10 the grid corne ~ as well as both along the perimeter and

~nroughout the grid areabull

K = for grids with no ground rods or grids with only a few

ground rods none located in the corners or on the

perimeter

K_ = )1 + hho

h = 1 m (reference depth of grid)

D = spacing between parallel conductors in m

h = depth of ground grid condutors in m

n = number of parallel condudors in one direction

d = diameter of the grid condudor in m

Corrective Factor

K 0656 + 0172 n

For mesh voltage calculation

n = ~ Where x amp yare condudors in each diredion

For easy identification K for mesh voltage calculation is denoted as Kl

For step voltage calculation

n = max(xy)

For easy identification K for step voltage calculation is denoted as K

Step Voltage (EJ

The spacing foetor ~ for step voltage by simplified method is

1 1 1 1 I K = - +- + -O-OSfto)

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 38: Alstom Training Manual

i

bull bull

t

jshy ~

)~ I

bull ~

4J

0

bull 0

bull ) f)

~

tgt

-

shy-

1t

2h D+h o

Moreover for depths smaller than 025 m

1 [ 1 = + - 0K ---- D+h +

1 w] Where

w + + + 2 3 4 n-1

Or for n ~ 6

W =-- + In (n-1) - 0423 2(n-1)

The use of a different equotion for 1( depending on the grid depth h reflects the fad

that the step voltage decreases rapidly with increased depth

In equotion for Em ond E

L = L+L

= 1+ 115L

for grids with no ground rods or only a few rods in e the center oway from the perimeter

for grids with ground rods predominantly around the perimeter

Estimation of Minimum Buried Condudor Length K KP IG ~

L gt 116 + 0174 C P

Refinement of Preliminary Design

If colculations based on the preliminary design indicate that dangerous potential

differences can exis1 within the station the following possible remedies should be

studied and applied where appropriate

1) Decrease in total grid resistance will decrease the maximum ground grid

potential rise and hence the maximum transferred potential The most effective way to

decrease ground grid resistance is by increasing the area occupied by the grid

Deep driven rods or wells may be used if the ovailable area is lirnited Decrease in

stotion resistance mayor may not decrease appreciably the local gradients

depending on the method used

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 39: Alstom Training Manual

v

~

0 C)

)

0

a n

bull ~

~

D - i

)

)

)

)

(2) Improvement of Gradient Control By employing closer spacing of

grid condudors the condition of the continuous plote can be appraached more

eiosely D~gerous potentiols within the station can thus the eliminated at a cosl The

problem c Ie perimeter may be more difficult especially at a smal station where

earth res ity is high -However it is usually possible by burying the grid

perimeter ground condudor outside the fence line to ensure that the steeper

gradients l~mediatety outside this grid perimeter do no1 contribute to the more

dangerous gtuch contacts Another effedive and economical wav to control perimeter

gradients cnd step potentials is to bury two or more parallel conductors

around the perimeter at successively greater depth as distance from the

slalion is increased

(3) Diverting a greater part of the fault current to other paths For

example conneding overhead ground wires of transmission lines or by increasing the

tower footing resistance near the substation Concerning the lotter however the

effed on fault gradients near tower footings should be weighed

(4) Limiting of short-circuit currents flowing in the ground mat to

lower values If feasible this will decrease the total rise in ground mot voltage and

all gradients in proportion Other fadors however will usually moke this impractical

Moreover if accomplished at the expense of greater fault clearing time the danger

may be increased rather than diminished

I Barring of access to limited areas where itmay be impractical to

eote possibility of excessive potential differences during a fault

By uSing one or more of the above methods where necessary designs can be

completed for construdion purposes These should be reasonably liberal as

grounding facilities can usually be installed more cheaply if all go in as port of the

general construction job without the necessity of making addITions later

Limitations of Simplified Equations for Em and E

Severol simplifying assumptions are mode in deriving the equations for Em and Es

These assumptions may result in inaccurate results for some cases in comparison

with the results from more rigorous computer analysis or scale model tests The

inclusion of correction fadors into the equations for Em and E practically eliminates the

inaccuracy (within certain ranges for the various parameters) for most pradical grid

designs )

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 40: Alstom Training Manual

0

3 When using the equatlons for E and Ebullbull the following limits are recommended for

) square grids or for rectangular grids having the some number of condudors in both

- diredions __ 0

n S 25 0

025 m ~ h ~ 25m - d lt 025 h

1) D gt 25m

Although the equations for Em and E have been tested for n greater than 25 and 0

found to be sufficiently accurate the tests were not extensive enough to form solid

o conclusions Thus caution should be exercised before exceeding the limits given

above0 Grid tance)~

1

G

e 0

bull tl) Where

h = grid buried depth in m

A = Area of grid in m 0 L = totollength of condudor in m

bull 0

Calculation of Maximum Step and Mesh VoltageBased On IS 3043

Area of Cross Section ~ ) The areo of cross section required for the ground condudor is

3 ln

bull s =

k 0 Where

0 S = Cross section areo in mm

= rms value of fault current in A0 = duration of fault in s

J k = fador dependent on material of the protective conductor ~ The factor k is

) Q (8 + 20)

~ K =

~

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 41: Alstom Training Manual

~

~

B + 9-

) i~=re

gt Q Volumetric heat capacity of the material in JrC mmJ

E reciprocal of temperature coefficient of resistivity of the cond~ctor atlt) OC in degC

(J = electrical resistivity of 200c in Omm

J = initial temperature of conductor degC

11 = initial temperature of conductor degC ) Material Constants

() Material BoC QCI JrCmm3 5201 Omm

) Copper 2345 345 x 103 17241 X 10-6

() ) Aluminum 228 25 x 103 28264 X 10-6

)

0 -- Lead 230 145 x 10-3

241 X 106

- 3~8 x10Steel 202 138 x 10 0 bull

D Current Rating of Various Protective Earthing Materials

For bore conductor without any risk of fir or 0Itf other touching moleriol in Amm2o

0 bull

bull )

middot9

0

Q

Material ~ __ Copper I-n Aluminummiddot Steel~~- ~

1 s current rating 205 bullbull~I 126 80

3 s current rating 118 73 46

IniliollemperOlvre 400c finaltm~rolvre 395lt (Cu) 325C (A1)500C (Sleel)

A note on Fences

Fence grounding is of major importance because the most dangerous touch contacts

ore involved The outside of the fence is usually accessible to the public In addition

the fence may occupy a position on the periphery of the ground-grid area where

surface potential gradients are the highest Post utility practices have been quite

varied but a few facts are dear

Two different general philosophies of fence grounding have been followed

(l) Inclusion of the fence within the ground~grid area

(2) Placement of the fence outside the ground-grid area either with or

without close electric coupling between fence and adjacent earth along its length but

with no electric coupling between fence and main station grid

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 42: Alstom Training Manual

- I

1)

lt

0

j

~ )

I

0

()

0

bull 0

bull 0

l

0

0

)

)

)

iD IV

I D

D

~

Inclusion of the fence within the ground-grid area increases the size of the area and

thereby reduces often substantially the ground-grid resistance and hence the

maximum ground-grid voltage rises as well While the fence now tokes port fully in

~his rise this is not of concern if intemal and perimeter gradients of the grid are kept

Vlithin acceptable limits

Under the firs philosophy the perimeter condudor of the grid will normally either

follow the fence line or paraUel it at about O5-15m outside In either case the

oerimeter ground condudor and fence should be bonded eledrically at frequent

ntervals

Placement of the ground condudor diredly on the fence line permits the latter to be

iocated on the property line if desired without obtaining on easement to place 0

ground condudor on adjacent property On the other hand plocement of the ground

condudor a short distance outside the fence line will decrease the possible touch

)otentiol to which a person outside the fence could be subject Whether or not this

difference is importont will depend on the circumstonces

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 43: Alstom Training Manual

)

0 ~

J

D

j

r Q )

0

0

0

0

bullbull 0

bull (

)

()

0

()

J

()

-

-~

J

gt

Direct Stroke lightning Protection

Lightning conductors ore used to protect the equipment ond I~IS bars in the

Switchyord from lightning strokes Each conductor consists of a lightning

receiver a ground grid and an interconnection Typically the lightning conductor

can be lightning rods or ground wires

Proper earthing of lightning conductors is essential to prevent breaking down of the

insulating medium generally air between the lightning conductor and the object to be

protected due to very high voltages The protective odion of the lightning conductors is

bosed on the fact that charges stored on its tip in the leader stage of lightning

discharge produce the greatest field intensity along the path between the head of the

leader canal and the tip of the lightning condudor to which the discharg3 is directed

The space around a lightning conductor in which the probability of a lightning stroke is

small is called the Protective Zone The break down voltages of air gaps of tens of

meters have considerable probability scatter hence lightning conductors provide

protection with a certain degree of probability

Razevig Method

Pr(hcctive Zones of a Lightning Mast

Lightning Most

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 44: Alstom Training Manual

)

shyl

JJ

shy cmiddot

------1 0- )

0

Q

0

t)

0

9

I

_~ __L __ _ I

I I

I

0 Construction of the protective zone lightning rnosl 1 -implilicd conslruciion0 2 - prolective to ic conslructod I rom

4- I The protective zone of a single lightning mast up to 0

l

middot3 ~ -j r = 15 h

-- r)

l= 075 h ~ -~J if h gt 2l h 08 h

~-~

-

Where H - height of the lightning conductor ~

r - radius of protective zone at 0 height h ~l J

h - height of the obiect to be protected ~

J

_-_ gt

-

I

I ~ross 5cchorl n~ Ihe frnteeliy Inne 01 u tuIn

0 b sinqlc

E q

height 30m is shown in the figure

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 45: Alstom Training Manual

middot

As the effectiveness of lightning masts of height greater than 30 becomes less the volue obtained has to be multiplied by a co-efficient

- ~

p = 55 -JH

Two Ughtning Masts

The protective zone for two lightning masts has considerably greater dimensions than

Ie sum of the protedive zones of two single mosts

The internal port of the protective zone of two lightning masl~ In the plane passing

-+shy I

I I

k

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I I

I r

----_---shy -----------------Il---~~----T

---shy

I I

I I

0 I I

I I

1--_shy-

r- _

through ooth the lightning masts is bound by the are of 0 circle which can be constructed on three points two of them are the tips of the lightning masts at a height equal to ho The height of protedion at mid way between the lightning masts is

a ho = hshy h lt 30m

7 J

a

~) = hshy h gt 30m

J

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 46: Alstom Training Manual

7p a = h h

Provided the distance between the masts is less than seven times the active

height The external port of the protective zone is determined in the some way as for

single lightning masts Generally in large substations there are more than two lightning masts Th external part of protection is similar to that of two lightning masts

whereas the internal part is different The objects of height h falling inside the0 rectangle formed by four masts (or Ule triangle formed by three masts) will be protected

~ I in the case of the diagonal of the rectangle formed by four masts (or the

) diameter of the circle passing through the tips of the masts in triongular formation)

is less than eight times the active height of the lightning most The active height of 0 the most is the difference between the height of the most and the object protected )V

for 3 lightning masts for 4 lightning masts 0

i~

o s I0 i~ 1 ilt) i

bull e ~ o

bull 0

amp o lt= 8 (h - h) ifh lt= 30m

~ lt 8 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

S)

s lt= 7 ( h - h ) if h lt= 30 ma lt 7 ( h - h )p if h gt 30 m

)

0 Protective Zones of Ground Wires

0 The protective zone of a ground wire is shown in the figure The cross section of

[) protection zone on a perpendicular plane to the ground wire is constructed in the some way as for the lightning most with the only difference that breadth of the zone at the ground level for a wire less than 30m high is 12h~

)

r h b = 06h 1 -- hxgt 23 h)

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 47: Alstom Training Manual

bull bull bull

h

12h 1 -- [ hJOSh

J

o 0

()---- shy

o

) -+bull __-

bull 8 ~

f I

middot--rmiddot----~9

Ii

l

bull 0

hx gt 23 h

~Ol s(tCtiOfll) Iloteh ron_t C bullbull9 h

Furthermore if two ground wires are placed at a distance S =4ft between them the point situated on the ground surface on the midway between ground wires will notI ) be struck by lightning If the distance between the grind wires S lt 4h then the point situoted midway between the ground wires ot a level of hO wiD be protected~

S = hshy0

4

0

)

J

)

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 48: Alstom Training Manual

bull

+

1)

~)

j 10middot I I o I

Q

bull G

Prot~djon Angle MethodIbull Based on IS 2309

e--- --~ Protection angle instead of protedion zone can also be specified It is the angle between the vertical line passing through a ground wire and the line joining a condudor and the ground wire and lying on the plane perpendicular to the conductor axis bull

e t )

o 8

o o ~

Protection angleZ) Ground level

lightning Conductor

- -- Object to be

prolected

~ Generally the protection angle should not exceed 60 when placed between two o ground wires and 45deg when protected by one wire only

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 49: Alstom Training Manual

bullbullbull

o o ()

AtSTO)M

~)

t)

a o Q

o t ) ) bull

G

bullbull~- L ~RE-TENDERING DESIGN INPUTS~

~ )

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 50: Alstom Training Manual

AlSTOM

Pre-tendering Design Requirements

The basic objective of pre-tendering design for the Switchyardl Sub-station is to provide a simple reliable and economical configuration having maximum flexibility for operation and maintenance with minimum possible interruption in the event of equipment component failure Preliminary single line diagram and corresponding layout plan sectional drawing are bore minimum requirement for proposing a SwitchyordSub-station

------ even for a budgetory quote

0 In case these drawings are not furnished by the customer alongwith the enquiry the same ) are to be developed based on customers requirement of switching schemes In the

bull U

J absence of details of switching schemes from customer the some has to be proposed to them with advantagedisadvantage of different schemes The bus switching schemes generally followed are

I 0 a) For 400 kV i) One and Half breaker scheme

~ (Primary Transmission) ii Double main with Transfer bus

10 b) For 220 kV i) Double main with Transfer bus ---lt- ---- - (PrimarySecondary ii) Double moin bus ~e-

Transmission)

0

bull c For 13266 kV i) Double Main bus

) (Secondary Transmission) ii) Single main with-Transfer bus iii Single bus

Apart from these schemes (i) Sectionalised Main with Transfer bus (ii DoublE n

with by pass Isolators (iii) Sectionalised Double Main bus [IV) Mesh scheme etc ar~jO

adopted)

bull Once the SLD and Layout Plan amp Sections are available the bill of quantities can be9 prepared for major equipment I as well as auxiliary equipmentsmaterials

0

a Major eguipments are categorised as follows

v

1 Power Transformers eshy~

2 Circuit Breakers (with pre-insertion resistor if required) J

3 Current T ronsformers Q 4 Voltage Transformers

~

~

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 51: Alstom Training Manual

tJ

8

0 5 Capacitive Voltage Transformers

6 Isolators~ 7 lightning Arrestors ~

-- 8 Control amp Relay Panel 0 9 Power line Carrier Communication Equipments

9 10 EHV Coble terminating bushings (for UG Coble lines)

-1l Auxiliary eguipmentsmaterials are categorised as follows0

gt Bus Post Insulators

bullbull CJ

bullbull

) Disc Insulators

U

3 Insulator Hardwares with Sag compensation spring (if required))

4 Boy Morshalling Kiosks

5 CfVT CVT Junction Box

6 Clamps amp Connectors for equipments and busbars

7 Busbar materials

8 a) 11 kV Power ampControl Cables and Cable Glands b) HT Power Cables and Jointing Kitemiddot

bull 9 Coble Trays amp Support Angles

10 Sattery amp Bcttery Chargers~

i 11 AC Dish ~

12 6c Distribution Boord

bull ft- ) 13 a Earthing Materials

j b) lightning Protection System

14 Illumination for Switchyord ampControl room

15 Fire Fighting System (portablespray hydrant system) iJ 16 Structures

0 1 7 Neutral Grounding Resistors

0 18 Diesel Generating Sets

I) 19 SCADA

20 Toriff metering system Z 21 Auxiliary Transformers

~ 22 Air Conditioning ampVentilation

)

i ) i

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 52: Alstom Training Manual

- -

Major technical parameters considered for equipment are

0) Rated voltage

b) Design ambient temperature with permissible maximim temp rise

c) Breakdown insulation level

d)

e)

Creepage distance

Rated current carrying capacity

Rated short circuit current capacity with duration

Materiological data like altitude wind speed maximum amp minimum temperature selt-~ic level9

g ~ h) Cantilever stren) of bushingsupport insulator gt

bull c I)~ Electro mechanical strength of string insulators

bull c

bull Major technical parameters considered for Switchyard layout are

-~ -shy

o 1) Phose to phose clearance

bull 3t Sectional clearance

It 4) Ground clearance

5) raquoShort circuit force on equipment supports gontry structure -- shy---~-- 6J---JiOximum sag for longest proposed spanI 7) Main busbar height from ground (finished level

lot Following parameters are to be obtained from customer in the absence of detailed specification and drawings for rough estimation

l Soil data with soil bearing capacity and soil resistivity

2 Plot plan of the proposed area

3 location of the Control Room with resped to Switchyard

4 Distance of the Switchyard fence from the Power House in case of Power Station

5 location of the Generating Transformer with respect to Switchyard

6 length of the Transmission lines connected to the Switchyard

7 Available space for Switchyord (fence area

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 53: Alstom Training Manual

J

8 - Additional provision for spore bays

Follo~_ng information are to be obtained for availability of adeguate site facilitieuro

1 location of proposed site and nearest railway station

J 2 Acces$ibility to site by rood

3 Construction amp drinking water (freechargeable) ~ 4 Construction power (freechargeable) ) Following information are to be obtained for pl0viding post commissioning services to

() -~- -= customershy

o J Requirement of mandatory spores

o ) 2 Requirement of recommended spores d --=~middotj~-R~Uii~ment of special tools and tackles for operation amp maintenanceeuroI

4 ~~~~1~~~~~amp _~

~~= ~~R~uirement of testing equipments G bull

1) Following datos are required generally from customers for reasonable quotation

9 bull ~_~1~t~~)~ Breaker Single polegang operated livedead tonk pneumaticspring

- operated type duty cycle requirement creepage for interrupter --

1) (arc chamber) as well as support insulator closing and opening time indudivecapacitive charging curr~nt rating

livedead tonk type nominal capacitance in case of cvr Transformers creepage of the bushing bull

Shed profile creepage cantilever strength

Disc insulators stringlong rod insulator electro mechanical strength

e)CampR Panels 1) Numericalstaticeledro-magnetic relay

2) Additional requirement of Tariff metering with closs of accuracy

3) Requirement of busbar protection 4) Requirement of synchronising paneltrolley

S Requirement of separate disturbance recorder with event logging

6) Requirement of recorders like voltage frequency etc 7) Requirement of interfacing with SCADA

o

d)Disc Insulators

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 54: Alstom Training Manual

f) Isolators

g) Cables

-

() - -

hBusbar

i)Earthing material

1

0

~)

j) Battery

k) PLCC

~

0

bull 0

i) lightning Protection

i)

bull

t )

il

k)

Illumination

Structures

~

v -J

~)

J

8 Requirement of mimic panel

9) Simplexduplex type of panel

Singledouble break ConventionalPantograph single polegong operated motormanual operated aluminiumcopper blades creepage and cantilever strength of suaport insulators

PVCXlPE CopperAluminium ArmouredU narmoured Flame retardantordinary

Flexible Rigid bus CopperAluminium material

MS GICopper bars

lead acidNICAD ordinarymaintenance free In case of lead acid

i Phase to phasePhase to EarthPhase to Phose inter circuit coupling (in case of double circuit line)

ii) Programmablenon-programmable PlC terminal

iii Milli Henry requirement of line trap

By lightning MastShield WireSpikes on the Gantry Towers

Using lightning Mastseparate lighting Most or poles for light fixtures

1 Conductor tension for line take offline termir gantries

2 Short circuit forces

3) Wind pressure

4 Gantry arrangement

5) Conductor span

6 Minimum amp maximum temperature of the proposed areas

) Since major equipments with standard rating are supplied by different manufacturers with marginal differerce in Ex-works costs following items need to be near accurately

no estimated for a competitive quotation in on EHV Switchyard project of turnkey nature

1 Post Insulators

)

2) HT amp LT Power amp Control Cables and Accessories

J

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 55: Alstom Training Manual

3) Structures

4) Busbar materials

S) Clamps amp Connectors

6) Earthing material

7) Illumination System ~ 8) Post Insulators

~ - 9) Disc insulators amp hordware sets

~ 10) Lightning protection system-L

11) Battery sizing for totol DC loads rmiddot-L---shy

() J 0

0

~

0-_

bull )

-

6 ) ~

)3

il )

- 1

j

I

~ f

ltJ

shy-J

Air conditioning amp ventilation (if in scope)

__ me customers are also interested in alternate offer with better economical design in addition to the base offer as per layouts specified by them Within the stipulations made in specification for eledrical clearances altemate offer can be proposed if economized on following aspects

1) Switchyard spacebull 2) Busbar materials 3) Insulators amp Hardwares 4) Structures S) Illumination 6) Civil Works involvement bull 7) Power amp Control Cables 8) Earthing materials

A sicard desirput sheet developed for overall system requirement IS enclosed herewith for necc ~ data required from customer for pre-tendering design

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 56: Alstom Training Manual

---

() Ij (j (Jfj cJ(j u () U (J (J u U It tJ fJ O () () o (~ ltII u U (ITIRj At57t6)M

~ cJ

-~ ---I

NDER INfORMATION REPORT

II COMMERCIAL INPUT

CUSTOMER

iA) CUSTOMERS NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON 8) PRESENT LEvEL OF CONTACT

2 cUSTOMER REF

3 DUE DATE i

4 ICOMPETITORS

A) DOCUMENTS OBTAINED BY ~l ACTIVE INT~R~ST SHOVIN BY ~l P~~~ERRED BY CUSTOMER

~-ISOURCE 6~

FUNDING I

U~~~11~~t~~~~~~~mg~ ~~~~~sectJ~ TO j I r ~AST ~~PERIENC~ 9F THE ClSTOMER wiTH A) AlSTOM II

I 8) COMPETITIORS I I I

CONSULTANT (NAME ADDRESS amp CONTACT PERSON) i - bull I I

l i ~~~~~~T~r~ ~~E~ Of INV9LVEMENT Imiddot I

j I) i

PREPARE SPECIFICATIONS EVALUATE OffERSmiddot TECHNICALLY EVALUATE OFFERSmiddot COMMERCIAllY iPLACEMENT OF ORDEflt IDETAILED ENGINEERING ON RECEIPT OF ORDER

) TYPE OF CONTRACT 1

NEW I WElLmiddotKNOWN

I

Imiddot

i

fi l shy --r--- -I -- - -shy

I l I

i

YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO YES I NO

iYES I NO

DIVISIBLEINDIVISIBLE

IDGI (HI b 10uO (14 (1 Page 1 cJ l

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 57: Alstom Training Manual

v ~ J U -1 J ~ U Cj fj I bull I U fJ CJ fJ fJ U U fJ (j f) tI I fJ f- fj fJ (j U U U U

_ ---tA 1ST(5)M rt~ i

r i~RATf Of THE fOLLOWING TAXES 8 DUTIES IN THE STATE tH~~ THE PROJECT IS TO BE EXECUTED bull I~ ~ +Q~ SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE

SALES TAX 8 SURCHARGE (CONCESSIONAl

rrfllrNST ANY SPECifiC FORM AND APPLICABILITY)WPfkS CONTRACT TAX amp SURCHARGE IF ANY

ppCT~OI~ nSERVICE TAX ON DESIGN 8 ENGG If ANY 1 fJ ANYOT~ER TAXES LIKE ENTRY TAXES ETC

YES I NOt WfH~TOMER WILL fURNISH LOCAL gtALES TAX YES I NO

~t itrf~(~~SIONAl F0RJA I t~ J-JI

l(ls~t()JER WILL FLJRNISH C FORM I

I

2 PIE SID CONFERENCES DATE amp VENUE I -~--~ -- - -- ---- -_ -- - ~-- I -

I I

I I

i

I~~~ ~ ~g 1 I

I

4 l 8 TpoundRMS

OF PAYMENT -

~~

It SUPPLY r fRicTiON ~~f~Vll 1

9RfFERfNCE FOR PSUs YES I NO (If YES WHAT IS THE PERCENTAGE) ~1P~RCHASE PREFERENCE YES I NO

~l~~Cf f~EfERENCE ~ YES I NO I t ~I

If 10QfOl08 2000 O~ 07 Page 2 017

I

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 58: Alstom Training Manual

ltj _ 11Imiddot~ t ~

----------------~--~ ~ bull

ALSTQIM ~ shy- ~

~

APPROVEDPREfERRED MAKES

f~eQU4llfICATION REO (PLEASE REFER NOTE NO 21

KTAANSFQRMERS YES NO ~~h~i ~WITCHGEAR YES NO V SWITCHGEAR

I

YES NO ROTECTION amp CONTROl PACKAGE YES NO lAiSTOM AS A CONTRATOR YES NO

I

-gPE I II SUPPlY ERECTION CIVil WORKS

f9~q ~~~URITY ImiddotL--shyI I

~T~~TION FORMlJ~ FOR C -4

AIRmiddotCONDITIONING EQUIPMENT----middotmiddotmiddot-middot1middot middot-middot

VAlUE OF THE PROJECT bull-_ - -__

~-~~~~lEI I I I _middot ____L _ - -- I l -_ ACTION PROPOSED AND SPECIFIC STRAREGY shy-- --- -- ~ _ I bull-- bull - -- bull ~-- ~ bull ~rmiddotmiddot

1OTbullbull - 0 WS NOTiTHAT NO o

D1r-AiiiIHOUiD1l1

ilr-- NUlli c i0 i iNCOMPujWTiiouCIfIlD~~ ~Nclo~ii~oi iNHouiiQui~Mi~l JJt~~~~rCAiiitLW)j~~~ ~iiAimiddotL~ _ ~ I~~S~~~~ QU~~INTlsIRVIC~ ~~ ~~ Mng~ RE~~~O_CUA~~A~ ~~~TO MIl ~~ ~~~~ Eg BYA lACK-UP GUARANTlI ITC

i 13 ALL INHOUSE EQUIPMENTS E_HV-CB-~ScAriAc PANELS MV~ SWITCHGEARTHE RESPEtii FORMATS~ 1 bull -- _ gt_ _ bull _- bull -_ __ _____ ~_ __ __ bullbull

~ j S~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~ ~~ ~H-~DUP ~~$~REl() il~ ~ ~~- ~ COpy Ol~ ~E TO BII DIRECTLY TO THE RESPECTIVI UNITS I~7 i4 iN~CASE OriUDGpoundTAiiYOFF-Ea5ITEM NOS ~f 12121 amp 23-24 ARE NOTmiddotMANDATORY

q-ofJ

~i~ ~ ) I

1 cJgtI middot~i i~ bullbull ~bull~ii~I~~~~f~~f i ll

~~~ ~l~ (~p bull

bulli bullbull --fl PaQ41 3017 I)~ 10 20000407

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 59: Alstom Training Manual

2

( ~j r

- W t bull

1 middotmiddotmiddot141 tLSTO)M ~~

bull TECHNICAL INPUT

REMARKSNO PARAMETERS

1 System Rated Voltage kVrms

SYltem switching scheme (tick among the following as applicable)bull

Single main bus t

I

Single main bus with transfer I

I iDouble main bus I

I II

Double main bus with transfer I - ~

I - jIBreaker and a half +-- i

I IOther (please specify) I I

3 SYltem rated fault current kA period s I I i I

4

-~-

Number of Bays I

0 Une I I

b Transformer _ shy -

shy ~~~~~middoth~i~~~~~ ~c~=~ ~-- shy --tmiddot shy ---shy

e Bus Readorl _ j _

f Tie for 1 feeder I j ii i

g Tie for 2 feeders I I j I I I

I I I

r

Ishy shy i - shy

i

- __ _ I

i I- ___ - shy -r

------shy ___- middot--middotmiddotmiddotmiddot1--middotmiddot I

bull - - t I

I

~ - - -

- -

~-

i

~ bullbullbullbull

~ ~

~

4_

OQfOJ08 8 10000407 Page 4 of 7 1

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 60: Alstom Training Manual

7

I

_~bullbull_e I __ 1 1- )1 iI ~ bullbull _

__~ __ 11 1 bull-~ 11

v-I I ~ ~djtl ~IJ ~

tlSTO)M TIR

h Spore future (unequipped)

5

bull

Meteorological Dato

10 Altitude (less than 1000 m in case more than 1000 m indicate value)

6

b Wind Pressure kg m2

c PollutionCreepage Light Medium Heavy Very heavy

Sitemiddot Plot plan (Reference drawing I if available) lor Space limitations

Sile conlour mop (Reference drawing if available j

Sile data

a Soil be~rin) c~p(J~ity or soil type $a~dy ~Iock cott~n I _

b

(not required if civil works is ~xduded) I Soil Resi5tivity Ohmmiddot m I

I -shy

I

I

I I I IIS~ ~etai~~ I i

1 Location of site ~- shy

bullAvailability of approach road and its suitability for movement - _- - -- - - --- ---- -------middot_middot-1--middotmiddotmiddot--- -- -_ - - 1-_-shy

of transformer

Whether site is reasonably levelled if nol indiucole quantum of filling required

Ust of local erection controdors and civil contarciors 10 be

enclosed

)QF0308 B 20000407

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 61: Alstom Training Manual

-I _ ~ ~ I ~ ( ~ l ~

II I ~ I ~-1 JLSTOlM i

i 1 f

Drawings (Indicate drawing numbJrsfg) drawing ~do$ed) lt ~ )

SLD

loyout Pion

Sclion Control Room

Struclurol I

rfControIShemolics ~OPIIXCLUSJONS

middot~~~~~E~R I I ~~~~ c amp R PANELS f ~ YESNOIS~~ -- -t --- 1 ---- -- Y~~INO~VSWCHGEAR_ __ _ l _ __ __J___i____ ____ y~~o_ _ _1 _bull ___

anl of the abov~l~ i~~~~R~~~-~Icidomat ------ _-- -- - _I of Ihe Repectlv Unit to b ENCLOSED - __ ~-___ - _ -- -~ 4-middot - -- ~ - ~ ~-

~ Civil~~ du~~L___ i 1 t~

Ys~o ------- 1if- ------ SitlvI~~L_ -rr --r------ -- ------ rsi ~ I ~____ FounE~~~~~5~--~JJt~--~ i 1 ______----- y~I~_~___ __ ~ ~ Road works I YasNo I7 -_ - - jnc~-bOunaQr)walf ---- - --lt--r--~--- ySiNomiddot middotmiddotmiddotmiddot 1 ~ -- Dr~i~~g - middott _ I - bull bullbull_ --- bullbull------ - YeSNo 1-~ I

~ Conlfoi roo buldng 1-- =-~- - I Y~~o IYesNo~~i~htin9 1middot-- _ __ l-middot_ middot

~i~~o~iti~middotnin~ I _ Y~sNo r I

YesNo Swilchyord iIIuminotion -_bullbull - bullbullbullbull p bullbullbull- - bullbull shy t

)Qf0308 8 20000407 Page 6 of 7

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I

Page 62: Alstom Training Manual

i )~l

bull c3~HlLc-~ ~f -r~ ~ A~~ fJmiddot u v ~w

I

19 IList of designdrwi~~p 10 b~ s~~I~led with oilor --~-r- - _ ___ r r - ~- -- -- ~ - _ --- ~---bull _ ~~~~I~ ~~ di~~rQm~ _ __ _~_____bull__ Ybullbull~__ ~~~c~ ~r~wing I _ __ bull__ VaNo _

Other drowngs (please inicote ~--t-=- -=-L~~~middot~-I~---r - __ _

Design colcullions (Please specifically indicate) j~~~--------=-T T__~ ---T-I-____- shy

not be given with budgetory offers and tm~~11---------------by the cuslomer and 0110 nole that bullI bull -

bullekl for preapartioll of drowings - - - J __ middotmiddot_-t -

-_ shy ~) -+---I-~I--t--+---~1-------i--~ I

i NOlus tmiddotshy I -~ ___ ______ ~ 1 InEormolion No lOis notossonlia~lr requirod for ~~-r__________~b_u_d~g~e_la_~~o_H_e_~ I II

2 wu(J au( ull Uht lhlWs 10 be fULlu tJ nul Iv luit GUNK (ilJr~~ i I

OampMENTS BY RSM IT I

r~ l f~f- I

ilJi

t1W~P ___ ( ==-____ I I

k bull t~ (SIGNATURE1 lATE) I

t ~ALDECISON QUOTE C~ltT qnQ~2~~_ __

nATE) I I I (SIG~~TUREl _ I

shy

~ I CATEGORY I

I

gti i J I I ii

~tF~lEIVtD

~rrs DY H~DrM~l~ Ji---i- II I I


Recommended